From 1c4f62ae22e72470779b6b689ee9cabb3a997875 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Fri, 20 Jan 2023 17:51:45 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 01/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 0e7c3aaf55..7a3ac2d2c3 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:7 du65 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ διακονία τοῦ θανάτου 1 Here, the word **ministry** could refer primarily to: (1) the action of “ministering.” In this case, the word refers to how Moses “administered” the old covenant. Alternate translation: “the service of this death” or “the act of ministering that led to death” (2) the system of **ministry**. In this case, the word refers to the old covenant or its laws. Alternate translation: “the system of this death” or “the laws that led to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:7 ut6r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ διακονία τοῦ θανάτου 1 If your language does not use an abstract nouns for the idea of **death**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “die.” Alternate translation: “the ministry that causes people die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:7 j1hp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐν γράμμασιν ἐντετυπωμένη λίθοις 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it (see also [Exodus 34:1](../exo/34/01.md)). Alternate translation: “which God engraved in letters on stones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -3:7 rx13 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν γράμμασιν ἐντετυπωμένη λίθοις 1 Here Paul refers to how God **engraved** or carved the regulations for the **ministry** on **stones** or tablets. Much as in the previous verse, **letters** refers to the alphabet, so the point is that God used writing. Paul is probably referring to the story about how Moses met God on a mountain, and God carved the regulations of the covenant on two pieces of stone. You can read this story in [Exodus 34:1–28](../exo/34/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “engraved in writing by God onto two stone slabs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:7 rx13 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν γράμμασιν ἐντετυπωμένη λίθοις 1 Here Paul refers to how God **engraved** or carved the regulations for the **ministry** on **stones** or tablets. Much as in the previous verse, **letters** refers to written characters, so the point is that God used writing. Paul is probably referring to the story about how Moses met God on a mountain, and God carved the regulations of the covenant on two pieces of stone. You can read this story in [Exodus 34:1–28](../exo/34/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “engraved in writing by God onto two stone slabs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:7 r5p5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐγενήθη ἐν δόξῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “was very great” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:7 myms rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὥστε μὴ δύνασθαι ἀτενίσαι τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ εἰς τὸ πρόσωπον Μωϋσέως, διὰ τὴν δόξαν τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ, τὴν καταργουμένην 1 Here Paul refers to a story about what happened after God **engraved** the stone tablets. When Moses returned to talk to the Israelites, his face shone brightly because he had been talking to God. In other words, some of God’s **glory** became part of Moses’ **face**, and the Israelites could not **look intently** at his face because it was a little like looking at God. You can read this story in [Exodus 34:29–35](../exo/34/29.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit or include a footnote explaining the story. Alternate translation: “so that the sons of Israel were not able to look carefully at the face of Moses because of the fading glory on his face that came from talking with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:7 s9zp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τοὺς υἱοὺς 1 Although the word **sons** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any children or descendants, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that applies to both men and women or you could refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “the sons and daughters” or “the children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) From 142820d22e43080574ada52b8147c04d40f91254 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Fri, 20 Jan 2023 17:52:12 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 02/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 7a3ac2d2c3..d8a56681ad 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 2:17 vpdc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατέναντι Θεοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **in the presence of God** could indicate that: (1) they **speak** as they do because they know that **God** sees or knows what they do. So, they speak in a way that pleases **God**. Alternate translation: “as God desires” or “with God watching” (2) they **speak** with **God** as a witness guaranteeing what they say. Alternate translation: “with God as witness” or “with God guaranteeing it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2:17 u2zb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ 1 Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with **Christ**. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains how they **speak**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that they **speak** as those who are united to **Christ**. Alternate translation: “as Christians” or “as those united to Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 3:1 mdwx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἀρχόμεθα & ἑαυτοὺς & μὴ χρῄζομεν 1 Here, just as in [2:14–15](../02/14.md), [17](../02/17.md), the word **we** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “Are we who preach beginning … ourselves … we do not need … do we” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “Am I beginning … myself … I do not need … do I” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -3:intro f7rh 0 # 2 Corinthians 3 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * Qualification for ministry (3:1–6)\n * Ministry of Moses and ministry of Paul (3:7–4:6)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Letters of recommendation\n\nIn [3:1–3](../03/01.md), Paul refers to “letters of recommendation.” These were letters that a person carried with them when they traveled to a new place. Someone that the traveler knew would write that the traveler could be trusted and should be welcomed, and the traveler would give this letter to people that he or she visited. If something like this is not a common practice in your culture, you may need to explain it for your readers in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/letter]])\n\n### Letter and Spirit\n\nIn [3:6–8](../03/06.md), Paul contrasts “letter” and “Spirit.” In these verses, the word “letter” refers to the letters in the alphabet, and the word “Spirit” refers to the Holy Spirit. Paul’s point is that whatever is characterized by the “letter” is something that is only written down and does not have any power. Whatever is characterized by the “Spirit” has power and can change people. Although it also might be written down, the “Spirit” gives it power. Paul uses this contrast to describe one of the differences between the old covenant (“letter”) and the new covenant (“Spirit”). Consider a natural way to express this contrast in your language. \n\n### Glory\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul speaks extensively of “glory.” He indicates that the old covenant and ministry had glory, but the new covenant and ministry have much more glory. The word “glory” refers to how great, powerful, and amazing someone or something is. Consider how to express this idea throughout the chapter. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]])\n\n### Veiling of the glory on Moses’ face\n\nIn [3:7](../03/07.md), [13](../03/13.md), Paul refers to a story about what happened when Moses received the Ten Commandments from God. Because he met God and spoke with him, Moses’ face became bright or shining. Because of that, Moses would cover his face with a veil or cloth when he was with the Israelites after he spoke with God. You can read this story in [Exodus 34:29–35](../exo/34/29.md). Paul also notes that the brightness or “glory” on Moses’ face would fade away. This detail cannot be found directly in the story in Exodus. Paul either inferred it from the story, or it was tradition to say that the “glory” faded away. If your readers would not understand what Paul refers to in these verses, you could include a footnote or explanatory information. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/veil]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### The Corinthians as a letter of recommendation\n\nIn [3:2–3](../03/02.md), Paul describes the Corinthians themselves as a letter of recommendation for him and those with him. He speaks in this way because anyone who knows the Corinthians will know that they believed because of Paul and those who worked with him. In this way, the Corinthians “recommend” Paul as a true apostle of Jesus. If possible, preserve the metaphor of a letter of recommendation or express the idea with a simile. \n\n### The “veil”\n\nAfter he introduces how Moses put an actual “veil” over his face, Paul begins to use the word “veil” and related words in figurative ways (see [3:14–18](../03/14.md)). He claims that people who are not united to Christ cannot understand the Old Testament, and he describes this inability to understand as a “veil” that covers their hearts. In other words, just as the the veil obscured the glory on Moses’ face, so the meaning of the Old Testament is obscured for someone who hears it but does not believe in Jesus. However, \nPaul says that this “veil” is taken away when someone believes in Jesus. Because of that, those who believe have no “veil” and can reflect God’s glory even more than Moses’ did. This is a complex figure of speech that connects directly to the story about Moses and his veil. Because of that, it is important to preserve the “veil” language. If your readers would not understand that Paul is speaking figuratively, you could use a simile to express the idea. \n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “The Lord is the Spirit”\n\nIn [3:17](../03/17.md), Paul states that “the Lord is the Spirit.” Scholars have understood this sentence in three primary ways. First, Paul could be defining who he meant when he referred to “the Lord” in the previous verse ([3:16](../03/16.md)). Second, Paul could be stating that the way that believers experience “the Lord” is as the Holy Spirit. Third, Paul could be stating that “the Lord” is a spirit or is spiritual. It is most likely true that Paul is defining who “the Lord” he has referred to is, so it is recommended that you follow the first option. See the notes on this verse for translation possibilities. +3:intro f7rh 0 # 2 Corinthians 3 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * Qualification for ministry (3:1–6)\n * Ministry of Moses and ministry of Paul (3:7–4:6)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Letters of recommendation\n\nIn [3:1–3](../03/01.md), Paul refers to “letters of recommendation.” These were letters that a person carried with them when they traveled to a new place. Someone that the traveler knew would write that the traveler could be trusted and should be welcomed, and the traveler would give this letter to people that he or she visited. If something like this is not a common practice in your culture, you may need to explain it for your readers in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/letter]])\n\n### Letter and Spirit\n\nIn [3:6–8](../03/06.md), Paul contrasts “letter” and “Spirit.” In these verses, the word “letter” refers to written characters, and the word “Spirit” refers to the Holy Spirit. Paul’s point is that whatever is characterized by the “letter” is something that is only written down and does not have any power. Whatever is characterized by the “Spirit” has power and can change people. Although it also might be written down, the “Spirit” gives it power. Paul uses this contrast to describe one of the differences between the old covenant (“letter”) and the new covenant (“Spirit”). Consider a natural way to express this contrast in your language. \n\n### Glory\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul speaks extensively of “glory.” He indicates that the old covenant and ministry had glory, but the new covenant and ministry have much more glory. The word “glory” refers to how great, powerful, and amazing someone or something is. Consider how to express this idea throughout the chapter. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]])\n\n### Veiling of the glory on Moses’ face\n\nIn [3:7](../03/07.md), [13](../03/13.md), Paul refers to a story about what happened when Moses received the Ten Commandments from God. Because he met God and spoke with him, Moses’ face became bright or shining. Because of that, Moses would cover his face with a veil or cloth when he was with the Israelites after he spoke with God. You can read this story in [Exodus 34:29–35](../exo/34/29.md). Paul also notes that the brightness or “glory” on Moses’ face would fade away. This detail cannot be found directly in the story in Exodus. Paul either inferred it from the story, or it was tradition to say that the “glory” faded away. If your readers would not understand what Paul refers to in these verses, you could include a footnote or explanatory information. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/veil]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### The Corinthians as a letter of recommendation\n\nIn [3:2–3](../03/02.md), Paul describes the Corinthians themselves as a letter of recommendation for him and those with him. He speaks in this way because anyone who knows the Corinthians will know that they believed because of Paul and those who worked with him. In this way, the Corinthians “recommend” Paul as a true apostle of Jesus. If possible, preserve the metaphor of a letter of recommendation or express the idea with a simile. \n\n### The “veil”\n\nAfter he introduces how Moses put an actual “veil” over his face, Paul begins to use the word “veil” and related words in figurative ways (see [3:14–18](../03/14.md)). He claims that people who are not united to Christ cannot understand the Old Testament, and he describes this inability to understand as a “veil” that covers their hearts. In other words, just as the the veil obscured the glory on Moses’ face, so the meaning of the Old Testament is obscured for someone who hears it but does not believe in Jesus. However, \nPaul says that this “veil” is taken away when someone believes in Jesus. Because of that, those who believe have no “veil” and can reflect God’s glory even more than Moses’ did. This is a complex figure of speech that connects directly to the story about Moses and his veil. Because of that, it is important to preserve the “veil” language. If your readers would not understand that Paul is speaking figuratively, you could use a simile to express the idea. \n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “The Lord is the Spirit”\n\nIn [3:17](../03/17.md), Paul states that “the Lord is the Spirit.” Scholars have understood this sentence in three primary ways. First, Paul could be defining who he meant when he referred to “the Lord” in the previous verse ([3:16](../03/16.md)). Second, Paul could be stating that the way that believers experience “the Lord” is as the Holy Spirit. Third, Paul could be stating that “the Lord” is a spirit or is spiritual. It is most likely true that Paul is defining who “the Lord” he has referred to is, so it is recommended that you follow the first option. See the notes on this verse for translation possibilities. 3:1 um8x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἀρχόμεθα πάλιν ἑαυτοὺς συνιστάνειν? 1 Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question implies that the answer is “no, we are not.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “We are certainly not beginning to commend ourselves again!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 3:1 fuds rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάλιν 1 Here, the word **again** implies that Paul and those with him had already “commended themselves” at some point in the past. Most likely, this happened when they first met the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this more explicit. Alternate translation: “once more” or “again, like we did at first” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:1 noiz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἢ 1 The word **Or** introduces an alternative to what Paul asked in the first question. In that question, he implied that they were not “commending” themselves again. With **Or**, then, Paul poses a question that introduces the incorrect alternative: they might need **letters of recommendation**. He introduces this incorrect alternative to show that the implication of his first question is true: they are not “commending” themselves again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Or** with a word that signifies a contrast or gives an alternative. Alternate translation: “Rather,” or “On the contrary,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) From 5033a148494249e2458493280a990937ada5ba6c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Fri, 20 Jan 2023 17:58:17 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 03/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index d8a56681ad..fae6f57b53 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:3 dsxa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διακονηθεῖσα ὑφ’ ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **having been administered by us** could indicate that: (1) “we” delivered the **letter**. Alternate translation: “having been delivered by us” or “having been sent by us” (2) “we” helped **Christ** compose the **letter**. Alternate translation: “having been composed with our help” or “that we wrote down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:3 bfsl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Here, just as in [3:1–2](../03/01.md), the word **us** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “us who preach the gospel” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 3:3 akc6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ἐνγεγραμμένη οὐ μέλανι, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ζῶντος, οὐκ ἐν πλαξὶν λιθίναις, ἀλλ’ ἐν πλαξὶν καρδίαις σαρκίναις 1 If your language would not put the negative statements before the positive statements, you could reverse them. Alternate translation: “written with the Spirit of the living God, not with ink, on tablets of hearts of flesh, not on tablets of stone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) -3:3 vyuh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ζῶντος, οὐκ ἐν πλαξὶν λιθίναις, ἀλλ’ ἐν πλαξὶν καρδίαις σαρκίναις 1 These phrases leave out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word **written** from earlier in the sentence in some or all of the phrases. Alternate translation: “but written with the Spirit of the living God, not written on tablets of stone, but written on tablets of hearts of flesh” or “but with the Spirit of the living God, not written on tablets of stone, but on tablets of hearts of flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +3:3 vyuh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ζῶντος, οὐκ ἐν πλαξὶν λιθίναις, ἀλλ’ ἐν πλαξὶν καρδίαις σαρκίναις 1 These phrases leave out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word **written** from earlier in the sentence in some or all of the phrases. Alternate translation: “but written with the Spirit of the living God, not written on tablets of stone but written on tablets of hearts of flesh” or “but with the Spirit of the living God, not written on tablets of stone, but on tablets of hearts of flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 3:3 q96q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐνγεγραμμένη οὐ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “Christ” did it. Alternate translation: “which Christ wrote not” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 3:3 qt5g rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown μέλανι 1 Here, the word **ink** refers to colored liquid that people in Paul’s culture used to write letters and words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use whatever term naturally refers to what people use to write letters and words. Alternate translation: “with a pen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 3:3 t5ah rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Θεοῦ ζῶντος 1 Here, the phrase **living God** identifies God as the one who “lives” and possibly as the one who gives life. The primary point is that **God** actually lives, unlike inanimate idols and other things that people may call gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that emphasizes that God really lives. Alternate translation: “of the God who lives” or “of the true God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 5eb0e5e01de8ba24101f4229ad06d608719097ef Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Fri, 20 Jan 2023 18:02:40 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 04/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index fae6f57b53..ee26542481 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:3 dsxa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διακονηθεῖσα ὑφ’ ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **having been administered by us** could indicate that: (1) “we” delivered the **letter**. Alternate translation: “having been delivered by us” or “having been sent by us” (2) “we” helped **Christ** compose the **letter**. Alternate translation: “having been composed with our help” or “that we wrote down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:3 bfsl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Here, just as in [3:1–2](../03/01.md), the word **us** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “us who preach the gospel” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 3:3 akc6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ἐνγεγραμμένη οὐ μέλανι, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ζῶντος, οὐκ ἐν πλαξὶν λιθίναις, ἀλλ’ ἐν πλαξὶν καρδίαις σαρκίναις 1 If your language would not put the negative statements before the positive statements, you could reverse them. Alternate translation: “written with the Spirit of the living God, not with ink, on tablets of hearts of flesh, not on tablets of stone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) -3:3 vyuh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ζῶντος, οὐκ ἐν πλαξὶν λιθίναις, ἀλλ’ ἐν πλαξὶν καρδίαις σαρκίναις 1 These phrases leave out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word **written** from earlier in the sentence in some or all of the phrases. Alternate translation: “but written with the Spirit of the living God, not written on tablets of stone but written on tablets of hearts of flesh” or “but with the Spirit of the living God, not written on tablets of stone, but on tablets of hearts of flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +3:3 vyuh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ζῶντος, οὐκ ἐν πλαξὶν λιθίναις, ἀλλ’ ἐν πλαξὶν καρδίαις σαρκίναις 1 These phrases leave out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word **written** from earlier in the sentence in some or all of the phrases. Alternate translation: “but written with the Spirit of the living God, not written on tablets of stone but written on tablets of hearts of flesh” or “but with the Spirit of the living God, not written on tablets of stone but on tablets of hearts of flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 3:3 q96q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐνγεγραμμένη οὐ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “Christ” did it. Alternate translation: “which Christ wrote not” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 3:3 qt5g rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown μέλανι 1 Here, the word **ink** refers to colored liquid that people in Paul’s culture used to write letters and words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use whatever term naturally refers to what people use to write letters and words. Alternate translation: “with a pen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 3:3 t5ah rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Θεοῦ ζῶντος 1 Here, the phrase **living God** identifies God as the one who “lives” and possibly as the one who gives life. The primary point is that **God** actually lives, unlike inanimate idols and other things that people may call gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that emphasizes that God really lives. Alternate translation: “of the God who lives” or “of the true God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -289,11 +289,11 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:6 t785 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς διακόνους 1 Here, just as in [3:1–5](../03/01.md), the word **us** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “us, who preach the gospel, … as servants” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “me … as a servant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 3:6 r5ea rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession διακόνους καινῆς διαθήκης 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify himself and those with him as **servants** who “serve” for the benefit of **a new covenant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “as those who serve a new covenant” or “as servants who administer a new covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:6 j8rd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οὐ γράμματος, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματος 1 If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two clauses here. Alternate translation: “of the Spirit, not of the letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) -3:6 poyq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ γράμματος, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματος 1 When Paul contrasts **letter** and **Spirit**, he implies that **letter** describes the old covenant and **Spirit** describes the new covenant. What he means is that the old covenant was only written down and could not change people on the inside. On the other hand, the new covenant is empowered by the Holy **Spirit**, who can change people on the inside. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this contrast more explicit. Alternate translation: “not a covenant of the letter that is powerless, but a covenant of the powerful Spirit” or “not one that is only written down, but one that the Spirit puts inside people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:6 poyq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ γράμματος, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματος 1 When Paul contrasts **letter** and **Spirit**, he implies that **letter** describes the old covenant and **Spirit** describes the new covenant. What he means is that the old covenant was only written down and could not change people on the inside. On the other hand, the new covenant is empowered by the Holy **Spirit**, who can change people on the inside. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this contrast more explicit. Alternate translation: “not a covenant of the letter that is powerless but a covenant of the powerful Spirit” or “not one that is only written down but one that the Spirit puts inside people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:6 dp6i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy γράμματος & τὸ & γράμμα 1 Here, the word **letter** refers generally to a message written using sound-symbols called letters. More specifically, Paul uses the word **letter** to refer to the old covenant, a written document. It could not change people like the **Spirit** can. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a message written in “letters”. Alternate translation: “in written form … what was written” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -3:6 bdrz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession γράμματος, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματος 1 Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **covenant** that is given or mediated by the **Spirit**, not by the **letter**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in letters, but by the Spirit” or “mediated by letter, but by the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +3:6 bdrz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession γράμματος, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματος 1 Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **covenant** that is given or mediated by the **Spirit**, not by the **letter**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in letters but by the Spirit” or “mediated by letter but by the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:6 tc4u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Πνεύματος & τὸ δὲ Πνεῦμα 1 Here, the word **Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “of God’s Spirit … but God’s Spirit” (2) the spirit of a person, or their mind or heart. Alternate translation: “of the spirit … but the spirit” or “of the heart … but the heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -3:6 q4at rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τὸ & γράμμα ἀποκτέννει 1 Here Paul speaks as if **the letter** were a person who **kills** others. He speaks in this way to indicate that **the letter** (which refers to the old covenant and its regulations) does not have the power to give life, but instead can only condemn people to die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Alternate translation: “the letter is like someone who kills” or “the letter dooms people to die” or “the letter causes death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +3:6 q4at rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τὸ & γράμμα ἀποκτέννει 1 Here Paul speaks as if **the letter** were a person who **kills** others. He speaks in this way to indicate that **the letter** (which refers to the old covenant and its regulations) does not have the power to give life but instead can only condemn people to die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Alternate translation: “the letter is like someone who kills” or “the letter dooms people to die” or “the letter causes death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 3:7 lyf7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 3:7 yzhq rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as **if** the **glory** of the **ministry** of **death** were a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “given that.” Alternate translation: “since” or “given that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 3:7 rife rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡ διακονία τοῦ θανάτου 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **ministry** that leads to **death**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that leads to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) From 7c900a551098069c8133f0d6079de9966e8e5ca4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Fri, 20 Jan 2023 18:18:09 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 06/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index ee26542481..af9d51ad37 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -315,8 +315,8 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:8 bmme rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Here, the word **Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “of God’s Spirit” (2) the “spirit” of a person, or their mind or heart. Alternate translation: “of the spirit” or “of the heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:8 tcp5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μᾶλλον & ἐν δόξῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **imitators**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “much more great” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:9 m2ci rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces further explanation of what Paul has said about the two “ministries” in [3:7–8](../03/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “Even more,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -3:9 p7p5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as **if** the **glory** of the **ministry of this condemnation** were a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “given that.” Alternate translation: “since” or “given that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) -3:9 ufq6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῇ διακονίᾳ τῆς κατακρίσεως & ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 Here, the word **ministry** could refer primarily to: (1) the action of “ministering.” In this case, the word refers to how people “administered” the the two covenants. Alternate translation: “the service of this condemnation … the service of this righteousness” or “the act of ministering that leads to this condemnation … the act of ministering that leads to this righteousness” (2) the system of **ministry**. In this case, the word refers to a covenant or its principles. Alternate translation: “the system of this condemnation … the system of this righteousness” or “the law that leads to condemnation … the principle that leads to righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:9 p7p5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as **if** the **glory** of the **ministry of this condemnation** were only a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “given that.” Alternate translation: “since” or “given that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +3:9 ufq6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῇ διακονίᾳ τῆς κατακρίσεως & ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 Here, the word **ministry** could refer primarily to: (1) the action of “ministering.” In this case, the word refers to how people “administered” the two covenants. Alternate translation: “the service of this condemnation … the service of this righteousness” or “the act of ministering that leads to this condemnation … the act of ministering that leads to this righteousness” (2) the system of **ministry**. In this case, the word refers to a covenant or its principles. Alternate translation: “the system of this condemnation … the system of this righteousness” or “the law that leads to condemnation … the principle that leads to righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:9 k779 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῇ διακονίᾳ τῆς κατακρίσεως 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **ministry** that leads to **condemnation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that caused this condemnation” or “the ministry that ended in this condemnation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:9 tcxw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ διακονίᾳ τῆς κατακρίσεως, δόξα 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **condemnation** and **glory**, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that caused people to be condemned was great” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:9 if33 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations πολλῷ μᾶλλον περισσεύει ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης δόξῃ 1 Here, the phrase **much more** marks this clause as an exclamation, not a question. Paul uses this exclamation to emphatically contrast the two “ministries.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a way that naturally contrasts the two “ministries.” Alternate translation: “then certainly much more the ministry of this righteousness abounds in glory.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) From 06bf3e7c37906a24c7951ee82a649702983891d5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Fri, 20 Jan 2023 18:29:38 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 07/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index af9d51ad37..83fcfd2259 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -322,7 +322,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:9 if33 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations πολλῷ μᾶλλον περισσεύει ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης δόξῃ 1 Here, the phrase **much more** marks this clause as an exclamation, not a question. Paul uses this exclamation to emphatically contrast the two “ministries.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a way that naturally contrasts the two “ministries.” Alternate translation: “then certainly much more the ministry of this righteousness abounds in glory.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) 3:9 egmy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **ministry** that leads to **righteousness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that caused this righteousness” or “the ministry that ended in this righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:9 e5zz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πολλῷ μᾶλλον περισσεύει ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης δόξῃ. 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **righteousness** and **glory**, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that makes people righteous is even more great” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -3:10 q8bg rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ γὰρ 1 Here, the phrase **for indeed** indicates that Paul is adding more information (**indeed**) that supports what he said about **glory** in [3:7–9](../03/07.md) (**for**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce added information that supports a previous statement. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “And in fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +3:10 q8bg rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ γὰρ 1 Here, the phrase **For indeed** indicates that Paul is adding more information that supports what he said about **glory** in [3:7–9](../03/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce added information that supports a previous statement. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “And in fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 3:10 n4pe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ δεδοξασμένον & τῆς ὑπερβαλλούσης δόξης 1 Here, the phrase **{what} had been glorified** refers to the old covenant that God gave through Moses. The phrase **surpassing glory** refers to the new covenant that Paul and those with him serve. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what these phrases refer to more explicit. Alternate translation: “the old covenant that was glorified … the surpassing glory of the new covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:10 t2dq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ δεδόξασται, τὸ δεδοξασμένον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If possible, avoid stating who does the “glorifying,” since Paul is focusing on the fact of “glory” rather than on the action of becoming “glorious.” Alternate translation: “what had glory does not have glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 3:10 hmcu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οὐ δεδόξασται, τὸ δεδοξασμένον ἐν τούτῳ τῷ μέρει 1 Here, the phrase **in this part** could modify: (1) in what way the old covenant is **not glorified**. In other words, **in this part** introduces the way in which something that has **been glorified** can actually be **not glorified**. Alternate translation: “what had been glorified is not glorified, and here is why:” or “what had been glorified is not glorified in this way” (2) **{what} had been glorified**. In other words, the old covenant was **glorified** only “partially.” Alternate translation: “what had been glorified in part is not glorified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) From 062c0a8366379143f747114b57c752173606b2b7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Fri, 20 Jan 2023 23:06:35 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 08/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 83fcfd2259..76f806a0cb 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:7 myms rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὥστε μὴ δύνασθαι ἀτενίσαι τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ εἰς τὸ πρόσωπον Μωϋσέως, διὰ τὴν δόξαν τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ, τὴν καταργουμένην 1 Here Paul refers to a story about what happened after God **engraved** the stone tablets. When Moses returned to talk to the Israelites, his face shone brightly because he had been talking to God. In other words, some of God’s **glory** became part of Moses’ **face**, and the Israelites could not **look intently** at his face because it was a little like looking at God. You can read this story in [Exodus 34:29–35](../exo/34/29.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit or include a footnote explaining the story. Alternate translation: “so that the sons of Israel were not able to look carefully at the face of Moses because of the fading glory on his face that came from talking with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:7 s9zp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τοὺς υἱοὺς 1 Although the word **sons** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any children or descendants, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that applies to both men and women or you could refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “the sons and daughters” or “the children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 3:7 mh54 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ 1 Here the author uses the word **sons** to refer in general to all the descendants of **Israel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to descendants in general. Alternate translation: “the descendants of Israel” or “those descended from Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) -3:7 enwt διὰ τὴν δόξαν τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ, τὴν καταργουμένην 1 Here, the reason why the Israelites **were not able to look intently** at Moses’ face could be that: (1) Moses’ face was very “glorious.” Alternate translation: “because of the glory of his face, even though it was fading” (2) the **glory of his face** was **fading**. Alternate translation: “because the glory of his face was fading” +3:7 enwt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ τὴν δόξαν τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ, τὴν καταργουμένην 1 Here, the reason why the Israelites **were not able to look intently** at Moses’ face could be that: (1) Moses’ face was very “glorious.” Alternate translation: “because of the glory of his face, even though it was fading” (2) the **glory of his face** was **fading**. Alternate translation: “because the glory of his face was fading” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:7 pqbi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν δόξαν τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ, τὴν καταργουμένην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “shining.” Alternate translation: “how his face was shining, even though that was fading” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:7 ewkr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν δόξαν τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ, τὴν καταργουμένην 1 Here, the word **fading** could describe: (1) the **glory** of Moses’ **face**. Alternate translation: “the glory of his face that faded” (2) the **ministry of this death**. Alternate translation: “the glory of his face, although that ministry was fading away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:8 xxn6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πῶς οὐχὶ μᾶλλον ἡ διακονία τοῦ Πνεύματος ἔσται ἐν δόξῃ? 1 Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question implies that the answer is “yes, it has much more glory.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “then the ministry of the Spirit will certainly be with much more glory.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From 9f3c9c5581a65dab5efcca115befa70f612090df Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Fri, 20 Jan 2023 23:07:26 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 09/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 76f806a0cb..31015c479d 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:8 wq1v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡ διακονία τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the ministry** that could: (1) lead to people receiving the **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the ministry that provides the Spirit” or “the ministry that leads to the Spirit” (2) be accomplished by the **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the ministry worked by the Spirit” or “the ministry accomplished by the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:8 dhs5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ διακονία τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Here, the word **ministry** could refer primarily to: (1) the action of “ministering.” In this case, the word refers to how Paul and those with him “administered” the new covenant. Alternate translation: “the service of the Spirit” or “the act of ministering that leads to the Spirit” (2) the system of **ministry**. In this case, the word refers to the new covenant or its principles. Alternate translation: “the system of the Spirit” or “the principles that lead to the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:8 bmme rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Here, the word **Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “of God’s Spirit” (2) the “spirit” of a person, or their mind or heart. Alternate translation: “of the spirit” or “of the heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -3:8 tcp5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μᾶλλον & ἐν δόξῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **imitators**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “much more great” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +3:8 tcp5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μᾶλλον & ἐν δόξῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “much more great” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:9 m2ci rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces further explanation of what Paul has said about the two “ministries” in [3:7–8](../03/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “Even more,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 3:9 p7p5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as **if** the **glory** of the **ministry of this condemnation** were only a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “given that.” Alternate translation: “since” or “given that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 3:9 ufq6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῇ διακονίᾳ τῆς κατακρίσεως & ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 Here, the word **ministry** could refer primarily to: (1) the action of “ministering.” In this case, the word refers to how people “administered” the two covenants. Alternate translation: “the service of this condemnation … the service of this righteousness” or “the act of ministering that leads to this condemnation … the act of ministering that leads to this righteousness” (2) the system of **ministry**. In this case, the word refers to a covenant or its principles. Alternate translation: “the system of this condemnation … the system of this righteousness” or “the law that leads to condemnation … the principle that leads to righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From c8773d1219f6aea7f7fe400c5a04cf3076165ce7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Fri, 20 Jan 2023 23:17:52 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 10/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 31015c479d..bb9b60e35b 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:12 j76k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔχοντες & τοιαύτην ἐλπίδα 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hope**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “hope” or an adjective such as “hopeful.” Alternate translation: “being hopeful in such a way” or “hoping in that way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:12 u5qa rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τοιαύτην ἐλπίδα 1 Here, the word **such** refers to back to what Paul has said about the “glory” of the ministry in [3:7–11](../03/07.md). In other words, the **hope** is based on the glorious ministry and covenant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what **such** refers to. Alternate translation: “that kind of hope” or “hope in such a covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 3:12 rf9h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive χρώμεθα 1 Here, just as in [3:1–6](../03/01.md), the word **we** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach the gospel” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I act” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -3:12 zbff rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit χρώμεθα 1 Here Paul does not exactly what it is that **we** do. He implies that it is the “ministry” that he has referred to in [3:7–11](../03/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **we** do more explicit. Alternate translation: “we perform the ministry” or “we proclaim the good news” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:12 zbff rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit χρώμεθα 1 Here Paul does not say exactly what it is that **we** do. He implies that it is the “ministry” that he has referred to in [3:7–11](../03/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **we** do more explicit. Alternate translation: “we perform the ministry” or “we proclaim the good news” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:12 b5ql rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πολλῇ παρρησίᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **boldness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “bold” or an adverb such as “boldly.” Alternate translation: “as very bold people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:13 fb59 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ οὐ καθάπερ Μωϋσῆς 1 Here Paul contrasts the **boldness** that he and those with him show with how **Moses** could not show God’s glory openly. In other words, Paul and those with him can reveal God’s glory openly, in contrast to Moses, who could not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this contrasts more explicit. Alternate translation: “and without hiding the glory, like Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:13 p1y3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Μωϋσῆς ἐτίθει κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ, πρὸς τὸ μὴ ἀτενίσαι τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ, εἰς τὸ τέλος τοῦ καταργουμένου 1 Here Paul refers to a story in [Exodus 34:29–35](../exo/34/29.md) that describes how Moses’ face shone with God’s glory after Moses spoke with him. Moses would hide his face with a **veil** when **his face** shone like this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what Paul is writing about more explicit. See how you translated the similar phrases in [3:7](../03/07.md), where Paul has already referred to this story. Alternate translation: “Moses wearing a veil to hide his face so that the sons of Israel would not look directly at it when the glory on his face, which came from talking with God, disappeared” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 19d75ecc9364c815c6ad780cd6a0654aa4ba2ecb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Fri, 20 Jan 2023 23:19:56 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 11/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index bb9b60e35b..db092ec12c 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:12 zbff rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit χρώμεθα 1 Here Paul does not say exactly what it is that **we** do. He implies that it is the “ministry” that he has referred to in [3:7–11](../03/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **we** do more explicit. Alternate translation: “we perform the ministry” or “we proclaim the good news” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:12 b5ql rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πολλῇ παρρησίᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **boldness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “bold” or an adverb such as “boldly.” Alternate translation: “as very bold people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:13 fb59 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ οὐ καθάπερ Μωϋσῆς 1 Here Paul contrasts the **boldness** that he and those with him show with how **Moses** could not show God’s glory openly. In other words, Paul and those with him can reveal God’s glory openly, in contrast to Moses, who could not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this contrasts more explicit. Alternate translation: “and without hiding the glory, like Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -3:13 p1y3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Μωϋσῆς ἐτίθει κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ, πρὸς τὸ μὴ ἀτενίσαι τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ, εἰς τὸ τέλος τοῦ καταργουμένου 1 Here Paul refers to a story in [Exodus 34:29–35](../exo/34/29.md) that describes how Moses’ face shone with God’s glory after Moses spoke with him. Moses would hide his face with a **veil** when **his face** shone like this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what Paul is writing about more explicit. See how you translated the similar phrases in [3:7](../03/07.md), where Paul has already referred to this story. Alternate translation: “Moses wearing a veil to hide his face so that the sons of Israel would not look directly at it when the glory on his face, which came from talking with God, disappeared” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:13 p1y3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Μωϋσῆς ἐτίθει κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ, πρὸς τὸ μὴ ἀτενίσαι τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ, εἰς τὸ τέλος τοῦ καταργουμένου 1 Here Paul refers to a story in [Exodus 34:29–35](../exo/34/29.md) that describes how Moses’ face shone with God’s glory after Moses spoke with him. Moses would hide his face with a **veil** when **his face** shone like this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what Paul is writing about more explicit. See how you translated the similar phrases in [3:7](../03/07.md), where Paul has already referred to this story. Alternate translation: “Moses wearing a veil to hide his face so that the sons of Israel would not look directly at it when the glory on his face, which came from talking with God, was disappearing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:13 boui rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τοὺς υἱοὺς 1 Although the word **sons** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any children or descendants, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that applies to both men and women or you could refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “the sons and daughters” or “the children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 3:13 pdnk rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ 1 Here the author uses the word **sons** to refer in general to all the descendants of **Israel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to descendants in general. Alternate translation: “the descendants of Israel” or “those descended from Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) 3:13 vuyk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ τέλος 1 Here, the word **end** could refer to: (1) the result of the **fading**, which was that the “glory” completely stopped shining from Moses’ face. Alternate translation: “the cessation” or “the termination” (2) the purpose or implication of how the “glory” ceased shining from Moses’ face, which was that the old covenant too would cease. Alternate translation: “the result” or “the meaning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From b54f1d49ca1656bc93afecc6af51dc781d9b4bd2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Fri, 20 Jan 2023 23:28:02 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 12/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index db092ec12c..134f56ffee 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -357,7 +357,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:14 zvf5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπωρώθη τὰ νοήματα αὐτῶν 1 Here Paul speaks as if people’s **minds** were a soft substance that could be **hardened**. He speaks in this way to indicate that their **minds** could not know or understand what was happening, unlike a soft substance that changes when something hits it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “they could not realize what was true” or “they could not think properly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 3:14 tzbd rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul has said about how **their minds were hardened**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “and this is how:” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 3:14 w68p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ αὐτὸ κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης μένει, μὴ ἀνακαλυπτόμενον 1 Here Paul speaks as if a **veil** kept people from understanding the **old covenant** when it is “read,” and this veil is not **lifted**. He speaks in this way to identify the inability of people to understand the **old covenant** with how Moses’ kept the Israelites from looking at his face with a **veil**. Just as the **veil** kept them from seeing the glory on his face, so a **veil** keeps people from understanding **the reading of the old covenant**. Since Paul uses this figure of speech to connect what he is saying with what he has said about Moses, you should preserve the metaphor or express the idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “their lack of understanding is a like a veil that remains at the reading of the old covenant, not being lifted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -3:14 wcbv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure τὸ αὐτὸ κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης μένει, μὴ ἀνακαλυπτόμενον 1 Here, the phrase **not being lifted** could: (1) explain how the veil **remains**. Alternate translation: “the same veil remains at the reading of the old covenant, and it is not lifted” (2) go with **remains** and explain what **remains**. Alternate translation: “the same veil remains not having been lifted at the reading of the old covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +3:14 wcbv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure τὸ αὐτὸ κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης μένει, μὴ ἀνακαλυπτόμενον 1 Here, the phrase **not being lifted** could: (1) explain how the veil **remains**. Alternate translation: “the same veil remains at the reading of the old covenant, and it is not lifted” (2) go with **remains** and explain what **remains**. Alternate translation: “the same veil remains, not having been lifted at the reading of the old covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 3:14 wymg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ αὐτὸ κάλυμμα 1 Here, the phrase **same veil** could refer to: (1) the veil that Moses wore (see [3:13](../03/13.md)). Alternate translation: “the veil that Moses wore” (2) the veil that **hardened** their **minds**. Alternate translation: “the veil that hardened their minds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:14 gg2d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to refer to a person **reading** the **old covenant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “when the old covenant is read” or “when they read the old covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:14 orvo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης 1 Here, the phrase **old covenant** refers to the words that contain or describe **the old covenant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer directly to these words. Alternate translation: “of the message about the old covenant” or “of the words that describe the old covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From aa827159c558ccc9d332ff4e60b39a05969052b6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Sun, 22 Jan 2023 21:56:39 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 13/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 134f56ffee..9bb5d8d82f 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -333,7 +333,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:11 grwl rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of the comparison between the two covenants and their **glory**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “As it is,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 3:11 r7c9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if the **glory** of **{what} is fading away** were a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “given that.” Alternate translation: “since” or “given that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 3:11 ym37 τὸ καταργούμενον 1 Here, the words translated **{what} is fading away** could indicate: (1) that something is disappearing or temporary without stating that anyone is making it disappear. Alternate translation: “what is passing away” (2) that God is causing something to disappear or pass away. Alternate translation: “what is being abolished” or “what God is abolishing” -3:11 zwb2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ καταργούμενον 1 Here, the phrase **fading away** translates the same word that Paul used in [3:7](../03/07.md) to refer to how the glory was “fading” from Moses’ face. Paul means that, just like the glory on Moses’ face was temporary, so the old covenant that God made through Moses was temporary. See how you translated this idea in [3:7](../03/07.md) and use similar language if possible. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea using a simile. Alternate translation: “what is temporary” or “what is fading, like the glory on Moses’ face,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +3:11 zwb2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ καταργούμενον 1 Here, the phrase **fading away** translates the same word that Paul used in [3:7](../03/07.md) to refer to how the glory was “fading” from Moses’ face. Paul means that just like the glory on Moses’ face was temporary, so the old covenant that God made through Moses was also temporary. See how you translated this idea in [3:7](../03/07.md) and use similar language if possible. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea using a simile. Alternate translation: “what is temporary” or “what is fading, like the glory on Moses’ face,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 3:11 hm9d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ καταργούμενον & τὸ μένον 1 Here, the phrase **{what} is fading away** refers to the old covenant, while the phrase **{what} remains** refers to the new covenant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what these phrases refer to. Alternate translation: “the old covenant that is fading away … the new covenant that remains” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:11 wtht rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διὰ δόξης & ἐν δόξῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great” or an adverb such as “gloriously.” Alternate translation: “was great … is great” or “came gloriously … will come gloriously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:11 wrf4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations πολλῷ μᾶλλον τὸ μένον ἐν δόξῃ 1 Here, the phrase **much more** marks this clause as an exclamation, not a question. Paul uses this exclamation to emphatically contrast the two covenants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a way that naturally contrasts the two covenants. Alternate translation: “then certainly much more what remains will come with glory.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) From 87f3633f656994ae30453a7f0bdd4298cadb59ee Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 23 Jan 2023 15:13:18 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 15/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 9bb5d8d82f..88601e1821 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -344,7 +344,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:12 rf9h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive χρώμεθα 1 Here, just as in [3:1–6](../03/01.md), the word **we** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach the gospel” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I act” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 3:12 zbff rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit χρώμεθα 1 Here Paul does not say exactly what it is that **we** do. He implies that it is the “ministry” that he has referred to in [3:7–11](../03/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **we** do more explicit. Alternate translation: “we perform the ministry” or “we proclaim the good news” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:12 b5ql rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πολλῇ παρρησίᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **boldness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “bold” or an adverb such as “boldly.” Alternate translation: “as very bold people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -3:13 fb59 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ οὐ καθάπερ Μωϋσῆς 1 Here Paul contrasts the **boldness** that he and those with him show with how **Moses** could not show God’s glory openly. In other words, Paul and those with him can reveal God’s glory openly, in contrast to Moses, who could not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this contrasts more explicit. Alternate translation: “and without hiding the glory, like Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:13 fb59 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ οὐ καθάπερ Μωϋσῆς 1 Here Paul contrasts the **boldness** that he and those with him show with how **Moses** could not show God’s glory openly. In other words, Paul and those with him can reveal God’s glory openly, in contrast to Moses, who could not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this contrast more explicit. Alternate translation: “and without hiding the glory, like Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:13 p1y3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Μωϋσῆς ἐτίθει κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ, πρὸς τὸ μὴ ἀτενίσαι τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ, εἰς τὸ τέλος τοῦ καταργουμένου 1 Here Paul refers to a story in [Exodus 34:29–35](../exo/34/29.md) that describes how Moses’ face shone with God’s glory after Moses spoke with him. Moses would hide his face with a **veil** when **his face** shone like this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what Paul is writing about more explicit. See how you translated the similar phrases in [3:7](../03/07.md), where Paul has already referred to this story. Alternate translation: “Moses wearing a veil to hide his face so that the sons of Israel would not look directly at it when the glory on his face, which came from talking with God, was disappearing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:13 boui rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τοὺς υἱοὺς 1 Although the word **sons** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any children or descendants, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that applies to both men and women or you could refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “the sons and daughters” or “the children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 3:13 pdnk rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ 1 Here the author uses the word **sons** to refer in general to all the descendants of **Israel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to descendants in general. Alternate translation: “the descendants of Israel” or “those descended from Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) From 48ab6b8b89856c7a12caa297690cc9a3c79cec6b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 23 Jan 2023 15:25:50 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 16/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 88601e1821..56fcbb5bb1 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:14 kb8y rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Here, the word **But** could introduce a contrast between: (1) being able to “look intently” and having **hardened** minds. Alternate translation: “But instead of looking intently,” (2) what Moses did (veiling his face) and what the Israelites did (have **hardened** minds). Alternate translation: “In contrast to Moses,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 3:14 csl1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τὰ νοήματα αὐτῶν 1 Here, the word **their** refers to “the sons of Israel” that Paul mentioned in [3:13](../03/13.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom the pronoun **their** refers. Alternate translation: “the minds of the sons of Israel” or “the minds of the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 3:14 khkq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπωρώθη τὰ νοήματα αὐτῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If it is possible, avoid stating who did the “hardening,” since Paul is emphasizing the fact that their minds were “hard,” not who did the “hardening.” If you must state who did the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) the Israelites did it to themselves. Alternate translation: “they hardened their minds” or “their minds became hard” (2) God did it to them. Alternate translation: “God hardened their minds” (3) Satan did it to them. Alternate translation: “Satan hardened their minds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -3:14 zvf5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπωρώθη τὰ νοήματα αὐτῶν 1 Here Paul speaks as if people’s **minds** were a soft substance that could be **hardened**. He speaks in this way to indicate that their **minds** could not know or understand what was happening, unlike a soft substance that changes when something hits it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “they could not realize what was true” or “they could not think properly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +3:14 zvf5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπωρώθη τὰ νοήματα αὐτῶν 1 Here Paul speaks as if people’s **minds** were a soft substance that could be **hardened**, becoming resistant to change. He speaks in this way to indicate that their **minds** could not know or understand what was happening, unlike a soft substance that would change when something impacts it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “they could not realize what was true” or “they could not think properly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 3:14 tzbd rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul has said about how **their minds were hardened**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “and this is how:” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 3:14 w68p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ αὐτὸ κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης μένει, μὴ ἀνακαλυπτόμενον 1 Here Paul speaks as if a **veil** kept people from understanding the **old covenant** when it is “read,” and this veil is not **lifted**. He speaks in this way to identify the inability of people to understand the **old covenant** with how Moses’ kept the Israelites from looking at his face with a **veil**. Just as the **veil** kept them from seeing the glory on his face, so a **veil** keeps people from understanding **the reading of the old covenant**. Since Paul uses this figure of speech to connect what he is saying with what he has said about Moses, you should preserve the metaphor or express the idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “their lack of understanding is a like a veil that remains at the reading of the old covenant, not being lifted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 3:14 wcbv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure τὸ αὐτὸ κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης μένει, μὴ ἀνακαλυπτόμενον 1 Here, the phrase **not being lifted** could: (1) explain how the veil **remains**. Alternate translation: “the same veil remains at the reading of the old covenant, and it is not lifted” (2) go with **remains** and explain what **remains**. Alternate translation: “the same veil remains, not having been lifted at the reading of the old covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) From e15ce79277beaebedca0abb26b9e8342ffe69060 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 23 Jan 2023 15:35:20 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 17/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 56fcbb5bb1..a6f9845548 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:14 csl1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τὰ νοήματα αὐτῶν 1 Here, the word **their** refers to “the sons of Israel” that Paul mentioned in [3:13](../03/13.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom the pronoun **their** refers. Alternate translation: “the minds of the sons of Israel” or “the minds of the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 3:14 khkq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπωρώθη τὰ νοήματα αὐτῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If it is possible, avoid stating who did the “hardening,” since Paul is emphasizing the fact that their minds were “hard,” not who did the “hardening.” If you must state who did the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) the Israelites did it to themselves. Alternate translation: “they hardened their minds” or “their minds became hard” (2) God did it to them. Alternate translation: “God hardened their minds” (3) Satan did it to them. Alternate translation: “Satan hardened their minds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 3:14 zvf5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπωρώθη τὰ νοήματα αὐτῶν 1 Here Paul speaks as if people’s **minds** were a soft substance that could be **hardened**, becoming resistant to change. He speaks in this way to indicate that their **minds** could not know or understand what was happening, unlike a soft substance that would change when something impacts it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “they could not realize what was true” or “they could not think properly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -3:14 tzbd rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul has said about how **their minds were hardened**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “and this is how:” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +3:14 tzbd rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **for** introduces a further explanation of what Paul has said about how **their minds were hardened**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “and this is how:” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 3:14 w68p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ αὐτὸ κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης μένει, μὴ ἀνακαλυπτόμενον 1 Here Paul speaks as if a **veil** kept people from understanding the **old covenant** when it is “read,” and this veil is not **lifted**. He speaks in this way to identify the inability of people to understand the **old covenant** with how Moses’ kept the Israelites from looking at his face with a **veil**. Just as the **veil** kept them from seeing the glory on his face, so a **veil** keeps people from understanding **the reading of the old covenant**. Since Paul uses this figure of speech to connect what he is saying with what he has said about Moses, you should preserve the metaphor or express the idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “their lack of understanding is a like a veil that remains at the reading of the old covenant, not being lifted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 3:14 wcbv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure τὸ αὐτὸ κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης μένει, μὴ ἀνακαλυπτόμενον 1 Here, the phrase **not being lifted** could: (1) explain how the veil **remains**. Alternate translation: “the same veil remains at the reading of the old covenant, and it is not lifted” (2) go with **remains** and explain what **remains**. Alternate translation: “the same veil remains, not having been lifted at the reading of the old covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 3:14 wymg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ αὐτὸ κάλυμμα 1 Here, the phrase **same veil** could refer to: (1) the veil that Moses wore (see [3:13](../03/13.md)). Alternate translation: “the veil that Moses wore” (2) the veil that **hardened** their **minds**. Alternate translation: “the veil that hardened their minds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 3345ab77787421022f7461eebbc7083ae150d63f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Mon, 23 Jan 2023 15:45:04 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 19/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index a6f9845548..564abeb3f6 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -362,7 +362,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:14 gg2d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to refer to a person **reading** the **old covenant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “when the old covenant is read” or “when they read the old covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:14 orvo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης 1 Here, the phrase **old covenant** refers to the words that contain or describe **the old covenant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer directly to these words. Alternate translation: “of the message about the old covenant” or “of the words that describe the old covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 3:14 gl8l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μὴ ἀνακαλυπτόμενον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who would do the action, Paul implies that “God” would do it. Alternate translation: “God not lifting it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -3:14 vygf rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Here, the word **because** could indicate why: (1) the **veil** is not “lifted.” Alternate translation: “and it is not lifted because” (2) the **veil remains**. Alternate translation: “and the veil remains because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +3:14 vygf rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Here, the word **because** could indicate why: (1) the **veil** is not “lifted.” Alternate translation: “and it is not lifted, because” (2) the **veil remains**. Alternate translation: “and the veil remains, because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 3:14 m7lk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ 1 Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with **Christ**. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains why and how the **veil** is “lifted.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that being united to Christ leads to the “lifting” of the **veil**. Alternate translation: “only when a person is united to Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 3:14 r1lt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καταργεῖται 1 Here, the phrase **fading away** is the same phrase that Paul used to describe how the “glory” was “fading” from Moses’ face (see [3:13](../03/13.md)). What Paul means is that the **veil** disappears or is removed **in Christ**. If possible, use a word or phrase that reminds your readers of how you translated “fading” in [3:13](../03/13.md). Alternate translation: “is it being abolished” or “is it disappearing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:14 rhid rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns καταργεῖται 1 Here, the word **it** could refer to: (1) the **veil**. Alternate translation: “is this veil fading away” (2) the **old covenant**. Alternate translation: “is this covenant fading away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) From 78a7c9d1a4076995ca61650744231ca2178b28ee Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Tue, 24 Jan 2023 13:40:04 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 20/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 564abeb3f6..16a4df739b 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:14 csl1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τὰ νοήματα αὐτῶν 1 Here, the word **their** refers to “the sons of Israel” that Paul mentioned in [3:13](../03/13.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom the pronoun **their** refers. Alternate translation: “the minds of the sons of Israel” or “the minds of the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 3:14 khkq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπωρώθη τὰ νοήματα αὐτῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If it is possible, avoid stating who did the “hardening,” since Paul is emphasizing the fact that their minds were “hard,” not who did the “hardening.” If you must state who did the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) the Israelites did it to themselves. Alternate translation: “they hardened their minds” or “their minds became hard” (2) God did it to them. Alternate translation: “God hardened their minds” (3) Satan did it to them. Alternate translation: “Satan hardened their minds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 3:14 zvf5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπωρώθη τὰ νοήματα αὐτῶν 1 Here Paul speaks as if people’s **minds** were a soft substance that could be **hardened**, becoming resistant to change. He speaks in this way to indicate that their **minds** could not know or understand what was happening, unlike a soft substance that would change when something impacts it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “they could not realize what was true” or “they could not think properly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -3:14 tzbd rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **for** introduces a further explanation of what Paul has said about how **their minds were hardened**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “and this is how:” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +3:14 tzbd rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **for** introduces a further explanation of what Paul has said about how **their minds were hardened**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “since” or "because" (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 3:14 w68p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ αὐτὸ κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης μένει, μὴ ἀνακαλυπτόμενον 1 Here Paul speaks as if a **veil** kept people from understanding the **old covenant** when it is “read,” and this veil is not **lifted**. He speaks in this way to identify the inability of people to understand the **old covenant** with how Moses’ kept the Israelites from looking at his face with a **veil**. Just as the **veil** kept them from seeing the glory on his face, so a **veil** keeps people from understanding **the reading of the old covenant**. Since Paul uses this figure of speech to connect what he is saying with what he has said about Moses, you should preserve the metaphor or express the idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “their lack of understanding is a like a veil that remains at the reading of the old covenant, not being lifted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 3:14 wcbv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure τὸ αὐτὸ κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης μένει, μὴ ἀνακαλυπτόμενον 1 Here, the phrase **not being lifted** could: (1) explain how the veil **remains**. Alternate translation: “the same veil remains at the reading of the old covenant, and it is not lifted” (2) go with **remains** and explain what **remains**. Alternate translation: “the same veil remains, not having been lifted at the reading of the old covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 3:14 wymg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ αὐτὸ κάλυμμα 1 Here, the phrase **same veil** could refer to: (1) the veil that Moses wore (see [3:13](../03/13.md)). Alternate translation: “the veil that Moses wore” (2) the veil that **hardened** their **minds**. Alternate translation: “the veil that hardened their minds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 1758d8f11d4472323e4f4105c0d3d543f5c078d2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Tue, 24 Jan 2023 13:42:36 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 21/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 16a4df739b..73c3f88ef4 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -376,7 +376,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:16 k2dr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέψῃ πρὸς Κύριον 1 Here, the phrase **turn to the Lord** refers to a how people stop doing whatever they want and instead begin to trust and obey God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “one begins to serve the Lord” or “one begins to believe in the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 3:16 aqna rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐπιστρέψῃ 1 Here, the word **one** refers to any person who does the “turning.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to any person. Alternate translation: “anyone might turn” or “any person might turn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 3:16 wawh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Κύριον 1 Here, the word **Lord** could refer to: (1) God generally. Alternate translation: “God the Lord” (2) Jesus the Messiah. Alternate translation: “the Lord Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -3:16 mibm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor περιαιρεῖται τὸ κάλυμμα 1 Here Paul continues to refer to a **veil** that keeps people from understanding the Scriptures. Express the metaphor as you did in [3:14–15](../03/14.md). Alternate translation: “the lack of understanding that is like a veil is taken away” or “one understands, as if the veil was taken away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +3:16 mibm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor περιαιρεῖται τὸ κάλυμμα 1 Here Paul continues to refer to a **veil** that keeps people from understanding the Scriptures. Express the metaphor as you did in [3:14–15](../03/14.md). Alternate translation: “the lack of understanding that is like a veil is taken away” or “one understands, as if the veil were taken away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 3:16 w1y2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive περιαιρεῖται τὸ κάλυμμα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “the veil disappears” or “God takes away the veil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 3:17 lrxy rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 3:17 ulmp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ & Κύριος & Κυρίου 1 Here, just as in [3:16](../03/16.md), the word **Lord** could refer to God generally or to Jesus specifically. Express the idea the same you did in [3:16](../03/16.md). Alternate translation: “God the Lord … of God the Lord is” or “the Lord Jesus … of the Lord Jesus is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 7b5b29bfa8faa1b012cd173dbf2b4382ec55cfda Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Tue, 24 Jan 2023 14:09:03 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 23/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 73c3f88ef4..a62db221da 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -379,13 +379,13 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:16 mibm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor περιαιρεῖται τὸ κάλυμμα 1 Here Paul continues to refer to a **veil** that keeps people from understanding the Scriptures. Express the metaphor as you did in [3:14–15](../03/14.md). Alternate translation: “the lack of understanding that is like a veil is taken away” or “one understands, as if the veil were taken away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 3:16 w1y2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive περιαιρεῖται τὸ κάλυμμα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “the veil disappears” or “God takes away the veil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 3:17 lrxy rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -3:17 ulmp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ & Κύριος & Κυρίου 1 Here, just as in [3:16](../03/16.md), the word **Lord** could refer to God generally or to Jesus specifically. Express the idea the same you did in [3:16](../03/16.md). Alternate translation: “God the Lord … of God the Lord is” or “the Lord Jesus … of the Lord Jesus is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:17 ulmp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ & Κύριος & Κυρίου 1 Here, just as in [3:16](../03/16.md), the word **Lord** could refer to God generally or to Jesus specifically. Express the idea the same way you did in [3:16](../03/16.md). Alternate translation: “God the Lord … of God the Lord is” or “the Lord Jesus … of the Lord Jesus is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:17 erpi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ Πνεῦμά & τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου 1 Here, the word **Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “God’s Spirit … that Spirit of the Lord is” (2) what is “spiritual” as opposed to what is written or fleshly. Alternate translation: “the spirit … the spirit of the Lord is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:17 f2o7 ὁ & Κύριος τὸ Πνεῦμά ἐστιν 1 Here Paul could mean that: (1) the “Lord” mentioned in [3:16](../03/16.md) is the Holy **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the Lord of whom I speak is the Holy Spirit” (2) believers encounter God the **Lord** as the Holy **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the Lord is experienced as the Holy Spirit” (3) the **Lord** is “spiritual.” Alternate translation: “the Lord is a spirit” -3:17 sp81 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὗ & τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου, ἐλευθερία 1 Here Paul speaks of the **Spirit** being in a place, and so **freedom** also is in that place. Here speaks in this way to connect the **Spirit** and **freedom**. He means that whoever has the **Spirit** also has **freedom**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whoever has the Spirit of the Lord also has freedom” or “the Spirit of the Lord gives freedom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -3:17 b016 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the Spirit** as belonging to or part of the **Lord**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the Spirit who is the Lord is” or “the Spirit who belongs to the Lord is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +3:17 sp81 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὗ & τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου, ἐλευθερία 1 Here Paul speaks of the **Spirit** being in a place, and so **freedom** also is in that place. Here he speaks in this way to connect the **Spirit** and **freedom**. He means that whoever has the **Spirit** also has **freedom**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whoever has the Spirit of the Lord also has freedom” or “the Spirit of the Lord gives freedom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +3:17 b016 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the Spirit** as belonging to or part of the **Lord**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the Spirit, who is the Lord, is” or “the Spirit, who belongs to the Lord, is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:17 uoss rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐλευθερία 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **freedom**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “free.” Alternate translation: “people are free” or “you are free” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -3:17 ao12 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐλευθερία 1 Here Paul does not give any details about what people experience **freedom** from or for. If possible, you also should not make these ideas explicit. However, if you must express more information about the **freedom**, it could be **freedom** (1) from the veil. Alternate translation: “there is freedom from the veil” (2) from the condemnation of the old covenant and its law. Alternate translation: “there is freedom from condemnation” (3) from the old covenant and its law. Alternate translation: “there is freedom from the old covenant” (4) to preach the gospel. Alternate translation: “there is freedom to proclaim the good news” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:17 ao12 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐλευθερία 1 Here Paul does not give any details about from or for what people experience **freedom**. If possible, you also should not make these ideas explicit. However, if you must express more information about the **freedom**, it could be **freedom** (1) from the veil. Alternate translation: “there is freedom from the veil” (2) from the condemnation of the old covenant and its law. Alternate translation: “there is freedom from condemnation” (3) from the old covenant and its law. Alternate translation: “there is freedom from the old covenant” (4) to preach the gospel. Alternate translation: “there is freedom to proclaim the good news” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:18 r6rx rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous section. In this case, Paul is concluding his discussion about Moses and the veil in [3:12–17](../03/12.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a final development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In the end,” or “Finally,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 3:18 l3xw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀνακεκαλυμμένῳ προσώπῳ, τὴν δόξαν Κυρίου κατοπτριζόμενοι 1 Here the author speaks as if believers do not have a “veil” over their “faces” and can thus “reflect” God’s **glory**. Since the veiling language is an important part of what Paul is saying, you should preserve the figure of speech or express the idea by using a simile. Paul is indicating a contrast that could be: (1) with Moses, who had to veil the glory on his face. Unlike him, believers do not need to veil their faces. Alternate translation: “revealing the glory of the Lord like those who have unveiled faces” (2) the Israelites, who could not look directly at the glory of God. Unlike them, believers can see God’s glory directly without a “veil.” Alternate translation: “seeing the glory of the Lord, unlike those who could only see a veil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 3:18 ui8y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατοπτριζόμενοι 1 Here, the word translated **reflecting** could refer to: (1) acting as a mirror that “reflects” an image. Alternate translation: “mirroring” (2) seeing something that is “reflected” in a mirror. Alternate translation: “seeing in a mirror” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From aa6d6f984f1e95ad7d7bc028e59a5a5ce2ac7959 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Tue, 24 Jan 2023 14:13:31 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 24/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index a62db221da..f2d1dff5ae 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -392,7 +392,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:18 mdu9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν δόξαν Κυρίου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “great” or “glorious.” Alternate translation: “how great the Lord is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:18 brpu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Κυρίου 1 Here, just as in [3:16–17](../03/16.md), the word **Lord** could refer to God generally or to Jesus specifically. Express the idea the same way you did in those verses. Alternate translation: “of God the Lord” or “of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:18 rc9x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μεταμορφούμεθα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “are those whom God is transforming into” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -3:18 cq3i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν αὐτὴν εἰκόνα 1 Here, the phrase **the same image** refers to the **image** that belongs to the **Lord**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “into his image” or “the that image” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:18 cq3i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν αὐτὴν εἰκόνα 1 Here, the phrase **the same image** refers to the **image** that belongs to the **Lord**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “into his image” or “into that image” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:18 g0ku rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν αὐτὴν εἰκόνα & ἀπὸ δόξης εἰς δόξαν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **image** and **glory**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “reflect” and an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “people who reflect the Lord from what is glorious to what is glorious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:18 bx5b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπὸ δόξης εἰς δόξαν 1 Here Paul uses the words **from** and **to** with the same word, much as he did in [2:16](../02/16.md). He could be using this form because: (1) **from** indicates the source of the transformation, and **to** indicates the effects of the transformation. Alternate translation: “by someone who has glory so that we also have glory” (2) **from** and **to** together emphasize that the transformation is characterized completely by **glory**. Alternate translation: “with great glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:18 mw3v καθάπερ ἀπὸ 1 Here, the phrase **just as from** indicates the source of the transformation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “and this is from” or “even as it is accomplished by” From e4e9c30e775bfb20cbaba7cb3148c59fbafdbf10 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Tue, 24 Jan 2023 14:16:52 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 25/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index f2d1dff5ae..d91fecce7c 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -396,7 +396,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:18 g0ku rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν αὐτὴν εἰκόνα & ἀπὸ δόξης εἰς δόξαν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **image** and **glory**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “reflect” and an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “people who reflect the Lord from what is glorious to what is glorious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:18 bx5b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπὸ δόξης εἰς δόξαν 1 Here Paul uses the words **from** and **to** with the same word, much as he did in [2:16](../02/16.md). He could be using this form because: (1) **from** indicates the source of the transformation, and **to** indicates the effects of the transformation. Alternate translation: “by someone who has glory so that we also have glory” (2) **from** and **to** together emphasize that the transformation is characterized completely by **glory**. Alternate translation: “with great glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:18 mw3v καθάπερ ἀπὸ 1 Here, the phrase **just as from** indicates the source of the transformation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “and this is from” or “even as it is accomplished by” -3:18 wlp1 Κυρίου, Πνεύματος 1 Here, Paul could be using this phrase to: (1) identify the **Lord** as the **Spirit**, just as he did in [3:17](../03/17.md). Just as in that verse, he could mean that the **Lord** is the **Spirit**, or he could mean that the **Lord** is experienced as the **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the Lord, that is, the Spirit” or “the Lord, whom we experience as the Spirit” (2) name the Holy Spirit as “the Spirit of the Lord,” as he did in [3:17](../03/17.md). Alternate translation: “the Spirit of the Lord” (3) refer to the **Lord** to whom the **Spirit** belongs or who sends the **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the Lord of the Spirit” +3:18 wlp1 Κυρίου, Πνεύματος 1 Here, Paul could be using this phrase to: (1) identify the **Lord** as the **Spirit**, as he did in [3:17](../03/17.md). Just as in that verse, he could mean that the **Lord** is the **Spirit**, or he could mean that the **Lord** is experienced as the **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the Lord, that is, the Spirit” or “the Lord, whom we experience as the Spirit” (2) name the Holy Spirit as “the Spirit of the Lord,” as he did in [3:17](../03/17.md). Alternate translation: “the Spirit of the Lord” (3) refer to the **Lord** to whom the **Spirit** belongs or who sends the **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the Lord of the Spirit” 3:18 mmdd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Πνεύματος 1 Here, the word **Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “God’s Spirit” (2) what is “spiritual” as opposed to what is written or fleshly. Alternate translation: “who is spiritual” or “who is a spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:intro rx1c 0 # 2 Corinthians 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * Ministry of Moses and ministry of Paul (3:7–4:6)\n * Suffering and ministry (4:7–18)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Life and death\n\nIn [4:7–14](../04/07.md), Paul refers to life, death, and resurrection. When he refers to how he and those with him experience “death” or “dying,” he is referring to how they suffer and experience things related to death. When he refers to how he and those with him experience “life” or being “raised,” he is most likely referring to how God will resurrect them. He could also be referring to how God delivers them from “death” when they suffer or are persecuted. Consider what forms you could use to refer to experiences related to death and resurrection. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/life]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/death]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Light and darkness\n\nIn [4:3–6](../04/03.md), Paul describes a lack of understanding and belief in the gospel as “veiling,” “blinding,” and “darkness.” He describes understanding and belief in the gospel as “shining” and “light.” These figures of speech compare believing and understanding to seeing. If possible, preserve these figures of speech, but you could express the ideas in plain language if necessary. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/light]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/darkness]])\n\n### “Outer” and “inner” man\n\nIn [4:16](../04/16.md), Paul refers to two different parts of himself and those with him: their “inner man” and their “outer man.” The “inner” and the “outer” are probably not directly related to the spiritual and physical parts of people. Rather, the “inner” is connected to what is “not seen,” and the “outer” is connected to what is “seen” (see [4:18](../04/18.md)). Consider what form you can use to refer to the parts of a person that people can observe and the parts of a person that they cannot observe. Make sure that your translation does not simply distinguish between the skin and what is under the skin. It is more important to use words that suggest that what people observe is not always what is really true about a person. \n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. When he uses these words, he does not include the Corinthians unless a note specifies otherwise. He could be referring to: (1) himself and those who preach the gospel with him. (2) just himself. It is recommended that you follow the first option, but both are possible. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### The contrasts in [4:8–12](../04/08.md).\n\nIn these verses, Paul contrasts bad things that happen to him and those with him with good things that happen to them. Paul wrote these verses as one long sentence with short clauses because this was a powerful form in his culture. Consider using a form that is powerful in your culture. The UST expresses the idea with many short sentences because this is one kind of powerful form in English. 4:1 lyi4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὰ τοῦτο 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces a conclusion based on what Paul has said, particularly what he said in [3:4–18](../03/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion based on what has been said. Alternate translation: “So then” or “Because of that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) From 464af8adc9d82e39b6c4e842ac0852d9e942cf28 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Tue, 24 Jan 2023 14:29:58 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 26/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index d91fecce7c..be385fe42d 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:18 mmdd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Πνεύματος 1 Here, the word **Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “God’s Spirit” (2) what is “spiritual” as opposed to what is written or fleshly. Alternate translation: “who is spiritual” or “who is a spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:intro rx1c 0 # 2 Corinthians 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * Ministry of Moses and ministry of Paul (3:7–4:6)\n * Suffering and ministry (4:7–18)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Life and death\n\nIn [4:7–14](../04/07.md), Paul refers to life, death, and resurrection. When he refers to how he and those with him experience “death” or “dying,” he is referring to how they suffer and experience things related to death. When he refers to how he and those with him experience “life” or being “raised,” he is most likely referring to how God will resurrect them. He could also be referring to how God delivers them from “death” when they suffer or are persecuted. Consider what forms you could use to refer to experiences related to death and resurrection. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/life]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/death]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Light and darkness\n\nIn [4:3–6](../04/03.md), Paul describes a lack of understanding and belief in the gospel as “veiling,” “blinding,” and “darkness.” He describes understanding and belief in the gospel as “shining” and “light.” These figures of speech compare believing and understanding to seeing. If possible, preserve these figures of speech, but you could express the ideas in plain language if necessary. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/light]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/darkness]])\n\n### “Outer” and “inner” man\n\nIn [4:16](../04/16.md), Paul refers to two different parts of himself and those with him: their “inner man” and their “outer man.” The “inner” and the “outer” are probably not directly related to the spiritual and physical parts of people. Rather, the “inner” is connected to what is “not seen,” and the “outer” is connected to what is “seen” (see [4:18](../04/18.md)). Consider what form you can use to refer to the parts of a person that people can observe and the parts of a person that they cannot observe. Make sure that your translation does not simply distinguish between the skin and what is under the skin. It is more important to use words that suggest that what people observe is not always what is really true about a person. \n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. When he uses these words, he does not include the Corinthians unless a note specifies otherwise. He could be referring to: (1) himself and those who preach the gospel with him. (2) just himself. It is recommended that you follow the first option, but both are possible. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### The contrasts in [4:8–12](../04/08.md).\n\nIn these verses, Paul contrasts bad things that happen to him and those with him with good things that happen to them. Paul wrote these verses as one long sentence with short clauses because this was a powerful form in his culture. Consider using a form that is powerful in your culture. The UST expresses the idea with many short sentences because this is one kind of powerful form in English. 4:1 lyi4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὰ τοῦτο 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces a conclusion based on what Paul has said, particularly what he said in [3:4–18](../03/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion based on what has been said. Alternate translation: “So then” or “Because of that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -4:1 ln4n rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἔχοντες 1 Here, the word having introduces a reason why Paul and those with him **do not become discouraged**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “because we have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +4:1 ln4n rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἔχοντες 1 Here, the word **having** introduces a reason why Paul and those with him **do not become discouraged**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “because we have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 4:1 h1ud rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθὼς ἠλεήθημεν 1 Here, this phrase could indicate: (1) the way that Paul and those with him received the **ministry**. Alternate translation: “which we received by God’s mercy” (2) what led to Paul and those with him receiving the ministry, which was their conversions. Alternate translation: “which we received after God had mercy on us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:1 que0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἠλεήθημεν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **mercy**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “merciful” or an adverb such as “mercifully.” Alternate translation: “God acted mercifully toward us” or “God was merciful to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:1 ix7n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐκ ἐνκακοῦμεν 1 Here, the word **discouraged** could refer to: (1) losing motivation and confidence. Alternate translation: “we do not lose hope” (2) becoming tired or exhausted. Alternate translation: “we do not become tired” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 470ca33901a59e90caf3faae62a2cf17315d5c6d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Tue, 24 Jan 2023 14:33:13 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 27/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index be385fe42d..1032c5e72c 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -406,7 +406,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 4:1 ix7n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐκ ἐνκακοῦμεν 1 Here, the word **discouraged** could refer to: (1) losing motivation and confidence. Alternate translation: “we do not lose hope” (2) becoming tired or exhausted. Alternate translation: “we do not become tired” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:2 yp4g rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Here, the word **Instead** introduces a contrast with “becoming discouraged” in the previous verse ([4:1](../04/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “Instead of that” or “On the other hand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 4:2 z4c2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰ κρυπτὰ τῆς αἰσχύνης 1 Here, the phrase **shameful hidden things** could refer to: (1) things that people “hide” because they are **shameful**. Alternate translation: “the shameful things that people hide” (2) things that are both **hidden** and **shameful**. Alternate translation: “anything that is shameful and hidden” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -4:2 ey75 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μὴ περιπατοῦντες 1 Paul speaks of behavior in life as if it were **walking in** something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not acting” or “not behaving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +4:2 ey75 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μὴ περιπατοῦντες 1 Paul speaks of behavior in life as if people were **walking in** something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not acting” or “not behaving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:2 vvzc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν πανουργίᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **craftiness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “crafty” or an adverb such as “craftily.” Alternate translation: “craftily” or “in a crafty way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:2 gcqm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **word** that comes from **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the word that comes from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 4:2 gp3g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Here, the word **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the words” or “the communication” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 1faf12612fab01f8e95d5fae2857d1547482a0b8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Tue, 24 Jan 2023 14:40:24 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 28/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 1032c5e72c..7c5c01dffa 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -416,7 +416,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 4:2 f6n1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul refers to being **before God** to indicate a close connection to God. The phrase could indicate that: (1) God testifies or bears witness to Paul and those with him. Alternate translation: “with God testifying about us” (2) people can recognize that Paul preaches the gospel only when they are **before God** or in God’s presence. Alternate translation: “that is in God’s presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:3 lu2h rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a development from what Paul said in the previous verse ([4:2](../04/02.md)). In this verse, he explains that, although they reveal “the truth,” it may be **veiled** to some people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of development. Alternate translation: “Now” or “However,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 4:3 m82q rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ & καὶ 1 Here Paul could be using **even if** to introduce: (1) something that he thinks really is true. Alternate translation: “even though” (2) something that he thinks might be true. Alternate translation: “supposing that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) -4:3 mti5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔστιν κεκαλυμμένον τὸ εὐαγγέλιον ἡμῶν, ἐν τοῖς ἀπολλυμένοις ἐστὶν κεκαλυμμένον 1 Here Paul again uses the language of “veiling,” just as he did in [3:12–18](../03/12.md). A **gospel** that **is veiled** is one that people do not understand or believe in. If possible, express the idea the same way you did in [3:12–18](../03/12.md). Alternate translation: “it is as if a veil hides our gospel, this happens to the ones perishing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +4:3 mti5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔστιν κεκαλυμμένον τὸ εὐαγγέλιον ἡμῶν, ἐν τοῖς ἀπολλυμένοις ἐστὶν κεκαλυμμένον 1 Here Paul again uses the language of “veiling,” just as he did in [3:12–18](../03/12.md). A **gospel** that **is veiled** is one that people do not understand or believe in. If possible, express the idea the same way you did in [3:12–18](../03/12.md). Alternate translation: “it is as though a veil hides our gospel, this happens to the ones perishing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:3 hz2f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰ & ἔστιν κεκαλυμμένον τὸ εὐαγγέλιον ἡμῶν, ἐν & ἐστὶν κεκαλυμμένον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If possible, avoid stating who does the “veiling” and instead refer to how a “veil” hides the **gospel**. Alternate translation: “if a veil covers our gospel, this happens for” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 4:3 e5yu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo τοῖς ἀπολλυμένοις 1 Christians disagree over whether God causes people to “perish” or whether people cause themselves to “perish.” The word that Paul uses here intentionally does not include the person who causes the perishing. If possible, your translation also should avoid stating who causes the “perishing.” See how you translated the similar phrase in [2:15](../02/15.md). Alternate translation: “the ones on the path to destruction” or “the ones who are not being saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) 4:4 m71d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ θεὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου 1 Here, the phrase **the god of this age** refers to Satan, or the devil. Paul describes him in this way because God has allowed Satan to have some control or power in **this age**, which refers to the world as it is right now. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the god of this age, Satan,” or “the devil, who rules over this age” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 999860aa037f4fa77471f730531e0bc92c2781e5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Tue, 24 Jan 2023 14:51:48 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 29/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 7c5c01dffa..f3f857bed9 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -422,7 +422,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 4:4 m71d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ θεὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου 1 Here, the phrase **the god of this age** refers to Satan, or the devil. Paul describes him in this way because God has allowed Satan to have some control or power in **this age**, which refers to the world as it is right now. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the god of this age, Satan,” or “the devil, who rules over this age” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:4 ptb6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ὁ θεὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **god** who rules over or controls **this age**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the god who controls this age” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 4:4 r6pz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐτύφλωσεν τὰ νοήματα τῶν ἀπίστων, εἰς τὸ μὴ αὐγάσαι τὸν φωτισμὸν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here Paul speaks as if **minds** were eyes that could be **blinded** or that could see **light**. If **minds** are **blinded**, they cannot understand something. If **minds** can see **light**, they can understand something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “has made the minds of the unbelievers to be like blind eyes, so that they do not understand the gospel of the glory of Christ … just like blind eyes cannot see light” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -4:4 squ9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἀπίστων, εἰς τὸ 1 Here, the phrase **so that** could introduce: (1) the result of **the god of this age** blinding people’s minds. Alternate translation: “of the unbelievers, with the result that” (2) the purpose of **the god of this age** blinding people’s minds. Alternate translation: “of the unbelievers in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +4:4 squ9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἀπίστων, εἰς τὸ 1 Here, the phrase **so that** could introduce: (1) the result of **the god of this age** blinding people’s minds. Alternate translation: “of the unbelievers, with the result that” (2) the purpose of **the god of this age** blinding people’s minds. Alternate translation: “of the unbelievers, in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 4:4 j1vz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸν φωτισμὸν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here the author uses the possessive form multiple times in a row. What he means is that the **light** either is or comes from the **gospel**, and the **gospel** is about the **glory of Christ**. In this last phrase, **glory** describes what **Christ** is like. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural form. Alternate translation: “the light, which is the gospel about the glorious Christ” or “the light that comes from the gospel concerning how glorious Christ is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 4:4 hj21 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “of the great Christ” or “Christ, the glorious one,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:4 fmaq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὅς ἐστιν εἰκὼν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **image**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “reflect” or “represent.” Alternate translation: “who reflects God” or “who represents God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From 88cdc6dd85c71b2302844ed2ce007f5fc2cdbf80 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Tue, 24 Jan 2023 14:53:43 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 30/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index f3f857bed9..aa42f1d80e 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -423,7 +423,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 4:4 ptb6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ὁ θεὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **god** who rules over or controls **this age**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the god who controls this age” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 4:4 r6pz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐτύφλωσεν τὰ νοήματα τῶν ἀπίστων, εἰς τὸ μὴ αὐγάσαι τὸν φωτισμὸν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here Paul speaks as if **minds** were eyes that could be **blinded** or that could see **light**. If **minds** are **blinded**, they cannot understand something. If **minds** can see **light**, they can understand something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “has made the minds of the unbelievers to be like blind eyes, so that they do not understand the gospel of the glory of Christ … just like blind eyes cannot see light” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:4 squ9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἀπίστων, εἰς τὸ 1 Here, the phrase **so that** could introduce: (1) the result of **the god of this age** blinding people’s minds. Alternate translation: “of the unbelievers, with the result that” (2) the purpose of **the god of this age** blinding people’s minds. Alternate translation: “of the unbelievers, in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -4:4 j1vz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸν φωτισμὸν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here the author uses the possessive form multiple times in a row. What he means is that the **light** either is or comes from the **gospel**, and the **gospel** is about the **glory of Christ**. In this last phrase, **glory** describes what **Christ** is like. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural form. Alternate translation: “the light, which is the gospel about the glorious Christ” or “the light that comes from the gospel concerning how glorious Christ is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +4:4 j1vz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸν φωτισμὸν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here the author uses the possessive form multiple times. What he means is that the **light** either is or comes from the **gospel**, and the **gospel** is about the **glory of Christ**. In this last phrase, **glory** describes what **Christ** is like. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural form. Alternate translation: “the light, which is the gospel about the glorious Christ” or “the light that comes from the gospel concerning how glorious Christ is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 4:4 hj21 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “of the great Christ” or “Christ, the glorious one,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:4 fmaq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὅς ἐστιν εἰκὼν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **image**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “reflect” or “represent.” Alternate translation: “who reflects God” or “who represents God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:4 tx9h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession εἰκὼν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe how **Christ** functions as the **image** that shows what **God** is like. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the image that shows what God is like” or “the image that reflects God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) From e5ae8b30a5bc973c13639c9434359914a6fa49ef Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Tue, 24 Jan 2023 15:15:59 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 31/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index aa42f1d80e..21992bd419 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -431,11 +431,11 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 4:5 ddw1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν Κύριον, ἑαυτοὺς δὲ δούλους ὑμῶν 1 These two clauses leave out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “but we proclaim the Lord Christ Jesus, and we proclaim ourselves as your servants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 4:5 xvs8 Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν Κύριον 1 Here, the phrase **Lord Christ Jesus** could: (1) give a title or name for Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Lord, who is Christ Jesus” (2) state that **Christ Jesus** is the **Lord**. Alternate translation: “Christ Jesus as Lord” 4:5 t8du rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ Ἰησοῦν 1 Here Paul could be indicating that he and those with him are **servants** because of: (1) who Jesus is. Alternate translation: “because of who Jesus is” (2) what Jesus has done. Alternate translation: “because of what Jesus has done” (3) what Jesus wants Paul and those with him to do. Alternate translation: “because that is what Jesus wants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -4:6 nbpt rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Here, the word **For** introduces the reason why Paul and those with him “do not proclaim” themselves but rather Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis. Alternate translation: “That is because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +4:6 nbpt rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Here, the word **For** introduces the reason why Paul and those with him “do not proclaim” themselves but rather, Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis. Alternate translation: “That is because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 4:6 fy6h rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations ὁ Θεὸς ὁ εἰπών 1 Here Paul introduces something that God **said**. The quotation is not directly from the Old Testament. Rather Paul is probably paraphrasing [Genesis 1:3](../gen/01/03.md), and he may also be referring to [Isaiah 9:2](../isa/09/02.md). Introduce the quotation as something that God said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include a footnote that refers to the passages that Paul may be paraphrasing. Alternate translation: “God is the one who declared” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 4:6 rw5z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations εἰπών, ἐκ σκότους φῶς λάμψει 1 It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to remove the quotation marks. Alternate translation: “who said that from darkness a light will shine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) 4:6 mukf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐκ σκότους 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **darkness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “dark.” Alternate translation: “In a dark place” or “From what is dark” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -4:6 d5x7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔλαμψεν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν, πρὸς φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως 1 Here Paul continues the light metaphor from [4:4](../04/04.md). When God **shined** in their **hearts**, that means that he caused them to understand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “who caused us to understand, just as if he illuminated our hearts, the knowledge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +4:6 d5x7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔλαμψεν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν, πρὸς φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως 1 Here Paul continues the light metaphor from [4:4](../04/04.md). When God **shined** in their **hearts**, that means that he caused them to understand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “who caused us to understand, just as if he had illuminated our hearts, the knowledge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:6 bj1j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν 1 In the Paul’s culture, **hearts** are the places where humans think and plan. What Paul means is that God has **shined** on their thoughts or on what they think. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in our minds” or “in our thoughts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 4:6 m6rf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **our** could refer to: (1) just Paul and those with him. Paul is focusing on himself and those with him, but he does not mean to exclude the Corinthians entirely. Alternate translation: “the hearts of us who preach the gospel” (2) Paul and everyone who believes, including the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “the hearts of us who believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 4:6 fkq3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form multiple times in a row. What he means is that the **illumination** either is or comes from the **knowledge**, and the **knowledge** is about the **glory of God**. In this last phrase, **glory** describes what **God** is like. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural form. See how you translated the similar construction in [4:4](../04/04.md). Alternate translation: “the illumination, which is the knowledge about the glorious God” or “the illumination that comes from the knowledge concerning how glorious God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) From 80e4e02c5b5de0e3b246812686c5f83d8cb0840e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Tue, 24 Jan 2023 15:19:10 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 32/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 21992bd419..180da0243f 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -436,7 +436,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 4:6 rw5z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations εἰπών, ἐκ σκότους φῶς λάμψει 1 It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to remove the quotation marks. Alternate translation: “who said that from darkness a light will shine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) 4:6 mukf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐκ σκότους 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **darkness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “dark.” Alternate translation: “In a dark place” or “From what is dark” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:6 d5x7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔλαμψεν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν, πρὸς φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως 1 Here Paul continues the light metaphor from [4:4](../04/04.md). When God **shined** in their **hearts**, that means that he caused them to understand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “who caused us to understand, just as if he had illuminated our hearts, the knowledge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -4:6 bj1j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν 1 In the Paul’s culture, **hearts** are the places where humans think and plan. What Paul means is that God has **shined** on their thoughts or on what they think. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in our minds” or “in our thoughts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +4:6 bj1j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν 1 In the Paul’s culture, **hearts** are considered to be the places where humans think and plan. What Paul means is that God has **shined** on their thoughts or on what they think. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in our minds” or “in our thoughts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 4:6 m6rf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **our** could refer to: (1) just Paul and those with him. Paul is focusing on himself and those with him, but he does not mean to exclude the Corinthians entirely. Alternate translation: “the hearts of us who preach the gospel” (2) Paul and everyone who believes, including the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “the hearts of us who believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 4:6 fkq3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form multiple times in a row. What he means is that the **illumination** either is or comes from the **knowledge**, and the **knowledge** is about the **glory of God**. In this last phrase, **glory** describes what **God** is like. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural form. See how you translated the similar construction in [4:4](../04/04.md). Alternate translation: “the illumination, which is the knowledge about the glorious God” or “the illumination that comes from the knowledge concerning how glorious God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 4:6 mpg9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πρὸς φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **illumination**, **knowledge**, and **glory**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “illumine” and “know” and an adjective such as “great” or “glorious.” Alternate translation: “to illumine us so that we can know the great God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From 90f61a7bca66dcac390f728c6abd6ec03e1b3fdf Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Tue, 24 Jan 2023 15:23:51 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 33/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 180da0243f..ea961c80dc 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -437,10 +437,10 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 4:6 mukf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐκ σκότους 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **darkness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “dark.” Alternate translation: “In a dark place” or “From what is dark” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:6 d5x7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔλαμψεν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν, πρὸς φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως 1 Here Paul continues the light metaphor from [4:4](../04/04.md). When God **shined** in their **hearts**, that means that he caused them to understand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “who caused us to understand, just as if he had illuminated our hearts, the knowledge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:6 bj1j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν 1 In the Paul’s culture, **hearts** are considered to be the places where humans think and plan. What Paul means is that God has **shined** on their thoughts or on what they think. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in our minds” or “in our thoughts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -4:6 m6rf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **our** could refer to: (1) just Paul and those with him. Paul is focusing on himself and those with him, but he does not mean to exclude the Corinthians entirely. Alternate translation: “the hearts of us who preach the gospel” (2) Paul and everyone who believes, including the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “the hearts of us who believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +4:6 m6rf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **our** could refer to: (1) just Paul and those with him. Paul is focusing on himself and those with him, but he does not mean to exclude the Corinthians entirely. Alternate translation: “the hearts of us who preach the gospel” (2) Paul and everyone who believes, including the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “the hearts of us, who believe,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 4:6 fkq3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form multiple times in a row. What he means is that the **illumination** either is or comes from the **knowledge**, and the **knowledge** is about the **glory of God**. In this last phrase, **glory** describes what **God** is like. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural form. See how you translated the similar construction in [4:4](../04/04.md). Alternate translation: “the illumination, which is the knowledge about the glorious God” or “the illumination that comes from the knowledge concerning how glorious God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 4:6 mpg9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πρὸς φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **illumination**, **knowledge**, and **glory**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “illumine” and “know” and an adjective such as “great” or “glorious.” Alternate translation: “to illumine us so that we can know the great God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -4:6 p736 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν προσώπῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, the **glory** that is **in {face} of Jesus Christ** contrasts with the glory that faded on Moses’ face (see [3:7](../03/07.md)). What Paul means is that Jesus reveals or shows what God is like, particularly how glorious he is. If possible, use words that remind your readers of what Paul said about Moses in [3:7](../03/07.md). If it is necessary, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “that Jesus Christ reveals as if it shone on his face” or “that Jesus Christ shows to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +4:6 p736 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν προσώπῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, the **glory** that is **in {face} of Jesus Christ** contrasts with the glory that faded on Moses’ face (see [3:7](../03/07.md)). What Paul means is that Jesus reveals or shows what God is like, particularly how glorious he is. If possible, use words that remind your readers of what Paul said about Moses in [3:7](../03/07.md). If it is necessary, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “that Jesus Christ reveals as if it shined on his face” or “that Jesus Christ shows to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:7 xe5i rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** contrasts the “glory of God” from the previous verse with how Paul and those with him are **clay jars**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 4:7 xx2c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔχομεν & τὸν θησαυρὸν τοῦτον ἐν ὀστρακίνοις σκεύεσιν 1 Here Paul speaks of the knowledge about God’s glory as if it were a **treasure**, that is, something that is very valuable. He speaks of himself and those who proclaim the gospel as if they were **clay jars**, which are not valuable and can break easily. He speaks in this way to contrast how valuable and long-lasting the gospel is (**the treasure**) with how worthless and weak he and those who preach the gospel with him are in comparison (**clay jars**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain the figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we have these riches in disposable containers” or “we have this valuable gospel as weak and worthless people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:7 yzd7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τὸν θησαυρὸν τοῦτον 1 Here, the word **this** identifies the **treasure** as “the knowledge of the glory of God in the face of Jesus Christ” (see [4:6](../04/06.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what **this** refers to. Alternate translation: “the treasure of the knowledge of the glory of God” or “that treasure” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) From bcd3c1e7d0c3e8c503ffe45fc55958fb9de443a5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Tue, 24 Jan 2023 15:39:36 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 34/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index ea961c80dc..3b85f9c02f 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -421,7 +421,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 4:3 e5yu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo τοῖς ἀπολλυμένοις 1 Christians disagree over whether God causes people to “perish” or whether people cause themselves to “perish.” The word that Paul uses here intentionally does not include the person who causes the perishing. If possible, your translation also should avoid stating who causes the “perishing.” See how you translated the similar phrase in [2:15](../02/15.md). Alternate translation: “the ones on the path to destruction” or “the ones who are not being saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) 4:4 m71d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ θεὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου 1 Here, the phrase **the god of this age** refers to Satan, or the devil. Paul describes him in this way because God has allowed Satan to have some control or power in **this age**, which refers to the world as it is right now. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the god of this age, Satan,” or “the devil, who rules over this age” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:4 ptb6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ὁ θεὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **god** who rules over or controls **this age**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the god who controls this age” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -4:4 r6pz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐτύφλωσεν τὰ νοήματα τῶν ἀπίστων, εἰς τὸ μὴ αὐγάσαι τὸν φωτισμὸν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here Paul speaks as if **minds** were eyes that could be **blinded** or that could see **light**. If **minds** are **blinded**, they cannot understand something. If **minds** can see **light**, they can understand something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “has made the minds of the unbelievers to be like blind eyes, so that they do not understand the gospel of the glory of Christ … just like blind eyes cannot see light” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +4:4 r6pz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐτύφλωσεν τὰ νοήματα τῶν ἀπίστων, εἰς τὸ μὴ αὐγάσαι τὸν φωτισμὸν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here Paul speaks as if **minds** were eyes that could be **blinded** or that could see **light**. If **minds** are **blinded**, they cannot understand something. If **minds** can see **light**, they can understand something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “has made the minds of the unbelievers to be like blind eyes, so that they do not understand the gospel of the glory of Christ, who is the image of God.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:4 squ9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἀπίστων, εἰς τὸ 1 Here, the phrase **so that** could introduce: (1) the result of **the god of this age** blinding people’s minds. Alternate translation: “of the unbelievers, with the result that” (2) the purpose of **the god of this age** blinding people’s minds. Alternate translation: “of the unbelievers, in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 4:4 j1vz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸν φωτισμὸν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here the author uses the possessive form multiple times. What he means is that the **light** either is or comes from the **gospel**, and the **gospel** is about the **glory of Christ**. In this last phrase, **glory** describes what **Christ** is like. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural form. Alternate translation: “the light, which is the gospel about the glorious Christ” or “the light that comes from the gospel concerning how glorious Christ is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 4:4 hj21 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “of the great Christ” or “Christ, the glorious one,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From 623ec756e8830365af1484c60543ec3e1cda4c95 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Tue, 24 Jan 2023 15:43:04 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 35/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 3b85f9c02f..da12b36abe 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 4:6 d5x7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔλαμψεν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν, πρὸς φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως 1 Here Paul continues the light metaphor from [4:4](../04/04.md). When God **shined** in their **hearts**, that means that he caused them to understand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “who caused us to understand, just as if he had illuminated our hearts, the knowledge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:6 bj1j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν 1 In the Paul’s culture, **hearts** are considered to be the places where humans think and plan. What Paul means is that God has **shined** on their thoughts or on what they think. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in our minds” or “in our thoughts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 4:6 m6rf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **our** could refer to: (1) just Paul and those with him. Paul is focusing on himself and those with him, but he does not mean to exclude the Corinthians entirely. Alternate translation: “the hearts of us who preach the gospel” (2) Paul and everyone who believes, including the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “the hearts of us, who believe,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -4:6 fkq3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form multiple times in a row. What he means is that the **illumination** either is or comes from the **knowledge**, and the **knowledge** is about the **glory of God**. In this last phrase, **glory** describes what **God** is like. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural form. See how you translated the similar construction in [4:4](../04/04.md). Alternate translation: “the illumination, which is the knowledge about the glorious God” or “the illumination that comes from the knowledge concerning how glorious God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +4:6 fkq3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form multiple times. What he means is that the **illumination** either is or comes from the **knowledge**, and the **knowledge** is about the **glory of God**. In this last phrase, **glory** describes what **God** is like. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural form. See how you translated the similar construction in [4:4](../04/04.md). Alternate translation: “the illumination, which is the knowledge about the glorious God” or “the illumination that comes from the knowledge concerning how glorious God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 4:6 mpg9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πρὸς φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **illumination**, **knowledge**, and **glory**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “illumine” and “know” and an adjective such as “great” or “glorious.” Alternate translation: “to illumine us so that we can know the great God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:6 p736 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν προσώπῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, the **glory** that is **in {face} of Jesus Christ** contrasts with the glory that faded on Moses’ face (see [3:7](../03/07.md)). What Paul means is that Jesus reveals or shows what God is like, particularly how glorious he is. If possible, use words that remind your readers of what Paul said about Moses in [3:7](../03/07.md). If it is necessary, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “that Jesus Christ reveals as if it shined on his face” or “that Jesus Christ shows to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:7 xe5i rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** contrasts the “glory of God” from the previous verse with how Paul and those with him are **clay jars**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) From 44807a3af8fba9a55952a6ce6885dee28ab84c0a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Tue, 24 Jan 2023 18:34:32 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 36/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index da12b36abe..9209ccb6a0 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -456,7 +456,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 4:10 zt4b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν νέκρωσιν τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι περιφέροντες 1 Here Paul speaks as if **the dying of Jesus** were an object that he and those with him could “carry around.” He could speak in this way to indicate that: (1) he experiences suffering and pain that are like the **dying of Jesus**. Alternate translation: “experiencing in the body dying that is like the dying of Jesus” (2) he and those with him proclaim the **dying of Jesus** both by what they say and what they do (**in the body**). Alternate translation: “proclaiming in the body the dying of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:10 ethc τῷ σώματι & τῷ σώματι ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **body** is a singular noun that refers to the “bodies” of Paul and those with him. It may be more natural in your language to use a plural form. Alternate translation: “the bodies … our bodies” or “each of our bodies … each of our bodies” 4:10 rnup rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὴν νέκρωσιν τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe the **dying** that **Jesus** experienced. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the death that Jesus experienced” or “how Jesus died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -4:10 l6f6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι ἡμῶν φανερωθῇ 1 Here, the “revelation” of **the life of Jesus** in **our body** could mean that: (1) the **life** that Jesus has will become the life that they too have. In other words, like Jesus resurrected, they too will resurrect. Alternate translation: “we too might experience in our body the new life that Jesus has” (2) they “reveal” the fact that Jesus is alive. In other words, by **carrying around** Jesus’ death, they also reveal his resurrection. Alternate translation: “we might reveal in our body the resurrection of Jesus” (3) they are delivered from the sufferings that they experience so that they have **life** from **Jesus**. Alternate translation: “we might experience life from Jesus when we are delivered from suffering in our body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +4:10 l6f6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι ἡμῶν φανερωθῇ 1 Here, the revelation of **the life of Jesus** in **our body** could mean that: (1) the **life** that Jesus has will become the life that they too have. In other words, like Jesus resurrected, they too will resurrect. Alternate translation: “we too might experience in our body the new life that Jesus has” (2) they “reveal” the fact that Jesus is alive. In other words, by **carrying around** Jesus’ death, they also reveal his resurrection. Alternate translation: “we might reveal in our body the resurrection of Jesus” (3) they are delivered from the sufferings that they experience so that they have **life** from **Jesus**. Alternate translation: “we might experience life from Jesus when we are delivered from suffering in our body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:10 w3jc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι ἡμῶν φανερωθῇ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God might reveal in our body the life of Jesus also” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 4:10 k10l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **life** that could: (1) belong to **Jesus**. In other words, it is his resurrection life. Alternate translation: “the life that Jesus has” (2) come from **Jesus**. Alternate translation: “life from Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 4:10 j23j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **life**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “live.” Alternate translation: “how Jesus lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From f5f515a7b7331d1d2cb79e5774243bdeb16f31f8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Tue, 24 Jan 2023 19:04:05 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 37/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 9209ccb6a0..279724eeab 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -467,7 +467,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 4:11 admc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς θάνατον 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “die.” Alternate translation: “so that we might die” or “to die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:11 wt5i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ Ἰησοῦν 1 Here, the phrase **for the sake of Jesus** could indicate that Paul and those with him **are always being handed over to death**: (1) to serve **Jesus**. Alternate translation: “in order to serve Jesus” (2) because of **Jesus**, particularly because they preach about him. Alternate translation: “because of Jesus” or “because we proclaim Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:11 d1wm ἵνα καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ φανερωθῇ ἐν τῇ θνητῇ σαρκὶ ἡμῶν 1 Here Paul uses words and ideas that are very similar to what he used in the second part of [4:10](../04/10.md). You should express the idea much as you did in that verse. -4:11 ww5r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ φανερωθῇ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God might reveal also the life of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +4:11 ww5r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ φανερωθῇ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that God does it. Alternate translation: “God might reveal also the life of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 4:11 r513 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **life**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “live.” Alternate translation: “how Jesus lives” or “the fact that Jesus lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:11 kucp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῇ θνητῇ σαρκὶ ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **mortal flesh** refers to people who will die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that describes people as those who will die. Alternate translation: “in us who will die” or “our mortal bodies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 4:12 dc7q rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, the phrase **So then** introduces a conclusion that is based on [4:7–11](../04/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the conclusion to a section. Alternate translation: “Therefore” or “In the end” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) From adca02e0844e129c63d7f6852639ae565166986b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Tue, 24 Jan 2023 19:08:14 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 38/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 279724eeab..c82320c757 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -471,7 +471,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 4:11 r513 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **life**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “live.” Alternate translation: “how Jesus lives” or “the fact that Jesus lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:11 kucp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῇ θνητῇ σαρκὶ ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **mortal flesh** refers to people who will die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that describes people as those who will die. Alternate translation: “in us who will die” or “our mortal bodies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 4:12 dc7q rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, the phrase **So then** introduces a conclusion that is based on [4:7–11](../04/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the conclusion to a section. Alternate translation: “Therefore” or “In the end” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -4:12 q3il rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ὁ θάνατος ἐν ἡμῖν ἐνεργεῖται, ἡ δὲ ζωὴ ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Here Paul speaks of **death** and **life** as if they were persons who could “work.” He means that he and those with experience things related to **death**, while the Corinthians experience things related to **life**. Alternate translation: “we experience death, but you experience life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +4:12 q3il rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ὁ θάνατος ἐν ἡμῖν ἐνεργεῖται, ἡ δὲ ζωὴ ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Here Paul speaks of **death** and **life** as if they were persons who could “work.” He means that he and those will experience things related to **death**, while the Corinthians experience things related to **life**. Alternate translation: “we experience death, but you experience life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 4:12 r5se rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὁ θάνατος ἐν ἡμῖν ἐνεργεῖται, ἡ δὲ ζωὴ ἐν ὑμῖν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **death** and **life**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “die” and “live.” Alternate translation: “we are dying, but you are living” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:12 n7or rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δὲ 1 Here Paul may be: (1) simply contrasting **death** and **life**. Alternate translation: “but on the other hand,” (2) indicating that the **death** in them leads to the **life in you**. Alternate translation: “but so that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:12 tvne rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἡ & ζωὴ ἐν ὑμῖν 1 This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “life works in you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) From b446af19d3b56dcfe3c6acd4222df416c039038f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Tue, 24 Jan 2023 19:33:51 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 39/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index c82320c757..b0076707d9 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -478,7 +478,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 4:12 albz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ & ζωὴ 1 Here, the word **life** could refer: (1) specifically to resurrection life, which the Corinthians will receive. Alternate translation: “eternal life” (2) generally to being alive and not experiencing suffering or dangerous things. Alternate translation: “the experience of life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:13 jqmm rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** could introduce: (1) a development or new idea. Alternate translation: “Further,” (2) a contrast with the “death” that works in them. Alternate translation: “On the other hand,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 4:13 cckc rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἔχοντες 1 Here, the word **having** introduces a reason or cause for why **we also believe** and **speak**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “because we have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -4:13 ret6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ αὐτὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πίστεως 1 Here Paul uses the possessive to refer a **spirit** that could: (1) be characterized by **faith**. Alternate translation: “the same believing spirit” (2) give or cause **faith**. Alternate translation: “the same spirit that gives faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +4:13 ret6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ αὐτὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πίστεως 1 Here Paul uses the possessive to refer to a **spirit** that could: (1) be characterized by **faith**. Alternate translation: “the same believing spirit” (2) give or cause **faith**. Alternate translation: “the same spirit that gives faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 4:13 wrr3 τὸ αὐτὸ πνεῦμα 1 Here, the word **spirit** could refer to: (1) a human spirit or attitude, which is characterized by faith. Alternate translation: “the same attitude” (2) the Holy Spirit, who gives **faith**. Alternate translation: “the same Holy Spirit” 4:13 ery0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ αὐτὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πίστεως 1 Here, the word **same** could indicate that: (1) this is the **same spirit** that the person who wrote the quotation had. Alternate translation: “the same spirit of the faith that the psalmist had,” (2) this is the **same spirit** that the Corinthians also have. Alternate translation: “the same spirit of the faith that you have,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:13 qma7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς πίστεως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “that believes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From dfd11cc0c36326dad327fdaf4a555800837b371a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Tue, 24 Jan 2023 21:20:52 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 40/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index b0076707d9..a5ffbe2927 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -496,7 +496,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 4:15 u8pp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν εὐχαριστίαν περισσεύσῃ εἰς τὴν δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **thanksgiving** and **glory**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “thank” and “glorify.” Alternate translation: “may cause people to abound in thanking God to glorify him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:15 zt5h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession εἰς τὴν δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **glory** that **God** receives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to glory for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 4:16 u6e5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ 1 Here, the word **So** introduces an inference or conclusion based on what Paul has said, probably focusing on what he said in [4:7–15](../04/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion from a previous section. Alternate translation: “So then,” or “Because of all that,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -4:16 p7pv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐκ ἐνκακοῦμεν 1 See you how translated the word **discouraged** in [4:1](../04/01.md). It refer to: (1) losing motivation and confidence. Alternate translation: “we do not lose hope” (2) becoming tired or exhausted. Alternate translation: “we do not become tired” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +4:16 p7pv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐκ ἐνκακοῦμεν 1 See you how translated the word **discouraged** in [4:1](../04/01.md). It could refer to: (1) losing motivation and confidence. Alternate translation: “we do not lose hope” (2) becoming tired or exhausted. Alternate translation: “we do not become tired” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:16 cb92 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ καὶ 1 Here Paul is speaking as if **our outer man is decaying** were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by indicating that **our outer man** is indeed **decaying**. Alternate translation: “despite the fact that” or “although” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 4:16 hhv6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ ἔξω ἡμῶν ἄνθρωπος 1 Here, the phrase **outer man** could refer to: (1) the part of the person that others can observe and see. Alternate translation: “our observable part” or “our external part” (2) the physical part of the person. Alternate translation: “our body” or “our physical part” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:16 pnms rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος & ἔσω 1 Although the word **man** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any person, either man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that applies to both men and women or you could refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “person … inner person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) From ac17d4706f74835ed5de150a96b2f8b3a16eff51 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Tue, 24 Jan 2023 22:22:11 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 41/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index a5ffbe2927..6117a1c1c2 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -371,7 +371,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:15 ip29 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀναγινώσκηται Μωϋσῆς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone reads Moses” or “they hear someone read Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 3:15 bb5u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτῶν κεῖται 1 Here Paul continues to refer to a **veil** that keeps people from understanding the Scriptures. Express the metaphor as you did in [3:14](../03/14.md). Alternate translation: “their lack of understanding is like a veil that lies over their heart” or “they do not understand, as if a veil lies over their heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 3:15 gwp9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτῶν 1 In Paul’s culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **heart** by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by expressing the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “over their mind” or “over their understanding” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -3:15 z5zh τὴν καρδίαν αὐτῶν 1 Here, the word **heart** is a singular noun that refers to the “hearts” of many people. It may be more natural in your language to use a plural form. Alternate translation: “their hearts” or “each of their hearts” +3:15 z5zh rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns τὴν καρδίαν αὐτῶν 1 Here, the word **heart** is a singular noun that refers to the “hearts” of many people. It may be more natural in your language to use a plural form. Alternate translation: “their hearts” or “each of their hearts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenounss]]) 3:15 lmu6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τὴν καρδίαν αὐτῶν 1 Here, the word **their** could refer to: (1) anyone who hears the reading of **Moses** without being “in Christ.” Alternate translation: “the hearts of those who listen” (2) the same people that “their” referred to in [3:14](../03/14.md): the Israelites. Alternate translation: “the Israelites’ heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 3:16 k2dr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέψῃ πρὸς Κύριον 1 Here, the phrase **turn to the Lord** refers to a how people stop doing whatever they want and instead begin to trust and obey God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “one begins to serve the Lord” or “one begins to believe in the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 3:16 aqna rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐπιστρέψῃ 1 Here, the word **one** refers to any person who does the “turning.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to any person. Alternate translation: “anyone might turn” or “any person might turn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -517,11 +517,11 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 4:18 f97x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ τὰ μὴ βλεπόμενα 1 This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the sentence. Alternate translation: “but we are watching the things not being seen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 4:18 hbrg rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why **We** are **watching** the things that are not seen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “We do that because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 4:18 kx7m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὰ γὰρ βλεπόμενα & τὰ δὲ μὴ βλεπόμενα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could refer to “we” or to people in general. Alternate translation: “For the things that people see … but the things that people do not see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -5:intro s14p 0 # 2 Corinthians 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * Confidence in the resurrection (5:1–10)\n * The gospel (5:11–6:2)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Resurrection bodies\n\nIn [5:1–5](../05/01.md), Paul speaks about new bodies that believers will receive when Jesus comes back. Right now, he and those with him “groan” while they have their current bodies. That is because these bodies are weak and will eventually die. However, Paul and those with him do not want to just get rid of their bodies. Rather, they are looking forward expectantly to receiving new bodies that will not die. Paul expresses these ideas by using building and clothing language. See the sections below that address how this language functions. Make sure that your translation clearly contrasts old bodies with new bodies and does not suggest that Paul just wants to get rid of his body. \n\n### The intermediate state?\n\nIn [5:6–9](../05/06.md), Paul speaks about being “away from the body” and “with the Lord.” As the previous section has illustrated, Paul’s goal is to have a new body, not to be “away from the body.” So, what is he referring to here? There are three primary options. First, many Christians believe that Paul is talking about the time period between when a believer dies and when Jesus comes back. During this time period, the believer does not have a body but is with Jesus in heaven. Then, when Jesus comes back, the believer receives a new body. Second, some Christians believe that Paul is talking about how believers receive new bodies immediately after they die. In other words, the next thing that a believer experiences after he or she dies is Jesus’ return. In this case, there is no time period between death and resurrection. Third, some Christians believe that Paul is speaking about how believers receive a temporary body for the time they are in heaven with Jesus before he comes back. If possible, your translation should allow for all three of these interpretations. Make sure that you include at least option one, since this is the option that most Christians believe. \n\n### New creation\n\nIn [5:17](../05/17.md), Paul speaks about how being “in Christ” leads to “new creation,” with “old things” passing away and “new things” coming. Paul uses very general language, and the “new creation” could identify the person who is “in Christ” or everything that God is making “new.” If it is about people primarily, Paul’s point is that they are made “new” when they are in Christ. If it is about the world in general, Paul’s point is that God makes the world “new” in Christ, and people experience this “new creation” when they too are in Christ. Since Paul’s language is so general, it is best to express the idea in such a way that both of these interpretations are possible. If you must choose one, most interpreters think that Paul is focusing on people here. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/creation]])\n\n### Reconciliation\n\nIn [5:18–20](../05/18.md), Paul speaks about how God “reconciles” people to himself and gives the “ministry of reconciliation” to Paul and those with him. The word “reconcile” refers to how someone restores a relationship with someone else so that they can be together again. In other words, when someone does something that breaks or hurts a relationship, “reconciliation” heals the broken relationship. Consider how you might naturally express this idea in your language. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Bodies as homes\n\nIn [5:1–9](../05/01.md), Paul speaks about bodies as if they were homes. He identifies current earthly bodies as “tents,” which indicates that they do not last. He identifies resurrection bodies as “buildings” that God makes. Paul uses the language of “home” to indicate that people belong in bodies and not without bodies. However, he does seem to think that people can be without bodies for a period of time, just as people can leave their homes for a period of time (see the above discussion of the “intermediate state”). Further, he contrasts “tent” homes with “building” homes to indicate that the “building” is the home (that is, body) that will last forever and which believers should long for. If possible, preserve the “home” language in your translation, either in metaphor or simile form. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/house]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/tent]])\n\n### Bodies as clothing\n\nIn [5:2–4](../05/02.md), Paul mixes “clothing” language in with his “home” language. The “clothes” are bodies, and Paul again uses this language to indicate that people belong in bodies (“clothed”), not without bodies (“naked” or “unclothed”). He does not use “clothing” language to show that bodies are an unimportant part of who people are. If possible, preserve the “clothing” language in your translation, either in metaphor or simile form. However, if how Paul mixes together “home” and “clothing” language would be confusing, you may need to use only the “home” language and express the “clothing” language plainly or as “home” language. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/clothed]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. When he uses this form, he is focusing on himself and those with him, or just on himself (although this is less likely). However, he does not necessarily mean that what he says is not true of the Corinthians or of believers in general. Consider how you can communicate the focus on Paul and those with him without totally excluding the Corinthians. In every case where Paul may be using the first person plural in a way different than this, a note will explain the options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### Singular nouns in general statements\n\nIn [5:1–10](../05/01.md), Paul consistently refers to “body,” “building,” “tent,” and “home” in singular form. He does this because the singular form was a natural way to refer to these things in general. Throughout this section, the UST models how to express the ideas in plural form, since this is more natural for general statements in English. Consider how your language might naturally express a general statement about “bodies.” \n\n### Translating [5:21](../05/21.md)\n\nPaul speaks in a very compressed way in this verse, and Christians disagree about what exactly he means. What is relatively clear is that Paul has in mind what some people call an “interchange” between Christ and believers. Christ, who is “righteous,” is somehow identified with “sin,” and believers, who are “sinners,” are somehow identified with “righteousness.” The “in him” at the end of the verse indicates that this “interchange” occurs in union with Christ. For details about what it could mean for Christ to be “made sin” and for believers to “become the righteousness of God,” see the notes on this verse. If possible, however, your translation should be as general as Paul’s sentence. This means that you should express the general idea of “interchange” and allow for many of the possible interpretations listed in the notes. +5:intro s14p 0 # 2 Corinthians 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * Confidence in the resurrection (5:1–10)\n * The gospel (5:11–6:2)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Resurrection bodies\n\nIn [5:1–5](../05/01.md), Paul speaks about new bodies that believers will receive when Jesus comes back. Right now, he and those with him “groan” while they have their current bodies. That is because these bodies are weak and will eventually die. However, Paul and those with him do not want to just get rid of their bodies. Rather, they are looking forward expectantly to receiving new bodies that will not die. Paul expresses these ideas by using building and clothing language. See the sections below that address how this language functions. Make sure that your translation clearly contrasts old bodies with new bodies and does not suggest that Paul just wants to get rid of his body. \n\n### The intermediate state?\n\nIn [5:6–9](../05/06.md), Paul speaks about being “away from the body” and “with the Lord.” As the previous section has illustrated, Paul’s goal is to have a new body, not to be “away from the body.” So, what is he referring to here? There are three primary options. First, many Christians believe that Paul is talking about the time period between when a believer dies and when Jesus comes back. During this time period, the believer does not have a body but is with Jesus in heaven. Then, when Jesus comes back, the believer receives a new body. Second, some Christians believe that Paul is talking about how believers receive new bodies immediately after they die. In other words, the next thing that a believer experiences after he or she dies is Jesus’ return. In this case, there is no time period between death and resurrection. Third, some Christians believe that Paul is speaking about how believers receive a temporary body for the time they are in heaven with Jesus before he comes back. If possible, your translation should allow for all three of these interpretations. Make sure that you include at least option one, since this is the option that most Christians believe. \n\n### New creation\n\nIn [5:17](../05/17.md), Paul speaks about how being “in Christ” leads to “new creation,” with “old things” passing away and “new things” coming. Paul uses very general language, and the “new creation” could identify the person who is “in Christ” or everything that God is making “new.” If it is about people primarily, Paul’s point is that they are made “new” when they are in Christ. If it is about the world in general, Paul’s point is that God makes the world “new” in Christ, and people experience this “new creation” when they too are in Christ. Since Paul’s language is so general, it is best to express the idea in such a way that both of these interpretations are possible. If you must choose one, most interpreters think that Paul is focusing on people here. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/creation]])\n\n### Reconciliation\n\nIn [5:18–20](../05/18.md), Paul speaks about how God “reconciles” people to himself and gives the “ministry of reconciliation” to Paul and those with him. The word “reconcile” refers to how someone restores a relationship with someone else so that they can be together again. In other words, when someone does something that breaks or hurts a relationship, “reconciliation” heals the broken relationship. Consider how you might naturally express this idea in your language. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Bodies as homes\n\nIn [5:1–9](../05/01.md), Paul speaks about bodies as if they were homes. He identifies current earthly bodies as “tents,” which indicates that they do not last. He identifies resurrection bodies as “buildings” that God makes. Paul uses the language of “home” to indicate that people belong in bodies and not without bodies. However, he does seem to think that people can be without bodies for a period of time, just as people can leave their homes for a period of time (see the above discussion of the “intermediate state”). Further, he contrasts “tent” homes with “building” homes to indicate that the “building” is the home (that is, body) that will last forever and which believers should long for. If possible, preserve the “home” language in your translation, either in metaphor or simile form. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/house]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/tent]])\n\n### Bodies as clothing\n\nIn [5:2–4](../05/02.md), Paul mixes “clothing” language in with his “home” language. The “clothes” are bodies, and Paul again uses this language to indicate that people belong in bodies (“clothed”), not without bodies (“naked” or “unclothed”). He does not use “clothing” language to show that bodies are an unimportant part of who people are. If possible, preserve the “clothing” language in your translation, either in metaphor or simile form. However, if how Paul mixes together “home” and “clothing” language would be confusing, you may need to use only the “home” language and express the “clothing” language plainly or as “home” language. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/clothed]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. When he uses this form, he is focusing on himself and those with him, or just on himself (although this is less likely). However, he does not necessarily mean that what he says is not true of the Corinthians or of believers in general. Consider how you can communicate the focus on Paul and those with him without totally excluding the Corinthians. In every case where Paul may be using the first person plural in a way different than this, a note will explain the options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### Singular nouns in general statements\n\nIn [5:1–10](../05/01.md), Paul consistently refers to “body,” “building,” “tent,” and “home” in singular form. He does this because the singular form was a natural way to refer to these things in general. Throughout this section, the UST models how to express the ideas in plural form, since this is more natural for general statements in English. Consider how your language might naturally express a general statement about “bodies.” \n\n### Translating [5:21](../05/21.md)\n\nPaul speaks in a very compressed way in this verse, and Christians disagree about what exactly he means. What is relatively clear is that Paul has in mind what some people call an “interchange” between Christ and believers. Christ, who is “righteous,” is somehow identified with “sin,” and believers, who are “sinners,” are somehow identified with “righteousness.” The “in him” at the end of the verse indicates that this interchange occurs in union with Christ. For details about what it could mean for Christ to be “made sin” and for believers to “become the righteousness of God,” see the notes on this verse. If possible, however, your translation should be as general as Paul’s sentence. This means that you should express the general idea of interchange and allow for many of the possible interpretations listed in the notes. 5:1 p7b7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** could introduce: (1) an explanation of what Paul said in [4:18](../04/18.md). Alternate translation: “In fact,” (2) an example or illustration of what Paul said in [4:18](../04/18.md). Alternate translation: “For example,” (3) a basis for what Paul said in [4:18](../04/18.md). Alternate translation: “That is because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 5:1 v03z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive οἴδαμεν & ἡμῶν & ἔχομεν 1 Here and throughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. See the chapter introduction for more information on how to translate these words. Here, the words **we** and **our** could refer to: (1) just Paul and those with him. Paul is focusing on himself and those with him, but he does not mean to exclude the Corinthians entirely. Alternate translation: “we who preach the gospel … our … we have” (2) Paul and everyone who believes, including the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “all of us know … our … we have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 5:1 la71 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν 1 Here, the word **if** could introduce: (1) something that Paul thinks will definitely happen, but he is not sure when. Alternate translation: “whenever” (2) something that Paul thinks might happen. Alternate translation: “even if” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) -5:1 z4vs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους καταλυθῇ, οἰκοδομὴν ἐκ Θεοῦ ἔχομεν, οἰκίαν ἀχειροποίητον αἰώνιον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 Here Paul speaks as if a person’s body were a **house**, **tent**, or **building** that the person lives in. This was a common way to refer to a person’s body in Paul’s culture. He identifies the current body as a **tent** that is **torn down** because this body will die. He describes the body that a person will have when God resurrects them as a **building from God** and an **eternal house** that is **not made with hands**. This is an important metaphor in [5:1–9](../05/01.md), so preserve the **house**, **tent**, and **building** language if possible. If it would be helpful, you could use a simile or identify what the **house** is in another natural way. Alternate translation: “our earthly house of this tent, that is, our mortal body, is torn down, we have a building from God, that is, our resurrection body, an eternal house in the heavens, not made with hands” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +5:1 z4vs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους καταλυθῇ, οἰκοδομὴν ἐκ Θεοῦ ἔχομεν, οἰκίαν ἀχειροποίητον αἰώνιον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 Here Paul speaks as if a person’s body were a **house**, **tent**, or **building** in which that the person lives. This was a common way to refer to a person’s body in Paul’s culture. He identifies the current body as a **tent** that is **torn down** because this body will die. He describes the body that a person will have when God resurrects them as a **building from God** and an **eternal house** that is **not made with hands**. This is an important metaphor in [5:1–9](../05/01.md), so preserve the **house**, **tent**, and **building** language if possible. If it would be helpful, you could use a simile or identify the **house** in another natural way. Alternate translation: “our earthly house of this tent, that is, our mortal body, is torn down, we have a building from God, that is, our resurrection body, an eternal house in the heavens, not made with hands” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) 5:1 zy2k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους καταλυθῇ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone tears down our earthly house of this tent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 5:1 bvz6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους 1 Here, Paul uses the possessive form identify the **earthly house** as a **tent**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form. Alternate translation: “our earthly house, which is a tent,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 5:1 gz3c ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους καταλυθῇ, οἰκοδομὴν & οἰκίαν & αἰώνιον 1 Here and throughout [5:1–8](../05/01.md), Paul uses the singular form to refer to “bodies” in general, sometimes described as buildings or clothing. See the chapter introduction for more information. Consider what would be natural in your language and use that form throughout these verses. Alternate translation: “our earthly houses of these tents are torn down … buildings … eternal houses” From 11fd452d4fb35876b7ab158dd555a01c9f4f8d3a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Tue, 24 Jan 2023 22:32:30 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 42/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 6117a1c1c2..34c3163b7e 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -524,8 +524,8 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:1 z4vs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους καταλυθῇ, οἰκοδομὴν ἐκ Θεοῦ ἔχομεν, οἰκίαν ἀχειροποίητον αἰώνιον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 Here Paul speaks as if a person’s body were a **house**, **tent**, or **building** in which that the person lives. This was a common way to refer to a person’s body in Paul’s culture. He identifies the current body as a **tent** that is **torn down** because this body will die. He describes the body that a person will have when God resurrects them as a **building from God** and an **eternal house** that is **not made with hands**. This is an important metaphor in [5:1–9](../05/01.md), so preserve the **house**, **tent**, and **building** language if possible. If it would be helpful, you could use a simile or identify the **house** in another natural way. Alternate translation: “our earthly house of this tent, that is, our mortal body, is torn down, we have a building from God, that is, our resurrection body, an eternal house in the heavens, not made with hands” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) 5:1 zy2k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους καταλυθῇ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone tears down our earthly house of this tent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 5:1 bvz6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους 1 Here, Paul uses the possessive form identify the **earthly house** as a **tent**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form. Alternate translation: “our earthly house, which is a tent,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -5:1 gz3c ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους καταλυθῇ, οἰκοδομὴν & οἰκίαν & αἰώνιον 1 Here and throughout [5:1–8](../05/01.md), Paul uses the singular form to refer to “bodies” in general, sometimes described as buildings or clothing. See the chapter introduction for more information. Consider what would be natural in your language and use that form throughout these verses. Alternate translation: “our earthly houses of these tents are torn down … buildings … eternal houses” -5:1 xifl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 Many people in Paul’s culture believed that the space that they called “heaven” contained multiple layers or spheres of individual heavens. Here, Paul refers to how the **eternal house** can be found **in the heavens**. Since Paul does not include details about the heavens, translate **heavens** with a word or phrase that refers to all of heavenly space, including the idea of multiple heavens if possible. Alternate translation: “in the heavenly realm” or “in the heavenly spaces” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +5:1 gz3c rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους καταλυθῇ, οἰκοδομὴν & οἰκίαν & αἰώνιον 1 Here and throughout [5:1–8](../05/01.md), Paul uses the singular form to refer to “bodies” in general, sometimes described as buildings or clothing. See the chapter introduction for more information. Consider what would be natural in your language and use that form throughout these verses. Alternate translation: “our earthly houses of these tents are torn down … buildings … eternal houses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) +5:1 xifl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 Many people in Paul’s culture believed that the space that they called “heaven” contained multiple layers or spheres of individual heavens. Here Paul refers to how the **eternal house** can be found **in the heavens**. Since Paul does not include details about the heavens, translate **heavens** with a word or phrase that refers to all of heavenly space, including the idea of multiple heavens if possible. Alternate translation: “in the heavenly realm” or “in the heavenly spaces” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:1 bqi5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἀχειροποίητον 1 Here, the word **hands** refers to the main part of the body that we use to make things. So, the phrase refers to the whole person who makes things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that **hands** refers to “humans” in general, not just their hands. Alternate translation: “not made by humans” or “not made by people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 5:1 bbvr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀχειροποίητον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which hands did not make” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 5:2 mt4s rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ γὰρ 1 Here, the phrase **For indeed** indicates that Paul is adding more information (**indeed**) that supports what he said in the previous verse (**For**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce added information that supports a previous statement. Alternate translation: “Further” or “And in fact” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) From 28b0db44e537935781186b0205d1845f602b3cbb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Tue, 24 Jan 2023 22:36:36 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 43/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 34c3163b7e..8f3c1edac4 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -530,7 +530,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:1 bbvr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀχειροποίητον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which hands did not make” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 5:2 mt4s rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ γὰρ 1 Here, the phrase **For indeed** indicates that Paul is adding more information (**indeed**) that supports what he said in the previous verse (**For**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce added information that supports a previous statement. Alternate translation: “Further” or “And in fact” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 5:2 tc2j rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐν τούτῳ 1 Here, the phrase **in this** could refer to: (1) the earthly house that is a tent, that is, the person’s current body. Alternate translation: “in this tent” or “in our bodies on earth” (2) the current time period. Alternate translation: “right now” or “in this time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -5:2 yg6y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor ἐν τούτῳ στενάζομεν, τὸ οἰκητήριον ἡμῶν τὸ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἐπενδύσασθαι ἐπιποθοῦντες 1 Here Paul continues to refer to mortal bodies and resurrection bodies as “houses” or “dwellings.” You should express the idea as you did in [5:1](../05/01.md). Paul also begins to refer to receiving new, resurrection bodies as if they were clothing that people could put on. This also is an important figure of speech for the following verses, so preserve the language if possible. If it is necessary, you could use a simile or express the idea in another natural way that fits with the “building” language. Alternate translation: “in this house, that is, our mortal body, we groan, longing to completely live in our dwelling that is from heaven, that is, our resurrection body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +5:2 yg6y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor ἐν τούτῳ στενάζομεν, τὸ οἰκητήριον ἡμῶν τὸ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἐπενδύσασθαι ἐπιποθοῦντες 1 Here Paul continues to refer to mortal bodies and resurrection bodies as “houses” or “dwellings.” You should express the idea as you did in [5:1](../05/01.md). Paul also begins to refer to receiving new, resurrection bodies as if they were pieces of clothing that people could put on. This also is an important figure of speech for the following verses, so preserve the language if possible. If it is necessary, you could use a simile or express the idea in another natural way that fits with the “building” language. Alternate translation: “in this house, that is, our mortal body, we groan, longing to completely live in our dwelling that is from heaven, that is, our resurrection body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) 5:2 ss6g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπενδύσασθαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “for God to fully clothe us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 5:3 bjau rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor ἐνδυσάμενοι, οὐ γυμνοὶ εὑρεθησόμεθα 1 Here Paul continues to speak of bodies as if they were clothing. You should express the idea as you did in [5:2](../05/02.md). Alternate translation: “we have a house to live in, we will not be found homeless” or “having a new body that is like clothing, we will not be found naked, that is, without a body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) 5:3 da0z rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴ γε & ἐνδυσάμενοι 1 Here Paul is speaking as if **having clothed ourselves** were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it will actually be true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by using a word such as “when” or “whenever.” Alternate translation: “when indeed we have clothed ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) From 839d8d79260a09e7d03501c69f34479ccb1c3f68 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Tue, 24 Jan 2023 22:43:24 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 44/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 8f3c1edac4..ef45632f0c 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -538,9 +538,9 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:3 ap7v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ & εὑρεθησόμεθα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form to focus on the state of being **naked** rather than on who “finds” them, so you should avoid stating a subject for **found**. Alternate translation: “we will not be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 5:4 zvz8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ γὰρ 1 Here, the phrase **For indeed** indicates that Paul is adding more information (**indeed**) that supports what he said in the previous two verses (**For**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce added information that supports a previous statement. Alternate translation: “Further” or “And in fact” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 5:4 bz6k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor οἱ ὄντες ἐν τῷ σκήνει & οὐ θέλομεν ἐκδύσασθαι, ἀλλ’ ἐπενδύσασθαι 1 Here Paul continues to speak of bodies as buildings and clothing. You should express the ideas as you did in [5:1–3](../05/01.md). Alternate translation: “the ones being in this tent, that is, our mortal body … we do not want to be homeless, but to have a home” or “the ones being in this tent, that is, this body … we do not want to have no body, which is like being unclothed, but to have a resurrection body, which is like being fully clothed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) -5:4 e34b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor βαρούμενοι 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and those with were carrying a heavy “burden.” He means that something is making their lives difficult. The “burden” could be: (1) how the **tent**, that is, their current bodies, fall apart and die. Alternate translation: “being distressed by it” (2) how other people situations make life hard for them. Alternate translation: “being troubled by many people and things” or “being oppressed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +5:4 e34b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor βαρούμενοι 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and those with him were carrying a heavy burden. He means that something is making their lives difficult. The burden could be: (1) how the **tent**, that is, their current bodies, falls apart and dies. Alternate translation: “being distressed by it” (2) how other people's situations make life hard for them. Alternate translation: “being troubled by many people and things” or “being oppressed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 5:4 g9yu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive βαρούμενοι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that either the **tent** (their mortal bodies) or other people and things did it. Make sure your translation fits with how you chose to express the metaphor in the previous note. Alternate translation: “the tent burdening us” or “many people and things burdening us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -5:4 f8rb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ θέλομεν ἐκδύσασθαι, ἀλλ’ ἐπενδύσασθαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form to focus on the state of being **unclothed** or **clothed** rather than on whoever clothes or unclothes them, so you should avoid stating a subject for **unclothed** and **clothed**. Alternate translation: “we do not want to be naked, but to have clothes on” or “we do not want to have no clothing, but to wear clothing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +5:4 f8rb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ θέλομεν ἐκδύσασθαι, ἀλλ’ ἐπενδύσασθαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form to focus on the state of being **unclothed** or **clothed** rather than on whoever clothes or unclothes them, so you should avoid stating a subject for **unclothed** and **clothed**. Alternate translation: “we do not want to be naked but to have clothes on” or “we do not want to have no clothing but to wear clothing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 5:4 nezo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ ἐπενδύσασθαι 1 This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “but we want to be fully clothed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 5:4 n78p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τὸ θνητὸν 1 Paul is using the adjective **mortal** as a noun in order to refer to all bodies that are **mortal**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the mortal bodies” or “what is mortal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 5:4 e5zi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καταποθῇ τὸ θνητὸν ὑπὸ τῆς ζωῆς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “life may swallow up the mortal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From f53bbf37fe14add9fa767c37169169a420b4046c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Tue, 24 Jan 2023 22:59:53 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 45/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index ef45632f0c..36638137e5 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -540,16 +540,16 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:4 bz6k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor οἱ ὄντες ἐν τῷ σκήνει & οὐ θέλομεν ἐκδύσασθαι, ἀλλ’ ἐπενδύσασθαι 1 Here Paul continues to speak of bodies as buildings and clothing. You should express the ideas as you did in [5:1–3](../05/01.md). Alternate translation: “the ones being in this tent, that is, our mortal body … we do not want to be homeless, but to have a home” or “the ones being in this tent, that is, this body … we do not want to have no body, which is like being unclothed, but to have a resurrection body, which is like being fully clothed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) 5:4 e34b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor βαρούμενοι 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and those with him were carrying a heavy burden. He means that something is making their lives difficult. The burden could be: (1) how the **tent**, that is, their current bodies, falls apart and dies. Alternate translation: “being distressed by it” (2) how other people's situations make life hard for them. Alternate translation: “being troubled by many people and things” or “being oppressed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 5:4 g9yu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive βαρούμενοι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that either the **tent** (their mortal bodies) or other people and things did it. Make sure your translation fits with how you chose to express the metaphor in the previous note. Alternate translation: “the tent burdening us” or “many people and things burdening us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -5:4 f8rb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ θέλομεν ἐκδύσασθαι, ἀλλ’ ἐπενδύσασθαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form to focus on the state of being **unclothed** or **clothed** rather than on whoever clothes or unclothes them, so you should avoid stating a subject for **unclothed** and **clothed**. Alternate translation: “we do not want to be naked but to have clothes on” or “we do not want to have no clothing but to wear clothing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +5:4 f8rb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ θέλομεν ἐκδύσασθαι, ἀλλ’ ἐπενδύσασθαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form to focus on the state of being **unclothed** or **clothed** rather than on whoever clothes or unclothes them, so you should avoid stating a subject for **unclothed** and **clothed**. Alternate translation: “we do not want to be naked, but to have clothes on” or “we do not want to have no clothing, but to wear clothing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 5:4 nezo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ ἐπενδύσασθαι 1 This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “but we want to be fully clothed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 5:4 n78p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τὸ θνητὸν 1 Paul is using the adjective **mortal** as a noun in order to refer to all bodies that are **mortal**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the mortal bodies” or “what is mortal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 5:4 e5zi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καταποθῇ τὸ θνητὸν ὑπὸ τῆς ζωῆς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “life may swallow up the mortal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 5:4 de2b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καταποθῇ 1 Here Paul refers to **the mortal** as if it were food that could be **swallowed up**. This illustrates that **the mortal** has been defeated as surely as if **life** devoured it as food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “may be destroyed” or “may be taken over” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 5:4 y0db rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς ζωῆς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **life**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “live” or an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “what is alive” or “what lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -5:5 x35l rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +5:5 x35l rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 5:5 m2id rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατεργασάμενος ἡμᾶς 1 Here, the phrase **having prepared** could refer to how God: (1) has acted in believers’ lives to get them ready for resurrection and new life. Alternate translation: “having gotten us ready” (2) created believers when they first began to live. Alternate translation: “having created” or “having made us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:5 xr9o rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτὸ τοῦτο 1 Here, the phrase **this very thing** refers back to what Paul said in the previous verse about receiving a new body in place of the one that people have now (see [5:4](../05/04.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what the phrase refers to more explicit. Alternate translation: “receiving resurrection bodies” or “this new life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -5:5 n20x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish ὁ δοὺς 1 Here Paul adding more information about **God**. He is not distinguishing between different gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly adds information instead of distinguishing between people. Alternate translation: “and he has given” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) +5:5 n20x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish ὁ δοὺς 1 Here Paul is adding more information about **God**. He is not distinguishing between different gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly adds information instead of distinguishing between people. Alternate translation: “and he has given” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 5:5 g7yj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν ἀρραβῶνα τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Here, Paul is speaking of the **Spirit** as if he were a **down payment**, that is, a partial payment for a purchase with a promise to pay the rest of the amount on a future date. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar phrase in [1:22](../01/22.md). Alternate translation: “a guarantee, which is the Spirit, that he will also give us eternal life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 5:5 kyyw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸν ἀρραβῶνα τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to the **down payment** as the **Spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the Spirit as a down payment” or “the down payment that is the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 5:6 clh5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces a conclusion or inference from what Paul has said in [5:1–6](../05/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or inference. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) From 8319f756f567fb83151f8090860253bc41356739 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Tue, 24 Jan 2023 23:16:54 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 47/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 36638137e5..a562488b7a 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -553,7 +553,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:5 g7yj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν ἀρραβῶνα τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Here, Paul is speaking of the **Spirit** as if he were a **down payment**, that is, a partial payment for a purchase with a promise to pay the rest of the amount on a future date. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar phrase in [1:22](../01/22.md). Alternate translation: “a guarantee, which is the Spirit, that he will also give us eternal life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 5:5 kyyw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸν ἀρραβῶνα τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to the **down payment** as the **Spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the Spirit as a down payment” or “the down payment that is the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 5:6 clh5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces a conclusion or inference from what Paul has said in [5:1–6](../05/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or inference. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -5:6 xjg3 καὶ εἰδότες 1 Here, the word **and** could introduce: (1) additional information. Alternate translation: “and also” (2) a reason why they are **courageous**. Alternate translation: “because we know” (3) something that is true even though they are **courageous**. Alternate translation: “even though we know” +5:6 xjg3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ εἰδότες 1 Here, the word **and** could introduce: (1) additional information. Alternate translation: “and also knowing” (2) a reason why they are **courageous**. Alternate translation: “because we know” (3) something that is true even though they are **courageous**. Alternate translation: “even though we know” 5:6 bde4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure θαρροῦντες & πάντοτε, καὶ εἰδότες ὅτι ἐνδημοῦντες ἐν τῷ σώματι, ἐκδημοῦμεν ἀπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου; 1 Paul never gives a main verb to go with these statements. Instead, he introduces a parenthetical statement in the following verse and then ends the sentence. At the beginning of [5:8](../05/08.md), he repeats the word that is translated **courageous** here, which indicates that he is going to resume speaking about what he started speaking about in this verse. If you can clearly indicate that Paul does not finish this sentence, you could use that form here, as the ULT does by using a dash. If your readers would find this structure confusing, you could make this verse a complete thought on its own. Alternate translation: “we are always courageous and know that being at home in the body, we are away from the Lord,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 5:6 xv3m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor ἐνδημοῦντες ἐν τῷ σώματι, ἐκδημοῦμεν ἀπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Here Paul continues to refer to the **body** as if it were a building that a person could be **at home in**. Express the idea as you did in [5:1–2](../05/01.md). Alternate translation: “living in the body, as if it were a home, we are not present with the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) 5:6 ebl4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῷ σώματι 1 Paul implies that this **body** is the one that people have before they die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this more explicit. Alternate translation: “in our current body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 0f4d73bf079cb700642cf8c8fd80df2f847a0f98 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Tue, 24 Jan 2023 23:17:42 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 48/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index a562488b7a..ad09c1829a 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -553,7 +553,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:5 g7yj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν ἀρραβῶνα τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Here, Paul is speaking of the **Spirit** as if he were a **down payment**, that is, a partial payment for a purchase with a promise to pay the rest of the amount on a future date. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar phrase in [1:22](../01/22.md). Alternate translation: “a guarantee, which is the Spirit, that he will also give us eternal life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 5:5 kyyw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸν ἀρραβῶνα τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to the **down payment** as the **Spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the Spirit as a down payment” or “the down payment that is the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 5:6 clh5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces a conclusion or inference from what Paul has said in [5:1–6](../05/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or inference. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -5:6 xjg3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ εἰδότες 1 Here, the word **and** could introduce: (1) additional information. Alternate translation: “and also knowing” (2) a reason why they are **courageous**. Alternate translation: “because we know” (3) something that is true even though they are **courageous**. Alternate translation: “even though we know” +5:6 xjg3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ εἰδότες 1 Here, the word **and** could introduce: (1) additional information. Alternate translation: “and also knowing” (2) a reason why they are **courageous**. Alternate translation: “because we know” (3) something that is true even though they are **courageous**. Alternate translation: “even though we know” See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 5:6 bde4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure θαρροῦντες & πάντοτε, καὶ εἰδότες ὅτι ἐνδημοῦντες ἐν τῷ σώματι, ἐκδημοῦμεν ἀπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου; 1 Paul never gives a main verb to go with these statements. Instead, he introduces a parenthetical statement in the following verse and then ends the sentence. At the beginning of [5:8](../05/08.md), he repeats the word that is translated **courageous** here, which indicates that he is going to resume speaking about what he started speaking about in this verse. If you can clearly indicate that Paul does not finish this sentence, you could use that form here, as the ULT does by using a dash. If your readers would find this structure confusing, you could make this verse a complete thought on its own. Alternate translation: “we are always courageous and know that being at home in the body, we are away from the Lord,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 5:6 xv3m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor ἐνδημοῦντες ἐν τῷ σώματι, ἐκδημοῦμεν ἀπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Here Paul continues to refer to the **body** as if it were a building that a person could be **at home in**. Express the idea as you did in [5:1–2](../05/01.md). Alternate translation: “living in the body, as if it were a home, we are not present with the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) 5:6 ebl4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῷ σώματι 1 Paul implies that this **body** is the one that people have before they die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this more explicit. Alternate translation: “in our current body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 2c8ec4eec8aa8a1d726dce7e0e3655a47e69357b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Tue, 24 Jan 2023 23:18:20 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 49/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index ad09c1829a..2ccca2a0ad 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -562,7 +562,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:7 wok7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διὰ πίστεως & οὐ διὰ εἴδους 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **faith** and **sight**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “believe” and “see.” Alternate translation: “by believing, not by seeing” or “by what we believe, not by what we see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:7 n9el rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ πίστεως & οὐ διὰ εἴδους 1 Here, the words **faith** and **sight** could refer to: (1) the acts of “believing” or “seeing” Jesus the Messiah. Alternate translation: “by believing in Jesus, not by seeing him” (2) what is “believed” or “seen.” Alternate translation: “by what we believe, not by what we see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:8 iq0j rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces again what Paul started speaking about in [5:16(../05/06.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that resumes an earlier idea or thought. Alternate translation: “Again,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -5:8 npio καὶ 1 Here, the word **and** could introduce: (1) additional information. Alternate translation: “and also” (2) a contrast with how they are **confident**. Alternate translation: “but” (3) what it is that they are **confident** about. Alternate translation: “enough that we” +5:8 npio rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 1 Here, the word **and** could introduce: (1) additional information. Alternate translation: “and also” (2) a contrast with how they are **confident**. Alternate translation: “but” (3) what it is that they are **confident** about. Alternate translation: “enough that we” See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 5:8 a6au εὐδοκοῦμεν, μᾶλλον 1 Alternate translation: “would prefer” 5:8 i3m3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor ἐκδημῆσαι ἐκ τοῦ σώματος καὶ ἐνδημῆσαι πρὸς τὸν Κύριον 1 Here Paul continues to refer to the **body** as if it were a building in which a person could be **at home**. Express the idea as you did in [5:6](../05/06.md). Alternate translation: “not to live in the body as if it were a home and to be present with the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) 5:8 bca2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκδημῆσαι ἐκ τοῦ σώματος 1 Here, the word **body** refers to the body that people have before they die. The phrase **be away from the body** could refer to: (1) a temporary situation between when a believer dies and when Jesus comes back in which the believer does not have a body but is still **with the Lord**. Alternate translation: “to be without a body for now” (2) the eternal situation of believers, in which they either have no bodies or have new bodies. Alternate translation: “to be away from this body forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From d4a52cd0d27589d76091fbed741713941b9c30eb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Tue, 24 Jan 2023 23:21:14 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 50/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 2ccca2a0ad..4398bee1b2 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -568,7 +568,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:8 bca2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκδημῆσαι ἐκ τοῦ σώματος 1 Here, the word **body** refers to the body that people have before they die. The phrase **be away from the body** could refer to: (1) a temporary situation between when a believer dies and when Jesus comes back in which the believer does not have a body but is still **with the Lord**. Alternate translation: “to be without a body for now” (2) the eternal situation of believers, in which they either have no bodies or have new bodies. Alternate translation: “to be away from this body forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:9 owmc rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ καὶ 1 Here, the phrase **And therefore** introduces an inference or conclusion based on what Paul has already said, particularly in [5:6–8](../05/06.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion based on what has been said. Alternate translation: “Because of that,” or “And so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 5:9 ml5j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἴτε ἐνδημοῦντες εἴτε ἐκδημοῦντες 1 Here Paul could be referring to how people are **at home** or **away** from: (1) the Lord. Alternate translation: “whether being at home with the Lord or being away from him” (2) this body. Alternate translation: “whether being at home in this body or being away from it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -5:9 gadz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor εἴτε ἐνδημοῦντες εἴτε ἐκδημοῦντες 1 Here Paul continues to refer a building in which a person could be **at home**. Express the idea as you did in [5:6](../05/06.md), [8](../05/08.md). Make sure that your translation matches fits with what you chose in the previous note about whether Paul implies “body” or “Lord” here. Alternate translation: “whether being in the body as if it were a home or out of the body” or “whether being present or being absent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +5:9 gadz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor εἴτε ἐνδημοῦντες εἴτε ἐκδημοῦντες 1 Here Paul continues to refer to a building in which a person could be **at home**. Express the idea as you did in [5:6](../05/06.md), [8](../05/08.md). Make sure that your translation matches or fits with what you chose in the previous note about whether Paul implies “body” or “Lord” here. Alternate translation: “whether being in the body as if it were a home or out of the body” or “whether being present or being absent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) 5:9 j1sl rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτῷ 1 Here, the word **him** refers to the “Lord” whom Paul mentioned in the previous verse, that is, Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what the pronoun refers to. Alternate translation: “to the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 5:10 k0qb rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Paul and those with him “aspire to be well-pleasing” to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a reason for a previous statement. Alternate translation: “We aspire to that because” or “After all,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 5:10 awq4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive τοὺς & πάντας ἡμᾶς 1 Here, the word **us** could refer to: (1) Paul and everyone who believes, including the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “all of us who believe” (2) all humans. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) From 3b4551217c358ee42fb6cfb3c67db746a685da7a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Tue, 24 Jan 2023 23:22:33 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 51/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 4398bee1b2..039cdada1f 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -569,7 +569,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:9 owmc rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ καὶ 1 Here, the phrase **And therefore** introduces an inference or conclusion based on what Paul has already said, particularly in [5:6–8](../05/06.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion based on what has been said. Alternate translation: “Because of that,” or “And so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 5:9 ml5j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἴτε ἐνδημοῦντες εἴτε ἐκδημοῦντες 1 Here Paul could be referring to how people are **at home** or **away** from: (1) the Lord. Alternate translation: “whether being at home with the Lord or being away from him” (2) this body. Alternate translation: “whether being at home in this body or being away from it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:9 gadz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor εἴτε ἐνδημοῦντες εἴτε ἐκδημοῦντες 1 Here Paul continues to refer to a building in which a person could be **at home**. Express the idea as you did in [5:6](../05/06.md), [8](../05/08.md). Make sure that your translation matches or fits with what you chose in the previous note about whether Paul implies “body” or “Lord” here. Alternate translation: “whether being in the body as if it were a home or out of the body” or “whether being present or being absent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) -5:9 j1sl rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτῷ 1 Here, the word **him** refers to the “Lord” whom Paul mentioned in the previous verse, that is, Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what the pronoun refers to. Alternate translation: “to the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +5:9 j1sl rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτῷ 1 Here, the word **him** refers to the Lord, that is, Jesus, whom Paul mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what the pronoun refers to. Alternate translation: “to the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 5:10 k0qb rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Paul and those with him “aspire to be well-pleasing” to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a reason for a previous statement. Alternate translation: “We aspire to that because” or “After all,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 5:10 awq4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive τοὺς & πάντας ἡμᾶς 1 Here, the word **us** could refer to: (1) Paul and everyone who believes, including the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “all of us who believe” (2) all humans. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 5:10 uv7o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοὺς & πάντας ἡμᾶς φανερωθῆναι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) we “reveal” ourselves. Alternate translation: “us all to reveal ourselves” or “us all to stand” (2) God “reveals” us. Alternate translation: “God to reveal us all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From d28e9ded05a347ea4965438bd92180b7dd51b4ee Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Tue, 24 Jan 2023 23:24:27 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 52/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 039cdada1f..2938e05067 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:9 j1sl rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτῷ 1 Here, the word **him** refers to the Lord, that is, Jesus, whom Paul mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what the pronoun refers to. Alternate translation: “to the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 5:10 k0qb rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Paul and those with him “aspire to be well-pleasing” to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a reason for a previous statement. Alternate translation: “We aspire to that because” or “After all,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 5:10 awq4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive τοὺς & πάντας ἡμᾶς 1 Here, the word **us** could refer to: (1) Paul and everyone who believes, including the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “all of us who believe” (2) all humans. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -5:10 uv7o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοὺς & πάντας ἡμᾶς φανερωθῆναι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) we “reveal” ourselves. Alternate translation: “us all to reveal ourselves” or “us all to stand” (2) God “reveals” us. Alternate translation: “God to reveal us all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +5:10 uv7o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοὺς & πάντας ἡμᾶς φανερωθῆναι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) we reveal ourselves. Alternate translation: “us all to reveal ourselves” or “us all to stand” (2) God reveals us. Alternate translation: “God to reveal us all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 5:10 kdf2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βήματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **judgment seat** refers to a raised seat that a judge or official would sit on when he or she was making official decisions. In Paul’s culture, people expected the Messiah to sit on this kind of seat when this world ends and decide whether to reward or punish people. Paul uses this idea to refer to how Jesus will “judge” **us all**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit or refer more directly to how **Christ** will “judge.” Alternate translation: “before the judgment seat that Christ will sit on when he returns” or “before Christ to be judged by him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:10 c499 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κομίσηται & τὰ διὰ τοῦ σώματος 1 In this context, the phrase **receive back** refers to getting something in payment or in return for something else. Paul is speaking as if everyone **will receive back** as payment or recompense exactly what they did **through the body**. By this, Paul means that God will reward or punish everyone in a way that fits with what they did. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “may receive a punishment or reward that fits what they did through the body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 5:10 v8sl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὰ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that **each one** did it. Alternate translation: “what he or she has done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From 5e50644ce59fc42930a89c165e2fe7d510fcb34d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Tue, 24 Jan 2023 23:25:18 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 53/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 2938e05067..27560d0719 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -573,7 +573,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:10 k0qb rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Paul and those with him “aspire to be well-pleasing” to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a reason for a previous statement. Alternate translation: “We aspire to that because” or “After all,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 5:10 awq4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive τοὺς & πάντας ἡμᾶς 1 Here, the word **us** could refer to: (1) Paul and everyone who believes, including the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “all of us who believe” (2) all humans. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 5:10 uv7o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοὺς & πάντας ἡμᾶς φανερωθῆναι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) we reveal ourselves. Alternate translation: “us all to reveal ourselves” or “us all to stand” (2) God reveals us. Alternate translation: “God to reveal us all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -5:10 kdf2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βήματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **judgment seat** refers to a raised seat that a judge or official would sit on when he or she was making official decisions. In Paul’s culture, people expected the Messiah to sit on this kind of seat when this world ends and decide whether to reward or punish people. Paul uses this idea to refer to how Jesus will “judge” **us all**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit or refer more directly to how **Christ** will “judge.” Alternate translation: “before the judgment seat that Christ will sit on when he returns” or “before Christ to be judged by him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +5:10 kdf2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βήματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **judgment seat** refers to a raised seat that a judge or official would sit on when he or she was making official decisions. In Paul’s culture, people expected the Messiah to sit on this kind of seat when this world ends and decide whether to reward or punish people. Paul uses this idea to refer to how Jesus will judge **us all**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit or refer more directly to how **Christ** will judge. Alternate translation: “before the judgment seat that Christ will sit on when he returns” or “before Christ to be judged by him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:10 c499 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κομίσηται & τὰ διὰ τοῦ σώματος 1 In this context, the phrase **receive back** refers to getting something in payment or in return for something else. Paul is speaking as if everyone **will receive back** as payment or recompense exactly what they did **through the body**. By this, Paul means that God will reward or punish everyone in a way that fits with what they did. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “may receive a punishment or reward that fits what they did through the body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 5:10 v8sl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὰ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that **each one** did it. Alternate translation: “what he or she has done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 5:10 cr07 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom διὰ τοῦ σώματος 1 Here, the phrase **through the body** clarifies that **the {things done}** are what people did while they had mortal bodies and lived on this earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression that refers to what people do in their current bodies. Alternate translation: “with their earthly bodies” or “before they died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) From 0adc00b5c75830266f44f49e8d44bc89dc6f9125 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 15:55:17 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 55/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 27560d0719..688d5b4fe6 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -579,7 +579,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:10 cr07 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom διὰ τοῦ σώματος 1 Here, the phrase **through the body** clarifies that **the {things done}** are what people did while they had mortal bodies and lived on this earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression that refers to what people do in their current bodies. Alternate translation: “with their earthly bodies” or “before they died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 5:10 nhwf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πρὸς ἃ ἔπραξεν 1 Here, the phrase **with regard to what things he did** introduces what **Christ** is judging. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “on the basis of what things he did” or “being judged based on what he did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:10 izpv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἔπραξεν 1 Although the word **he** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any person, either man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that applies to both men and women or you could refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she did” or “that person did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -5:10 lsh8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἴτε ἀγαθὸν εἴτε κακὸν 1 Here, the words **good** or **bad** could describe: (1) the things that people did. Alternate translation: “whether those things were good or bad” (2) both the things that people did and what they **receive back**. Alternate translation: “whether good things deserving commendation or bad things deserving rebuke” (3) just what people **receive back**. Alternate translation: “whether reward or rebuke” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +5:10 lsh8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἴτε ἀγαθὸν εἴτε κακὸν 1 Here, the words **good or bad** could describe: (1) the things that people did. Alternate translation: “whether those things were good or bad” (2) both the things that people did and what they **receive back**. Alternate translation: “whether good things deserving commendation or bad things deserving rebuke” (3) just what people **receive back**. Alternate translation: “whether reward or rebuke” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:11 hszo rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces a conclusion or inference from what Paul has said in [5:10](../05/10.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or inference. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 5:11 dzh5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰδότες 1 Here, the word **knowing** introduces a reason for why Paul and those with him **persuade men**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “since we know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 5:11 pa4j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸν φόβον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify **fear** that is directed toward **the Lord**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the fear that is directed to the Lord” or “the fear that we experience for the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) From 5a4930aa4094e69a1857f72272c6558cbe13e1fc Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 16:01:25 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 56/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 688d5b4fe6..168a8a0ff7 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -587,7 +587,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:11 qm34 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀνθρώπους πείθομεν 1 Here Paul could be implying that he “persuades” people: (1) to know **the fear of the Lord** as he and those with him do. Alternate translation: “we persuade men also to know the fear of the Lord” (2) to realize that he and those with him are people who know **the fear of the Lord** and are thus trustworthy. Alternate translation: “we persuade men that we are those who fear the Lord” or “we persuade men that we are trustworthy” (3) to accept the gospel. Alternate translation: “we persuade men to believe the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:11 b7dd rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast with how they **persuade men**. In contrast with that, they do not need to persuade God, since they are already **clearly known** by him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this relationship clear. Alternate translation: “On the other hand,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 5:11 v11v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive Θεῷ & πεφανερώμεθα & πεφανερῶσθαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God knows us clearly … that you know us clearly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -5:11 qb7z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πεφανερώμεθα & ἐν ταῖς συνειδήσεσιν ὑμῶν πεφανερῶσθαι 1 Here Paul does not state what it is about them that is **clearly known**. Paul implies that **God** knows that they are faithful to him and preach the good news properly. Paul wants the Corinthians to recognize this also. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “we are clearly known to be faithful … to be clearly known in your consciences as faithful” or “we are clearly known to preach the truth … to be clearly known in your consciences as one preaching the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +5:11 qb7z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πεφανερώμεθα & ἐν ταῖς συνειδήσεσιν ὑμῶν πεφανερῶσθαι 1 Here Paul does not state what it is about them that is **clearly known**. Paul implies that **God** knows that Paul and his coworkers are faithful to God and preach the good news properly. Paul wants the Corinthians to recognize this also. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “we are clearly known to be faithful … to be clearly known in your consciences as faithful” or “we are clearly known to preach the truth … to be clearly known in your consciences as one preaching the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:12 r7sg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οὐ πάλιν ἑαυτοὺς συνιστάνομεν ὑμῖν, ἀλλὰ ἀφορμὴν διδόντες ὑμῖν καυχήματος ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν, ἵνα ἔχητε πρὸς τοὺς ἐν προσώπῳ καυχωμένους, καὶ μὴ ἐν καρδίᾳ 1 If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the order of the elements here. Alternate translation: “We are giving you an opportunity of boasting on our behalf, so that you may have an answer for the ones boasting in appearance and not in heart. It is not that we are again commending ourselves to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 5:12 ufwe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάλιν 1 Here, the word **again** implies that Paul and those with him had already “commended themselves” at some point in the past. Most likely, this happened when they first met the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this more explicit. See how you translated the similar form in [3:1](../03/01.md). Alternate translation: “once more” or “again, like we did at first,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:12 c134 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἀφορμὴν & καυχήματος 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe an **opportunity** that is for **boasting**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “an opportunity for boasting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) From 0bf9715f57b62d2079fbdd0a542a5e5be95f2357 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 16:03:44 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 57/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 168a8a0ff7..0c02ebc64a 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -591,7 +591,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:12 r7sg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οὐ πάλιν ἑαυτοὺς συνιστάνομεν ὑμῖν, ἀλλὰ ἀφορμὴν διδόντες ὑμῖν καυχήματος ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν, ἵνα ἔχητε πρὸς τοὺς ἐν προσώπῳ καυχωμένους, καὶ μὴ ἐν καρδίᾳ 1 If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the order of the elements here. Alternate translation: “We are giving you an opportunity of boasting on our behalf, so that you may have an answer for the ones boasting in appearance and not in heart. It is not that we are again commending ourselves to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 5:12 ufwe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάλιν 1 Here, the word **again** implies that Paul and those with him had already “commended themselves” at some point in the past. Most likely, this happened when they first met the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this more explicit. See how you translated the similar form in [3:1](../03/01.md). Alternate translation: “once more” or “again, like we did at first,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:12 c134 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἀφορμὴν & καυχήματος 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe an **opportunity** that is for **boasting**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “an opportunity for boasting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -5:12 e6k6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν προσώπῳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **appearance**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “appear” or “look.” Alternate translation: “what people look like” or “how things appear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +5:12 e6k6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν προσώπῳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **appearance**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “appear” or “look.” Alternate translation: “in what people look like” or “in how things appear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:12 ikd5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis μὴ ἐν 1 This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “not boasting in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 5:12 it2r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν καρδίᾳ 1 In Paul’s culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you express the idea by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by using plain language. Alternate translation: “in mind” or “in who they really are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 5:13 ys3l rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said “boasting” in the previous verse. In this verse, he indicates that he acts in certain ways **for** the Corinthians, even if he acts in other ways **for God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) From 5561ac25eda70d4dbfa12dda0e453d63d796e83f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 16:09:52 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 58/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 0c02ebc64a..808b9eff53 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -593,8 +593,8 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:12 c134 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἀφορμὴν & καυχήματος 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe an **opportunity** that is for **boasting**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “an opportunity for boasting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 5:12 e6k6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν προσώπῳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **appearance**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “appear” or “look.” Alternate translation: “in what people look like” or “in how things appear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:12 ikd5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis μὴ ἐν 1 This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “not boasting in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -5:12 it2r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν καρδίᾳ 1 In Paul’s culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you express the idea by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by using plain language. Alternate translation: “in mind” or “in who they really are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -5:13 ys3l rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said “boasting” in the previous verse. In this verse, he indicates that he acts in certain ways **for** the Corinthians, even if he acts in other ways **for God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +5:12 it2r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν καρδίᾳ 1 In Paul’s culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you express the idea by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by using plain language. Alternate translation: “in who they really are” or "in mind" (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +5:13 ys3l rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said about boasting in the previous verse. In this verse, he indicates that he acts in certain ways **for** the Corinthians, even if he acts in other ways **for God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 5:13 e4mp rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴτε -1 Here, the word **if** in both places introduces situations that Paul thinks has happened. He is not using **if** to introduce things he thinks might happen. If your language does not use the conditional form for things that definitely happened, you could use another form that refers to alternate situations. Alternate translation: “whenever … whenever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 5:13 cy57 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐξέστημεν & σωφρονοῦμεν 1 Here Paul uses two opposite phrases. These phrases could contrast: (1) fanatical or extreme behavior with moderate or sane behavior. Alternate translation: “we are fanatical … we are moderate” (2) ecstatic or visionary behavior with rational or normal behavior. Alternate translation: “we see visions … we have control of our minds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 5:13 b4ri rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Θεῷ & ὑμῖν 1 Here, the phrases **for God** and **for you** could indicate: (1) the people for whose benefit Paul is behaving in these ways. Alternate translation: “it is for God’s sake … it is for your sake” (2) the people to whom he directs his behavior. Alternate translation: “it is in our relationship with God … it is in our relationship with you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From f57671c51c5b5006b02489e5eef3a32df2d81a52 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 16:10:26 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 59/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 808b9eff53..fb5f4f95cb 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -595,7 +595,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:12 ikd5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis μὴ ἐν 1 This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “not boasting in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 5:12 it2r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν καρδίᾳ 1 In Paul’s culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you express the idea by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by using plain language. Alternate translation: “in who they really are” or "in mind" (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 5:13 ys3l rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said about boasting in the previous verse. In this verse, he indicates that he acts in certain ways **for** the Corinthians, even if he acts in other ways **for God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -5:13 e4mp rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴτε -1 Here, the word **if** in both places introduces situations that Paul thinks has happened. He is not using **if** to introduce things he thinks might happen. If your language does not use the conditional form for things that definitely happened, you could use another form that refers to alternate situations. Alternate translation: “whenever … whenever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +5:13 e4mp rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴτε -1 Here, the word **if** in both places introduces situations that Paul thinks have happened. He is not using **if** to introduce things he thinks might happen. If your language does not use the conditional form for things that definitely happened, you could use another form that refers to alternate situations. Alternate translation: “whenever … whenever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 5:13 cy57 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐξέστημεν & σωφρονοῦμεν 1 Here Paul uses two opposite phrases. These phrases could contrast: (1) fanatical or extreme behavior with moderate or sane behavior. Alternate translation: “we are fanatical … we are moderate” (2) ecstatic or visionary behavior with rational or normal behavior. Alternate translation: “we see visions … we have control of our minds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 5:13 b4ri rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Θεῷ & ὑμῖν 1 Here, the phrases **for God** and **for you** could indicate: (1) the people for whose benefit Paul is behaving in these ways. Alternate translation: “it is for God’s sake … it is for your sake” (2) the people to whom he directs his behavior. Alternate translation: “it is in our relationship with God … it is in our relationship with you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:14 a5w7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Paul acts in the ways that he does (see [5:13](../05/13.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “We do those things because” or “We act in those ways because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) From 9a349d9ed5c172c4ed979a10bf9630bcbff9ee0f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 16:51:34 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 60/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index fb5f4f95cb..c22b32d46c 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -602,7 +602,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:14 azi9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡ & ἀγάπη τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **love** that could be: (1) **love** that **Christ** has for Paul and those with him. Alternate translation: “the love Christ has for us” (2) **love** that Paul and those with him have for **Christ**. Alternate translation: “the love we have for Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 5:14 gjmd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ & ἀγάπη τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **love**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “love.” Make sure that your translation fits with the option you chose in the previous note about whose **love** this is. Alternate translation: “how Christ loves us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:14 l1y6 κρίναντας 1 Here, the phrase **having judged** could introduce: (1) what he and those with him think about how **the love of Christ controls** them. Alternate translation: “and we have judged” or “as we judge” (2) a reason why **the love of Christ controls** them. Alternate translation: “because we have judged” -5:14 ig7l rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τοῦτο, ὅτι 1 Here, the word **this** refers to what Paul is about to say, what he introduces with the word **that**. This form was powerful in his culture. If it would not be powerful in your culture, and if your readers might find both **this** and **that** confusing, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that” or “what follows:” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +5:14 ig7l rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τοῦτο, ὅτι 1 Here, the word **this** refers to what Paul is about to say, which he introduces with the word **that**. This form was powerful in his culture. If it would not be powerful in your culture, and if your readers might find both **this** and **that** confusing, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that” or “what follows:” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 5:14 nd9g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj εἷς 1 Paul is using the adjective **one** as a noun in order to refer to **Christ**, who is **one** person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase, and you could make explicit to whom **one** refers. Alternate translation: “one human” or “one human, Christ,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 5:14 crsa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑπὲρ 1 Here, the phrase **for the sake of** could indicate that Jesus **died**: (1) to benefit or help others. Alternate translation: “to save” or “for the benefit of” (2) instead of or in place of others. Alternate translation: “in place of” or “instead of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:14 trmb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πάντων & οἱ πάντες 1 Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun in order to refer to **all** people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “all humans … all humans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) From a8fe1ad00bb267255d17152f84c462a6b2b915e5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 16:54:20 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 62/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index c22b32d46c..bb1307c4ab 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -614,7 +614,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:15 s4yr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ ζῶντες 1 Here, the phrase **the ones living** could identify people who: (1) have spiritual life, that is, those who have received new life in Jesus. Alternate translation: “the ones having new life” (2) have physical life, that is, who have not died. Alternate translation: “those who are alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:15 bc7p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μηκέτι ἑαυτοῖς ζῶσιν, ἀλλὰ τῷ 1 Here, to **live for** a person refers to acting in a way that pleases or fulfills that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “should live no longer to please themselves, but to please the one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:15 g9k4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ τῷ 1 This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “but they should live for the one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -5:15 ri6f rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τῷ 1 Here, the word **one** refers to the same person that **he** refers to at the beginning of the verse: Jesus the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom **one** refers. Alternate translation: “for the Messiah, the ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +5:15 ri6f rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τῷ 1 Here, the word **one** refers to the same person to whom **he** refers at the beginning of the verse, Jesus the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom **one** refers. Alternate translation: “for the Messiah, the ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 5:15 h52q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐγερθέντι 1 Paul uses the word **raised** to refer to someone who had previously died coming back to life. If your language does not use this word to describe coming back to life, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “having been restored to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 5:15 aovc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive αὐτῶν & καὶ ἐγερθέντι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “them, the one whom God raised” or “them, whom God raised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 5:16 ic21 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an inference conclusion from what Paul has said, especially referring back to [5:14–15](../05/14.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference from previous claims. Alternate translation: “So then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) From a19299124325fcf9fbd2265ffd0fac865e34f2a8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 16:58:03 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 63/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index bb1307c4ab..fd9ac11526 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -615,7 +615,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:15 bc7p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μηκέτι ἑαυτοῖς ζῶσιν, ἀλλὰ τῷ 1 Here, to **live for** a person refers to acting in a way that pleases or fulfills that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “should live no longer to please themselves, but to please the one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:15 g9k4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ τῷ 1 This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “but they should live for the one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 5:15 ri6f rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τῷ 1 Here, the word **one** refers to the same person to whom **he** refers at the beginning of the verse, Jesus the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom **one** refers. Alternate translation: “for the Messiah, the ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -5:15 h52q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐγερθέντι 1 Paul uses the word **raised** to refer to someone who had previously died coming back to life. If your language does not use this word to describe coming back to life, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “having been restored to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +5:15 h52q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐγερθέντι 1 Paul uses the word **raised** to refer to someone coming back to life after they died. If your language does not use this word to describe coming back to life, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “having been restored to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 5:15 aovc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive αὐτῶν & καὶ ἐγερθέντι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “them, the one whom God raised” or “them, whom God raised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 5:16 ic21 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an inference conclusion from what Paul has said, especially referring back to [5:14–15](../05/14.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference from previous claims. Alternate translation: “So then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 5:16 f2ww rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπὸ τοῦ νῦν & νῦν 1 Here, the word **now** could refer to: (1) the time when **we** believed. Alternate translation: “starting when we believed, … since then” (2) the time in which Paul was writing this letter. Alternate translation: “from the present moment on … right now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 7866758837cb62928a431ec416e1765fcb19cfaa Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 17:00:07 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 64/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index fd9ac11526..90ccb9d5d5 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -621,7 +621,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:16 f2ww rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπὸ τοῦ νῦν & νῦν 1 Here, the word **now** could refer to: (1) the time when **we** believed. Alternate translation: “starting when we believed, … since then” (2) the time in which Paul was writing this letter. Alternate translation: “from the present moment on … right now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:16 t1cc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατὰ σάρκα -1 Here Paul uses the phrase **according to the flesh** to refer to human ways of thinking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a phrase that refers to human values or perspectives. Alternate translation: “according to human definitions … according to human definitions” or “according to what humans value … according to what humans value” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 5:16 y8mk rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ καὶ -1 Paul is speaking as **if** it were a possibility that **we regarded Christ according to the flesh** in the past, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word or phrase such as “although” or “despite the fact that.” Alternate translation: “Even though” or “Despite the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) -5:17 yx28 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, the word **Therefore** could introduce an inference from: (1) [5:16](../05/16.md). In this case, Paul is saying that “regarding” Christ in a new ways indicates that a person is also a **new creation**. Alternate translation: “Regarding Christ in this new way shows that” (2) [5:14–15](../05/14.md). In this case, Paul is saying that how Christ died for people causes them to be a **new creation**. Alternate translation: “Because Christ died for people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +5:17 yx28 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, the word **Therefore** could introduce an inference from: (1) [5:16](../05/16.md). In this case, Paul is saying that “regarding” Christ in a new way indicates that a person is also a **new creation**. Alternate translation: “Regarding Christ in this new way shows that” (2) [5:14–15](../05/14.md). In this case, Paul is saying that how Christ died for people causes them to be a **new creation**. Alternate translation: “Because Christ died for people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 5:17 khzj rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἴ 1 Here Paul uses the conditional form to show that being **in Christ** leads to being **a new creation**. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause-and-effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **if** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “as long as” or “supposing that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) 5:17 wark rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ 1 Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with **Christ**. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, indicates that a person believes in Christ and is a Christian. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that the person is a Christian, someone who is united to Christ. Alternate translation: “is a Christian” or “is united to Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 5:17 af1b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations καινὴ κτίσις 1 Although the word **he** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any person, either man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that applies to both men and women or you could refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “that person is a new creation” or “he or she is a new creation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) From 513eacbd062c1dfc794b11ddac0055ba0588a70d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 17:03:18 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 65/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 90ccb9d5d5..e7c64726f1 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -625,7 +625,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:17 khzj rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἴ 1 Here Paul uses the conditional form to show that being **in Christ** leads to being **a new creation**. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause-and-effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **if** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “as long as” or “supposing that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) 5:17 wark rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ 1 Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with **Christ**. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, indicates that a person believes in Christ and is a Christian. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that the person is a Christian, someone who is united to Christ. Alternate translation: “is a Christian” or “is united to Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 5:17 af1b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations καινὴ κτίσις 1 Although the word **he** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any person, either man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that applies to both men and women or you could refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “that person is a new creation” or “he or she is a new creation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -5:17 tl3h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καινὴ κτίσις 1 Here Paul does not directly what state what is **a new creation**. He could be implying that: (1) the person **in Christ** is a **new creation**. Alternate translation: “that person is a new creation” (2) the world is a **new creation**, and the person can experience that when he or she is **in Christ**. Alternate translation: “there is a new creation” or “that person experiences the new creation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +5:17 tl3h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καινὴ κτίσις 1 Here Paul does not directly state what is **a new creation**. He could be implying that: (1) the person **in Christ** is a **new creation**. Alternate translation: “that person is a new creation” (2) the world is a **new creation**, and the person can experience that when he or she is **in Christ**. Alternate translation: “there is a new creation” or “that person experiences the new creation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 5:17 rt67 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καινὴ κτίσις 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **creation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “create.” Paul could be focusing on: (1) what is created. Alternate translation: “he is something that God has newly created” (2) the act of creating. Alternate translation: “God has newly created him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:17 ue8f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰ ἀρχαῖα & καινά 1 Here, the phrases **old things** and **new things** could refer to: (1) things that characterize a person and their life. Alternate translation: “The things of the old life … things of the new life” (2) the world and how a person experiences it. Alternate translation: “The things of the old world … things of the new world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:17 vpe3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations ἰδοὺ 1 Here, the word **behold** draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **behold** with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen. Alternate translation: “listen up” or “hear me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) From c1bde4add048b0f5b89618471c6118f4a3a6abf8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 17:08:21 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 66/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index e7c64726f1..25d5a71557 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -628,7 +628,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:17 tl3h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καινὴ κτίσις 1 Here Paul does not directly state what is **a new creation**. He could be implying that: (1) the person **in Christ** is a **new creation**. Alternate translation: “that person is a new creation” (2) the world is a **new creation**, and the person can experience that when he or she is **in Christ**. Alternate translation: “there is a new creation” or “that person experiences the new creation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 5:17 rt67 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καινὴ κτίσις 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **creation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “create.” Paul could be focusing on: (1) what is created. Alternate translation: “he is something that God has newly created” (2) the act of creating. Alternate translation: “God has newly created him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:17 ue8f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰ ἀρχαῖα & καινά 1 Here, the phrases **old things** and **new things** could refer to: (1) things that characterize a person and their life. Alternate translation: “The things of the old life … things of the new life” (2) the world and how a person experiences it. Alternate translation: “The things of the old world … things of the new world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -5:17 vpe3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations ἰδοὺ 1 Here, the word **behold** draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **behold** with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen. Alternate translation: “listen up” or “hear me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) +5:17 vpe3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations ἰδοὺ 1 Here, the word **behold** draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **behold** with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen. Alternate translation: “listen” or “hear me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) 5:17 d7i9 γέγονεν καινά 1 Here, the phrase **new things** could be: (1) the subject of **have come**. Alternate translation: “new things have happened” (2) the object of **have come**, and the subject is the person who is **in Christ**. Alternate translation: “he has become new” 5:17 izkz rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants γέγονεν καινά 1 Some early manuscripts include the word “all” in this clause, so that it reads, “all things have become new.” Consider whether translations that your readers might be familiar with include “all.” Otherwise, it is recommended that you follow the ULT here, since the best manuscripts do not include “all.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 5:18 whyb rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) From 0407b90b05012660a39493425483067a34dd5ad6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 17:10:02 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 67/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 25d5a71557..aff5f9b749 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -631,7 +631,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:17 vpe3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations ἰδοὺ 1 Here, the word **behold** draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **behold** with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen. Alternate translation: “listen” or “hear me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) 5:17 d7i9 γέγονεν καινά 1 Here, the phrase **new things** could be: (1) the subject of **have come**. Alternate translation: “new things have happened” (2) the object of **have come**, and the subject is the person who is **in Christ**. Alternate translation: “he has become new” 5:17 izkz rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants γέγονεν καινά 1 Some early manuscripts include the word “all” in this clause, so that it reads, “all things have become new.” Consider whether translations that your readers might be familiar with include “all.” Otherwise, it is recommended that you follow the ULT here, since the best manuscripts do not include “all.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -5:18 whyb rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +5:18 whyb rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 5:18 jyf7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰ & πάντα 1 Here, the phrase **all these things** could refer to: (1) the “new creation” and “new things” that Paul mentioned in [5:17](../05/17.md). Alternate translation: “all these new things” (2) everything that exists. Alternate translation: “all things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:18 s1q2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish τοῦ καταλλάξαντος 1 Here Paul adding more information about **God**. He is not distinguishing between different gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly adds information instead of distinguishing between people. Alternate translation: “and he has reconciled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 5:18 u66s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὴν διακονίαν τῆς καταλλαγῆς 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify a **ministry** whose goal or aim is **reconciliation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that accomplishes this reconciliation” or “the ministry that leads to this reconciliation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) From 91baa9e908d1b29cb16e29dd044449d98196c7bb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 17:11:41 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 68/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index aff5f9b749..971f21436e 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -631,9 +631,9 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:17 vpe3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations ἰδοὺ 1 Here, the word **behold** draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **behold** with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen. Alternate translation: “listen” or “hear me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) 5:17 d7i9 γέγονεν καινά 1 Here, the phrase **new things** could be: (1) the subject of **have come**. Alternate translation: “new things have happened” (2) the object of **have come**, and the subject is the person who is **in Christ**. Alternate translation: “he has become new” 5:17 izkz rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants γέγονεν καινά 1 Some early manuscripts include the word “all” in this clause, so that it reads, “all things have become new.” Consider whether translations that your readers might be familiar with include “all.” Otherwise, it is recommended that you follow the ULT here, since the best manuscripts do not include “all.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -5:18 whyb rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +5:18 whyb rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces the development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 5:18 jyf7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰ & πάντα 1 Here, the phrase **all these things** could refer to: (1) the “new creation” and “new things” that Paul mentioned in [5:17](../05/17.md). Alternate translation: “all these new things” (2) everything that exists. Alternate translation: “all things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -5:18 s1q2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish τοῦ καταλλάξαντος 1 Here Paul adding more information about **God**. He is not distinguishing between different gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly adds information instead of distinguishing between people. Alternate translation: “and he has reconciled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) +5:18 s1q2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish τοῦ καταλλάξαντος 1 Here Paul is adding more information about **God**. He is not distinguishing between different gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly adds information instead of distinguishing between people. Alternate translation: “and he has reconciled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 5:18 u66s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὴν διακονίαν τῆς καταλλαγῆς 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify a **ministry** whose goal or aim is **reconciliation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that accomplishes this reconciliation” or “the ministry that leads to this reconciliation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 5:18 lj2h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δόντος ἡμῖν τὴν διακονίαν τῆς καταλλαγῆς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **reconciliation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “reconcile.” Alternate translation: “having commissioned us to minister so that God reconciles people to himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:19 o5j8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ὡς ὅτι 1 Here, the phrase **namely, that** introduces more information about the “ministry of this reconciliation” that Paul mentioned in [5:18](../05/18.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces more information or further explanation. Alternate translation: “that is, that” or “and by this I mean that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) From f4ce5dbcb574192a275b4e7a182a5b0e0043f625 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 17:35:46 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 69/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 971f21436e..58d3898407 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -635,7 +635,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:18 jyf7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰ & πάντα 1 Here, the phrase **all these things** could refer to: (1) the “new creation” and “new things” that Paul mentioned in [5:17](../05/17.md). Alternate translation: “all these new things” (2) everything that exists. Alternate translation: “all things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:18 s1q2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish τοῦ καταλλάξαντος 1 Here Paul is adding more information about **God**. He is not distinguishing between different gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly adds information instead of distinguishing between people. Alternate translation: “and he has reconciled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 5:18 u66s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὴν διακονίαν τῆς καταλλαγῆς 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify a **ministry** whose goal or aim is **reconciliation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that accomplishes this reconciliation” or “the ministry that leads to this reconciliation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -5:18 lj2h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δόντος ἡμῖν τὴν διακονίαν τῆς καταλλαγῆς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **reconciliation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “reconcile.” Alternate translation: “having commissioned us to minister so that God reconciles people to himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +5:18 lj2h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δόντος ἡμῖν τὴν διακονίαν τῆς καταλλαγῆς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **reconciliation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “reconcile.” Alternate translation: “having commissioned us to minister, so that God reconciles people to himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:19 o5j8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ὡς ὅτι 1 Here, the phrase **namely, that** introduces more information about the “ministry of this reconciliation” that Paul mentioned in [5:18](../05/18.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces more information or further explanation. Alternate translation: “that is, that” or “and by this I mean that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 5:19 payo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure Θεὸς ἦν ἐν Χριστῷ & καταλλάσσων 1 Here, **in Christ** could modify: (1) **reconciling**, so that God **was reconciling** by means of or through **Christ**. In this case, Paul is saying something about how **God** accomplishes the reconciliation. Alternate translation: “in Christ God was reconciling” (2) **was**, so that God was **in Christ**, and he was **reconciling** while he was acting **in Christ**. In this case, Paul is saying something about the relationship between **Christ** and **God**, namely that **Christ** is **God**. Alternate translation: “God was in Christ, reconciling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 5:19 sfrj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor Θεὸς & ἐν Χριστῷ 1 Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with **Christ**. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains the means by which God accomplishes the “reconciliation.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that God “reconciles” people by uniting them to Christ. Alternate translation: “God, by uniting people to Christ,” or “God by means of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From fdb0daa8578a884c43e00f6aefb2e2810e4e129d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 17:46:30 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 70/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 58d3898407..d9c52c016e 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -642,14 +642,14 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:19 w1d1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy κόσμον 1 Here, the word **world** could refer to: (1) the people in the **world**. Alternate translation: “all people” (2) the **world** as a whole, including people, places, and things. Alternate translation: “everything he created” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 5:19 joj6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure μὴ λογιζόμενος αὐτοῖς τὰ παραπτώματα αὐτῶν, καὶ θέμενος ἐν ἡμῖν τὸν λόγον τῆς καταλλαγῆς 1 Here Paul may have intended that: (1) **not counting** and **having placed** both introduce ways that God **was reconciling**. Alternate translation: “and he did that by not counting their trespasses against them and by placing in us the word of reconciliation” (2) **not counting** further defines **reconciling**, and **having placed** introduces an action parallel to **reconciling**. Alternate translation: “that is, not counting their trespasses against them, and he was placing in us the word or reconciliation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 5:19 mckq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μὴ λογιζόμενος αὐτοῖς τὰ παραπτώματα αὐτῶν 1 Here Paul speaks as if God could keep a “count” of people’s **trespasses**, which means that he would keep track of everything that a person did wrong in order to condemn them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to keeping track of or condemning people for what they have done wrong. Alternate translation: “not keeping track of their trespasses” or “not using their trespasses to condemn them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -5:19 a1io rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς τὰ παραπτώματα αὐτῶν 1 Here, the words **their** and **them** refers to the people who live in **the world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom these pronouns refer. Alternate translation: “the trespasses of the people in the world … them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +5:19 a1io rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς τὰ παραπτώματα αὐτῶν 1 Here, the words **their** and **them** refer to the people who live in **the world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom these pronouns refer. Alternate translation: “the trespasses of the people in the world … them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 5:19 b62q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor θέμενος ἐν ἡμῖν 1 Here Paul speaks as if **the word of reconciliation** were an object that God would “place in” Paul and those with him. He means that God has called or commissioned them to proclaim this **word of reconciliation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having given to us” or “having called us to proclaim” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 5:19 om5s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Here, the word **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message” or “the news” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 5:19 ix97 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸν λόγον τῆς καταλλαγῆς 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **word** about **reconciliation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the word about reconciliation” or “the word concerning reconciliation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 5:19 zuoe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς καταλλαγῆς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **reconciliation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “reconcile.” Alternate translation: “about how God reconciles the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:20 wg8f rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an inference from what Paul said in the previous verse about how God “placed in us the word of reconciliation” (see [5:19](../05/19.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “So then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 5:20 q9u9 ὑπὲρ Χριστοῦ -1 Here, the phrase **on behalf of** could indicate that: (1) Paul and those with him represent **Christ**. Alternate translation: “who act for Christ … as those who act for Christ” (2) Paul and those with him act for the benefit of **Christ**. Alternate translation: “for the sake of Christ … for the sake of Christ” -5:20 uqy7 ὡς 1 Here, the phrase **as though** introduces the implication or meaning of being **ambassadors on behalf of Christ**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an implication or explanation. Alternate translation: “and so” or “which means that” +5:20 uqy7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς 1 Here, the phrase **as though** introduces the implication or meaning of being **ambassadors on behalf of Christ**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an implication or explanation. Alternate translation: “and so” or “which means that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:20 lr70 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure παρακαλοῦντος δι’ ἡμῶν; δεόμεθα ὑπὲρ Χριστοῦ, καταλλάγητε τῷ Θεῷ 1 Here, the clause **We implore {you} on behalf of Christ** could be: (1) the introduction to what Paul and those with him say as God **is appealing** through them. Alternate translation: “is appealing through us as we implore you on behalf of Christ, ‘Be reconciled to God!’” (2) part of what **God is appealing through us**. Alternate translation: “is appealing through us when we say, ‘We implore you on behalf Christ: be reconciled to God!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 5:20 me5z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit παρακαλοῦντος 1 Here Paul does not state to whom **God is appealing**. He could imply that he **is appealing** to: (1) everyone. Alternate translation: “is appealing to all people” (2) the Corinthians specifically. Alternate translation: “is appealing to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:20 eoef rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δεόμεθα 1 Here what Paul says could be addressed to: (1) the Corinthians specifically. Alternate translation: “We implore you Corinthians on behalf of Christ” (2) every person with whom Paul and those with him speak. Alternate translation: “We implore everyone we meet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From a6543ece275e11e0b33d3bd9e88a4bf17eda724c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 17:53:35 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 71/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index d9c52c016e..d647f6747d 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -657,7 +657,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:20 a6fx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καταλλάγητε τῷ Θεῷ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) the Corinthians do it to themselves. Alternate translation: “Reconcile yourselves with God” (2) God does it. Alternate translation: “Let God reconcile you to himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 5:21 jp2a rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τὸν μὴ γνόντα ἁμαρτίαν & ἐποίησεν & ἐν αὐτῷ 1 Here, the words **one** and **him** refer to Jesus the Messiah. The word **he** refers to God the Father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom these pronouns refer. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who did not know sin, God made … in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 5:21 qim8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν μὴ γνόντα ἁμαρτίαν 1 Here, the phrase **having known sin** refers to committing or doing **sin**. It does not refer just to knowing about **sin**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to committing **sin**. Alternate translation: “The one not having done sin” or “The one not having sinned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -5:21 oxvb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἁμαρτίαν ἐποίησεν 1 Here Paul speaks as if God **made** Jesus **sin**. He could mean that God: (1) treated Jesus like he was a sinner. Alternate translation: “he regarded as a sinner” (2) identified Jesus with sinners and sin. Alternate translation: “he made like a sinner” (3) caused Jesus to be a sin offering. Alternate translation: “he made a sin offering” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +5:21 oxvb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἁμαρτίαν ἐποίησεν 1 Here Paul speaks as if God **made** Jesus **sin**. He could mean that God: (1) treated Jesus as though he were a sinner. Alternate translation: “he regarded as a sinner” (2) identified Jesus with sinners and sin. Alternate translation: “he made like a sinner” (3) caused Jesus to be a sin offering. Alternate translation: “he made to be a sin offering” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 5:21 dmjk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **for us** could indicate that God made Jesus **sin**: (1) to benefit or help **us**. Alternate translation: “for our sake” or “for our benefit” (2) instead of or in place of **us**. Alternate translation: “in place of us” or “instead of us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:21 pix7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡμεῖς γενώμεθα δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul speaks as if people could become **the righteousness of God**. He could mean that **we**: (1) share the **righteousness** that God gives to those who believe. Alternate translation: “we might share in the righteousness of God” (2) are declared “righteous” by God. Alternate translation: “we might be declared to have the righteousness of God” (3) become those who live “righteously.” Alternate translation: “we might act according to the righteousness of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 5:21 kmt9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **righteousness** that could: (1) come from **God**. Alternate translation: “righteousness from God” (2) belong to **God**. Alternate translation: “God’s own righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) From 30b66c935792a867cb6b039dff9c2b861abec5d2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 19:59:28 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 72/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index d647f6747d..308a59d5d9 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -663,8 +663,8 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:21 kmt9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **righteousness** that could: (1) come from **God**. Alternate translation: “righteousness from God” (2) belong to **God**. Alternate translation: “God’s own righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 5:21 ebz2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡμεῖς γενώμεθα δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “righteous.” Make sure your translation fits with how you understand what **righteousness of God** means. Alternate translation: “God might make us righteous” or “we might be righteous because of what God does” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:21 cypg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν αὐτῷ 1 Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in him** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in him**, or united to Christ, explains how people **become the righteousness of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that being united to Christ is the means by which people receive the **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “by being united to him” or “as God unites us to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -6:intro f5qu 0 # 2 Corinthians 6 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * The gospel (5:11–6:2)\n * Proofs of ministry (6:3–10)\n * Join with fellow believers, not unbelievers (6:11–7:4)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the quotations from the Old Testament in [6:2](../06/02.md) and [6:16–18](../06/16.md).\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Commendation of ministry\n\nIn [6:3–4](../06/03.md), Paul tells the Corinthians that he avoids doing anything that would cause offense and lead to people blaming ministry. In fact, he and those with him “commend themselves” in many ways, and he provides a list of those ways in [6:4–10](../06/04.md). Paul commends their ministry in this way because other people in Corinth were claiming that Paul was not a good apostle or minister for Christ. They claimed that they were better ministers for Christ. Paul responds here by listing what he and those with him do and experience as true ministers of Christ. Make sure that you express the list so that it shows that Paul and those with him are true ministers of Christ. \n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### “Weapons of righteousness”\n\nIn [6:7](../06/07.md), Paul states that he and with him “weapons of righteousness” for both hands. He could mean that “righteousness”: (1) is the “weapons” (2) is defended by the “weapons” (3) characterizes the “weapons.” Also the idea that the “weapons” are for both hands could indicate that: (1) Paul and those with him have an offensive weapon in one hand and a defensive weapon in the other hand (2) Paul and those with him can defend against enemies coming from any direction. Paul does not state whom he is fighting against with these “weapons,” but it is probably sin, evil powers, and people who oppose his ministry. See the notes on this verse for translation options. \n\n### “Opening” the heart\n\nIn [6:11–13](../06/11.md), Paul speaks about “opening” the heart and, in contrast, being “restricted.” He is speaking about loving other people as if it were an “open” heart and failing to love other people as it were a “restriction” in one’s insides. If your culture can express the idea of love by referring to where in their bodies people feel love, you could do so in these verses. Otherwise, you could use a comparable metaphor or plain language. See the notes on these verses for translation options. \n\n### The temple of the living God\n\nIn [6:16](../06/16.md), Paul claims that believers are “the temple of the living God.” In the last part of the verse, he quotes from the Old Testament to prove that this is true. This quotation also shows that the identification of God’s people with the temple indicates that God is with his people and treats them as his people. Since the temple is a very important part of Paul’s culture, you should preserve the temple language. If your readers would not understand the metaphor, you could express it as a simile or explain it in a footnote. See the notes on this verse for translation options. \n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [6:14–16](../06/14.md), Paul asks five questions, and each question assumes that the answer is “none” or “nothing.” Paul asks these questions to include the Corinthians in what he is arguing, not because he is looking for information. If your language does not use questions in this way, you could include answers to the questions, or you could express them as negative statements. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### The long list in [6:4–10](../06/04.md)\n\nThese verses contain one long list of the situations and ways in which Paul and those with him commend their ministry. This list is divided into three parts. Each part uses a repeated form for each item. The first part uses the word “in” ([6:4–7a](../06/04.md)), the second part uses the word “through” ([6:7b–8a](../06/07.md)), and the third part uses the words “as” and “yet” or “but” ([6:8b–10](../06/08.md)). If possible, represent these parts in your language by using repeated words or some other natural form. Consider whether a long list like this would be natural in your language. The UST models one possible way to divide the list up into shorter sentences. \n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. When he uses this form, he is focusing on himself and those with him, or just on himself (although this is less likely). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -6:1 kf1d rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verses, especially from [5:20–21](../05/20.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +6:intro f5qu 0 # 2 Corinthians 6 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * The gospel (5:11–6:2)\n * Proofs of ministry (6:3–10)\n * Join with fellow believers, not unbelievers (6:11–7:4)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the quotations from the Old Testament in [6:2](../06/02.md) and [6:16–18](../06/16.md).\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Commendation of ministry\n\nIn [6:3–4](../06/03.md), Paul tells the Corinthians that he avoids doing anything that would cause offense and lead to people blaming ministry. In fact, he and those with him “commend themselves” in many ways, and he provides a list of those ways in [6:4–10](../06/04.md). Paul commends their ministry in this way because other people in Corinth were claiming that Paul was not a good apostle or minister for Christ. They claimed that they were better ministers for Christ. Paul responds here by listing what he and those with him do and experience as true ministers of Christ. Make sure that you express the list so that it shows that Paul and those with him are true ministers of Christ. \n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### “Weapons of righteousness”\n\nIn [6:7](../06/07.md), Paul states that he and with him “weapons of righteousness” for both hands. He could mean that “righteousness”: (1) is the “weapons” (2) is defended by the “weapons” (3) characterizes the “weapons.” Also the idea that the “weapons” are for both hands could indicate that: (1) Paul and those with him have an offensive weapon in one hand and a defensive weapon in the other hand (2) Paul and those with him can defend against enemies coming from any direction. Paul does not state whom he is fighting against with these “weapons,” but it is probably sin, evil powers, and people who oppose his ministry. See the notes on this verse for translation options. \n\n### “Opening” the heart\n\nIn [6:11–13](../06/11.md), Paul speaks about opening the heart and, in contrast, being restricted. He is speaking about loving other people as if it were an open heart and failing to love other people as it were a restriction in one’s insides. If your culture can express the idea of love by referring to where in their bodies people feel love, you could do so in these verses. Otherwise, you could use a comparable metaphor or plain language. See the notes on these verses for translation options. \n\n### The temple of the living God\n\nIn [6:16](../06/16.md), Paul claims that believers are the temple of the living God. In the last part of the verse, he quotes from the Old Testament to prove that this is true. This quotation also shows that the identification of God’s people with the temple indicates that God is with his people and treats them as his people. Since the temple is a very important part of Paul’s culture, you should preserve the temple language. If your readers would not understand the metaphor, you could express it as a simile or explain it in a footnote. See the notes on this verse for translation options. \n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [6:14–16](../06/14.md), Paul asks five questions, and each question assumes that the answer is “none” or “nothing.” Paul asks these questions to include the Corinthians in what he is arguing, not because he is looking for information. If your language does not use questions in this way, you could include answers to the questions, or you could express them as negative statements. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### The long list in [6:4–10](../06/04.md)\n\nThese verses contain one long list of the situations and ways in which Paul and those with him commend their ministry. This list is divided into three parts. Each part uses a repeated form for each item. The first part uses the word “in” ([6:4–7a](../06/04.md)), the second part uses the word “through” ([6:7b–8a](../06/07.md)), and the third part uses the words “as” and “yet” or “but” ([6:8b–10](../06/08.md)). If possible, represent these parts in your language by using repeated words or some other natural form. Consider whether a long list like this would be natural in your language. The UST models one possible way to divide the list up into shorter sentences. \n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. When he uses this form, he is focusing on himself and those with him, or just on himself (although this is less likely). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +6:1 kf1d rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces his development of the ideas from the previous verses, especially from [5:20–21](../05/20.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 6:1 tbr6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit συνεργοῦντες 1 Here Paul does not directly state **with** whom he is **working**. He could be implying that he works **with**: (1) God, since God is the subject of the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “working together with God” (2) the Corinthians, since they are the ones ho is “urging.” Alternate translation: “working together with you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:1 x4hc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive καὶ, παρακαλοῦμεν 1 Here and throughout this chapter, **we** does not include the Corinthians. The first person plural could refer to: (1) Paul and those who work with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach the good news also urge” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I also urge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 6:1 s8db rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives καὶ, παρακαλοῦμεν μὴ εἰς κενὸν τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ δέξασθαι ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul uses two negative terms, **not** and **in vain**, to indicate a positive meaning. If your language does not use two negative words like this, you could instead use one positive term. Alternate translation: “we also urge you to receive the grace of God so that it has results” or “we also urge you to receive the grace of God so that it produces its goal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) From 4e0a786c0876445e5a93c1d2f31274bed0e00428 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 20:00:07 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 73/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 308a59d5d9..a8ef0f0bb8 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -665,7 +665,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:21 cypg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν αὐτῷ 1 Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in him** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in him**, or united to Christ, explains how people **become the righteousness of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that being united to Christ is the means by which people receive the **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “by being united to him” or “as God unites us to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:intro f5qu 0 # 2 Corinthians 6 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * The gospel (5:11–6:2)\n * Proofs of ministry (6:3–10)\n * Join with fellow believers, not unbelievers (6:11–7:4)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the quotations from the Old Testament in [6:2](../06/02.md) and [6:16–18](../06/16.md).\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Commendation of ministry\n\nIn [6:3–4](../06/03.md), Paul tells the Corinthians that he avoids doing anything that would cause offense and lead to people blaming ministry. In fact, he and those with him “commend themselves” in many ways, and he provides a list of those ways in [6:4–10](../06/04.md). Paul commends their ministry in this way because other people in Corinth were claiming that Paul was not a good apostle or minister for Christ. They claimed that they were better ministers for Christ. Paul responds here by listing what he and those with him do and experience as true ministers of Christ. Make sure that you express the list so that it shows that Paul and those with him are true ministers of Christ. \n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### “Weapons of righteousness”\n\nIn [6:7](../06/07.md), Paul states that he and with him “weapons of righteousness” for both hands. He could mean that “righteousness”: (1) is the “weapons” (2) is defended by the “weapons” (3) characterizes the “weapons.” Also the idea that the “weapons” are for both hands could indicate that: (1) Paul and those with him have an offensive weapon in one hand and a defensive weapon in the other hand (2) Paul and those with him can defend against enemies coming from any direction. Paul does not state whom he is fighting against with these “weapons,” but it is probably sin, evil powers, and people who oppose his ministry. See the notes on this verse for translation options. \n\n### “Opening” the heart\n\nIn [6:11–13](../06/11.md), Paul speaks about opening the heart and, in contrast, being restricted. He is speaking about loving other people as if it were an open heart and failing to love other people as it were a restriction in one’s insides. If your culture can express the idea of love by referring to where in their bodies people feel love, you could do so in these verses. Otherwise, you could use a comparable metaphor or plain language. See the notes on these verses for translation options. \n\n### The temple of the living God\n\nIn [6:16](../06/16.md), Paul claims that believers are the temple of the living God. In the last part of the verse, he quotes from the Old Testament to prove that this is true. This quotation also shows that the identification of God’s people with the temple indicates that God is with his people and treats them as his people. Since the temple is a very important part of Paul’s culture, you should preserve the temple language. If your readers would not understand the metaphor, you could express it as a simile or explain it in a footnote. See the notes on this verse for translation options. \n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [6:14–16](../06/14.md), Paul asks five questions, and each question assumes that the answer is “none” or “nothing.” Paul asks these questions to include the Corinthians in what he is arguing, not because he is looking for information. If your language does not use questions in this way, you could include answers to the questions, or you could express them as negative statements. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### The long list in [6:4–10](../06/04.md)\n\nThese verses contain one long list of the situations and ways in which Paul and those with him commend their ministry. This list is divided into three parts. Each part uses a repeated form for each item. The first part uses the word “in” ([6:4–7a](../06/04.md)), the second part uses the word “through” ([6:7b–8a](../06/07.md)), and the third part uses the words “as” and “yet” or “but” ([6:8b–10](../06/08.md)). If possible, represent these parts in your language by using repeated words or some other natural form. Consider whether a long list like this would be natural in your language. The UST models one possible way to divide the list up into shorter sentences. \n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. When he uses this form, he is focusing on himself and those with him, or just on himself (although this is less likely). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 6:1 kf1d rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces his development of the ideas from the previous verses, especially from [5:20–21](../05/20.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -6:1 tbr6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit συνεργοῦντες 1 Here Paul does not directly state **with** whom he is **working**. He could be implying that he works **with**: (1) God, since God is the subject of the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “working together with God” (2) the Corinthians, since they are the ones ho is “urging.” Alternate translation: “working together with you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +6:1 tbr6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit συνεργοῦντες 1 Here Paul does not directly state **with** whom he is **working**. He could be implying that he works **with**: (1) God, since God is the subject of the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “working together with God” (2) the Corinthians, since they are the ones whom is “urging.” Alternate translation: “working together with you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:1 x4hc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive καὶ, παρακαλοῦμεν 1 Here and throughout this chapter, **we** does not include the Corinthians. The first person plural could refer to: (1) Paul and those who work with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach the good news also urge” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I also urge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 6:1 s8db rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives καὶ, παρακαλοῦμεν μὴ εἰς κενὸν τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ δέξασθαι ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul uses two negative terms, **not** and **in vain**, to indicate a positive meaning. If your language does not use two negative words like this, you could instead use one positive term. Alternate translation: “we also urge you to receive the grace of God so that it has results” or “we also urge you to receive the grace of God so that it produces its goal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) 6:1 wdla rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **gracious**, you could express the idea by using a verbal phrase such as “act kindly” or an adverb such as “graciously.” Alternate translation: “how God acts kindly” or “how God acts graciously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From 2d34592f8c46658fd53706f0270b91a41a4d56d3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 20:12:33 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 74/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index a8ef0f0bb8..f130738570 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -667,7 +667,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 6:1 kf1d rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces his development of the ideas from the previous verses, especially from [5:20–21](../05/20.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 6:1 tbr6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit συνεργοῦντες 1 Here Paul does not directly state **with** whom he is **working**. He could be implying that he works **with**: (1) God, since God is the subject of the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “working together with God” (2) the Corinthians, since they are the ones whom is “urging.” Alternate translation: “working together with you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:1 x4hc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive καὶ, παρακαλοῦμεν 1 Here and throughout this chapter, **we** does not include the Corinthians. The first person plural could refer to: (1) Paul and those who work with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach the good news also urge” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I also urge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -6:1 s8db rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives καὶ, παρακαλοῦμεν μὴ εἰς κενὸν τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ δέξασθαι ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul uses two negative terms, **not** and **in vain**, to indicate a positive meaning. If your language does not use two negative words like this, you could instead use one positive term. Alternate translation: “we also urge you to receive the grace of God so that it has results” or “we also urge you to receive the grace of God so that it produces its goal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +6:1 s8db rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives καὶ, παρακαλοῦμεν μὴ εἰς κενὸν τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ δέξασθαι ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul uses two negative terms, **not** and **in vain**, to indicate a positive meaning. If your language does not use two negative words like this, you could instead use one positive term. Alternate translation: “we also urge you to receive the grace of God, so that it has results” or “we also urge you to receive the grace of God, so that it produces its goal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) 6:1 wdla rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **gracious**, you could express the idea by using a verbal phrase such as “act kindly” or an adverb such as “graciously.” Alternate translation: “how God acts kindly” or “how God acts graciously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 6:1 pdgo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἰς κενὸν 1 Here, **in vain** identifies a cause that does not have its intended effect. In this case, receiving **the grace of God** will not lead to salvation if the Corinthians do not persevere in living as those who have received **the grace of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you use a word or phrase that identifies a cause that does not have its intended effect. Alternate translation: “for nothing” or “to no purpose” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 6:2 ooms rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γάρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the Corinthians should “receive the grace of God” (see [6:1](../06/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces reason for an exhortation. Alternate translation: “because” or “since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) From 802e5d4e93a0992f546e4dccb60022a44d8ee977 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 20:15:53 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 75/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index f130738570..f56790ba64 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -670,7 +670,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 6:1 s8db rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives καὶ, παρακαλοῦμεν μὴ εἰς κενὸν τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ δέξασθαι ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul uses two negative terms, **not** and **in vain**, to indicate a positive meaning. If your language does not use two negative words like this, you could instead use one positive term. Alternate translation: “we also urge you to receive the grace of God, so that it has results” or “we also urge you to receive the grace of God, so that it produces its goal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) 6:1 wdla rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **gracious**, you could express the idea by using a verbal phrase such as “act kindly” or an adverb such as “graciously.” Alternate translation: “how God acts kindly” or “how God acts graciously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 6:1 pdgo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἰς κενὸν 1 Here, **in vain** identifies a cause that does not have its intended effect. In this case, receiving **the grace of God** will not lead to salvation if the Corinthians do not persevere in living as those who have received **the grace of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you use a word or phrase that identifies a cause that does not have its intended effect. Alternate translation: “for nothing” or “to no purpose” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -6:2 ooms rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γάρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the Corinthians should “receive the grace of God” (see [6:1](../06/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces reason for an exhortation. Alternate translation: “because” or “since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +6:2 ooms rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γάρ 1 Here, the word **for** introduces a reason why the Corinthians should “receive the grace of God” (see [6:1](../06/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces reason for an exhortation. Alternate translation: “because” or “since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 6:2 u9kc rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations λέγει 1 Here, the phrase **he says** introduces words that God speaks in the Scriptures. Specifically, Paul is quoting from a Greek translation of [Isaiah 49:8](../isa/49/08.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you use a form that indicates that God speaks these words that come from Isaiah. Alternate translation: “according to Isaiah the prophet God says,” or “God speaks these words through Isaiah:” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 6:2 pp3i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism καιρῷ δεκτῷ ἐπήκουσά σου, καὶ ἐν ἡμέρᾳ σωτηρίας ἐβοήθησά σοι. ἰδοὺ, νῦν καιρὸς εὐπρόσδεκτος; ἰδοὺ, νῦν ἡμέρα σωτηρίας 1 The two clauses in the quotation mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Make sure that you use the same form for Paul’s interpretation of the quotation, which is also in parallel form. Alternate translation: “At an acceptable time I listened to you; yes, in a day of salvation I helped you. Behold, now is a favorable time; yes, now is a day of salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 6:2 kilf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καιρῷ δεκτῷ 1 Here, the phrase **an acceptable time** refers to a point in time that someone considers to proper or appropriate for doing something. Paul could be implying that this **time** is **acceptable** to: (1) God. Alternate translation: “At a time that I considered right” or “At a time appropriate for me” (2) people. Alternate translation: “At a time that people considered right” or “At a time appropriate for people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From d121ad566304698fc79750980b48d15739f468d8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 20:19:21 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 76/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index f56790ba64..0df608d750 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -674,7 +674,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 6:2 u9kc rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations λέγει 1 Here, the phrase **he says** introduces words that God speaks in the Scriptures. Specifically, Paul is quoting from a Greek translation of [Isaiah 49:8](../isa/49/08.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you use a form that indicates that God speaks these words that come from Isaiah. Alternate translation: “according to Isaiah the prophet God says,” or “God speaks these words through Isaiah:” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 6:2 pp3i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism καιρῷ δεκτῷ ἐπήκουσά σου, καὶ ἐν ἡμέρᾳ σωτηρίας ἐβοήθησά σοι. ἰδοὺ, νῦν καιρὸς εὐπρόσδεκτος; ἰδοὺ, νῦν ἡμέρα σωτηρίας 1 The two clauses in the quotation mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Make sure that you use the same form for Paul’s interpretation of the quotation, which is also in parallel form. Alternate translation: “At an acceptable time I listened to you; yes, in a day of salvation I helped you. Behold, now is a favorable time; yes, now is a day of salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 6:2 kilf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καιρῷ δεκτῷ 1 Here, the phrase **an acceptable time** refers to a point in time that someone considers to proper or appropriate for doing something. Paul could be implying that this **time** is **acceptable** to: (1) God. Alternate translation: “At a time that I considered right” or “At a time appropriate for me” (2) people. Alternate translation: “At a time that people considered right” or “At a time appropriate for people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -6:2 iz3h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπήκουσά σου 1 Here, the word **listened** indicates that God both listened and responded. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that God did not just “listen” but also acted in response. Alternate translation: “I answered you” or “I listened to you and responded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +6:2 iz3h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπήκουσά σου 1 Here, the word **listened** indicates that God both listened and responded. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that God did not just listen but also acted in response. Alternate translation: “I answered you” or “I listened to you and responded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:2 be7i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular σου & σοι 1 Because God is speaking to one person, his special servant, **you** in the quotation is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) 6:2 z6w6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐν ἡμέρᾳ σωτηρίας 1 Here, the phrase **day of salvation** refers to the time when God will bring **salvation** for his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in the time of salvation” or “at the time when I gave salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 6:2 qrdt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns σωτηρίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “when I saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From 0ad8f6857ef715bc3fe4c3560ee7a12be0d00ff6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 20:50:32 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 77/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 0df608d750..f4f182ae83 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -663,7 +663,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:21 kmt9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **righteousness** that could: (1) come from **God**. Alternate translation: “righteousness from God” (2) belong to **God**. Alternate translation: “God’s own righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 5:21 ebz2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡμεῖς γενώμεθα δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “righteous.” Make sure your translation fits with how you understand what **righteousness of God** means. Alternate translation: “God might make us righteous” or “we might be righteous because of what God does” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:21 cypg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν αὐτῷ 1 Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in him** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in him**, or united to Christ, explains how people **become the righteousness of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that being united to Christ is the means by which people receive the **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “by being united to him” or “as God unites us to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -6:intro f5qu 0 # 2 Corinthians 6 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * The gospel (5:11–6:2)\n * Proofs of ministry (6:3–10)\n * Join with fellow believers, not unbelievers (6:11–7:4)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the quotations from the Old Testament in [6:2](../06/02.md) and [6:16–18](../06/16.md).\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Commendation of ministry\n\nIn [6:3–4](../06/03.md), Paul tells the Corinthians that he avoids doing anything that would cause offense and lead to people blaming ministry. In fact, he and those with him “commend themselves” in many ways, and he provides a list of those ways in [6:4–10](../06/04.md). Paul commends their ministry in this way because other people in Corinth were claiming that Paul was not a good apostle or minister for Christ. They claimed that they were better ministers for Christ. Paul responds here by listing what he and those with him do and experience as true ministers of Christ. Make sure that you express the list so that it shows that Paul and those with him are true ministers of Christ. \n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### “Weapons of righteousness”\n\nIn [6:7](../06/07.md), Paul states that he and with him “weapons of righteousness” for both hands. He could mean that “righteousness”: (1) is the “weapons” (2) is defended by the “weapons” (3) characterizes the “weapons.” Also the idea that the “weapons” are for both hands could indicate that: (1) Paul and those with him have an offensive weapon in one hand and a defensive weapon in the other hand (2) Paul and those with him can defend against enemies coming from any direction. Paul does not state whom he is fighting against with these “weapons,” but it is probably sin, evil powers, and people who oppose his ministry. See the notes on this verse for translation options. \n\n### “Opening” the heart\n\nIn [6:11–13](../06/11.md), Paul speaks about opening the heart and, in contrast, being restricted. He is speaking about loving other people as if it were an open heart and failing to love other people as it were a restriction in one’s insides. If your culture can express the idea of love by referring to where in their bodies people feel love, you could do so in these verses. Otherwise, you could use a comparable metaphor or plain language. See the notes on these verses for translation options. \n\n### The temple of the living God\n\nIn [6:16](../06/16.md), Paul claims that believers are the temple of the living God. In the last part of the verse, he quotes from the Old Testament to prove that this is true. This quotation also shows that the identification of God’s people with the temple indicates that God is with his people and treats them as his people. Since the temple is a very important part of Paul’s culture, you should preserve the temple language. If your readers would not understand the metaphor, you could express it as a simile or explain it in a footnote. See the notes on this verse for translation options. \n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [6:14–16](../06/14.md), Paul asks five questions, and each question assumes that the answer is “none” or “nothing.” Paul asks these questions to include the Corinthians in what he is arguing, not because he is looking for information. If your language does not use questions in this way, you could include answers to the questions, or you could express them as negative statements. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### The long list in [6:4–10](../06/04.md)\n\nThese verses contain one long list of the situations and ways in which Paul and those with him commend their ministry. This list is divided into three parts. Each part uses a repeated form for each item. The first part uses the word “in” ([6:4–7a](../06/04.md)), the second part uses the word “through” ([6:7b–8a](../06/07.md)), and the third part uses the words “as” and “yet” or “but” ([6:8b–10](../06/08.md)). If possible, represent these parts in your language by using repeated words or some other natural form. Consider whether a long list like this would be natural in your language. The UST models one possible way to divide the list up into shorter sentences. \n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. When he uses this form, he is focusing on himself and those with him, or just on himself (although this is less likely). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +6:intro f5qu 0 # 2 Corinthians 6 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * The gospel (5:11–6:2)\n * Proofs of ministry (6:3–10)\n * Join with fellow believers, not unbelievers (6:11–7:4)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the quotations from the Old Testament in [6:2](../06/02.md) and [6:16–18](../06/16.md).\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Commendation of ministry\n\nIn [6:3–4](../06/03.md), Paul tells the Corinthians that he avoids doing anything that would cause offense and lead to people blaming ministry. In fact, he and those with him “commend themselves” in many ways, and he provides a list of those ways in [6:4–10](../06/04.md). Paul commends their ministry in this way because other people in Corinth were claiming that Paul was not a good apostle or minister for Christ. They claimed that they were better ministers for Christ. Paul responds here by listing what he and those with him do and experience as true ministers of Christ. Make sure that you express the list so that it shows that Paul and those with him are true ministers of Christ. \n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### “Weapons of righteousness”\n\nIn [6:7](../06/07.md), Paul states that he and his fellow workers have “weapons of righteousness” for both hands. He could mean that “righteousness”: (1) is the “weapons” (2) is defended by the “weapons” (3) characterizes the “weapons.” Also the idea that the “weapons” are for both hands could indicate that: (1) Paul and those with him have an offensive weapon in one hand and a defensive weapon in the other hand (2) Paul and those with him can defend against enemies coming from any direction. Paul does not state whom he is fighting against with these “weapons,” but it is probably sin, evil powers, and people who oppose his ministry. See the notes on this verse for translation options. \n\n### “Opening” the heart\n\nIn [6:11–13](../06/11.md), Paul speaks about opening the heart and, in contrast, being restricted. He is speaking about loving other people as if it were an open heart and failing to love other people as it were a restriction in one’s insides. If your culture can express the idea of love by referring to where in their bodies people feel love, you could do so in these verses. Otherwise, you could use a comparable metaphor or plain language. See the notes on these verses for translation options. \n\n### The temple of the living God\n\nIn [6:16](../06/16.md), Paul claims that believers are the temple of the living God. In the last part of the verse, he quotes from the Old Testament to prove that this is true. This quotation also shows that the identification of God’s people with the temple indicates that God is with his people and treats them as his people. Since the temple is a very important part of Paul’s culture, you should preserve the temple language. If your readers would not understand the metaphor, you could express it as a simile or explain it in a footnote. See the notes on this verse for translation options. \n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [6:14–16](../06/14.md), Paul asks five questions, and each question assumes that the answer is “none” or “nothing.” Paul asks these questions to include the Corinthians in what he is arguing, not because he is looking for information. If your language does not use questions in this way, you could include answers to the questions, or you could express them as negative statements. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### The long list in [6:4–10](../06/04.md)\n\nThese verses contain one long list of the situations and ways in which Paul and those with him commend their ministry. This list is divided into three parts. Each part uses a repeated form for each item. The first part uses the word “in” ([6:4–7a](../06/04.md)), the second part uses the word “through” ([6:7b–8a](../06/07.md)), and the third part uses the words “as” and “yet” or “but” ([6:8b–10](../06/08.md)). If possible, represent these parts in your language by using repeated words or some other natural form. Consider whether a long list like this would be natural in your language. The UST models one possible way to divide the list up into shorter sentences. \n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. When he uses this form, he is focusing on himself and those with him, or just on himself (although this is less likely). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 6:1 kf1d rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces his development of the ideas from the previous verses, especially from [5:20–21](../05/20.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 6:1 tbr6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit συνεργοῦντες 1 Here Paul does not directly state **with** whom he is **working**. He could be implying that he works **with**: (1) God, since God is the subject of the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “working together with God” (2) the Corinthians, since they are the ones whom is “urging.” Alternate translation: “working together with you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:1 x4hc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive καὶ, παρακαλοῦμεν 1 Here and throughout this chapter, **we** does not include the Corinthians. The first person plural could refer to: (1) Paul and those who work with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach the good news also urge” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I also urge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) @@ -673,7 +673,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 6:2 ooms rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γάρ 1 Here, the word **for** introduces a reason why the Corinthians should “receive the grace of God” (see [6:1](../06/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces reason for an exhortation. Alternate translation: “because” or “since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 6:2 u9kc rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations λέγει 1 Here, the phrase **he says** introduces words that God speaks in the Scriptures. Specifically, Paul is quoting from a Greek translation of [Isaiah 49:8](../isa/49/08.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you use a form that indicates that God speaks these words that come from Isaiah. Alternate translation: “according to Isaiah the prophet God says,” or “God speaks these words through Isaiah:” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 6:2 pp3i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism καιρῷ δεκτῷ ἐπήκουσά σου, καὶ ἐν ἡμέρᾳ σωτηρίας ἐβοήθησά σοι. ἰδοὺ, νῦν καιρὸς εὐπρόσδεκτος; ἰδοὺ, νῦν ἡμέρα σωτηρίας 1 The two clauses in the quotation mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Make sure that you use the same form for Paul’s interpretation of the quotation, which is also in parallel form. Alternate translation: “At an acceptable time I listened to you; yes, in a day of salvation I helped you. Behold, now is a favorable time; yes, now is a day of salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -6:2 kilf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καιρῷ δεκτῷ 1 Here, the phrase **an acceptable time** refers to a point in time that someone considers to proper or appropriate for doing something. Paul could be implying that this **time** is **acceptable** to: (1) God. Alternate translation: “At a time that I considered right” or “At a time appropriate for me” (2) people. Alternate translation: “At a time that people considered right” or “At a time appropriate for people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +6:2 kilf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καιρῷ δεκτῷ 1 Here, the phrase **an acceptable time** refers to a point in time that someone considers to be a proper or appropriate for doing something. Paul could be implying that this **time** is **acceptable** to: (1) God. Alternate translation: “At a time that I considered right” or “At a time appropriate for me” (2) people. Alternate translation: “At a time that people considered right” or “At a time appropriate for people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:2 iz3h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπήκουσά σου 1 Here, the word **listened** indicates that God both listened and responded. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that God did not just listen but also acted in response. Alternate translation: “I answered you” or “I listened to you and responded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:2 be7i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular σου & σοι 1 Because God is speaking to one person, his special servant, **you** in the quotation is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) 6:2 z6w6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐν ἡμέρᾳ σωτηρίας 1 Here, the phrase **day of salvation** refers to the time when God will bring **salvation** for his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in the time of salvation” or “at the time when I gave salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) From 370581a309c1c15b84e852fd01650d134e934dd0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 21:10:44 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 79/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index f4f182ae83..49273f691d 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -679,7 +679,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 6:2 z6w6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐν ἡμέρᾳ σωτηρίας 1 Here, the phrase **day of salvation** refers to the time when God will bring **salvation** for his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in the time of salvation” or “at the time when I gave salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 6:2 qrdt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns σωτηρίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “when I saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 6:2 sa94 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations ἰδοὺ, νῦν -1 Here, the words **Behold** and **Look** draw the attention of the audience and ask them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with words or phrases that ask the audience to listen, or you could use another form that draws the audience’s attention to the statements that follow. Alternate translation: “Pay attention! Now … Pay attention! Now” or “Listen, now … Now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) -6:2 j4k4 καιρὸς εὐπρόσδεκτος & ἡμέρα σωτηρίας 1 Here, the phrases **a day of salvation** and **a favorable time** repeat the words from the quotation exactly, except Paul uses a word that emphasizes that the **time** is good (**favorable**) instead of just appropriate (**acceptable**). Use the form that you used in the quotation, although if possible use a word for “good” **time** instead of just **acceptable time**. Alternate translation: “is a time that God considers good … is a time of salvation” or “is a time appropriate for God … is a time when God gives salvation” +6:2 j4k4 καιρὸς εὐπρόσδεκτος & ἡμέρα σωτηρίας 1 Here, the phrases **a day of salvation** and **a favorable time** repeat the words from the quotation exactly, except Paul uses a word that emphasizes that the **time** is good (**favorable**) instead of just appropriate (**acceptable**). Use the form that you used in the quotation, although, if possible, use a word for good **time** instead of just **acceptable time**. Alternate translation: “is a time that God considers good … is a time of salvation” or “is a time appropriate for God … is a time when God gives salvation” 6:3 shtt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure διδόντες 1 Here, the word **giving** goes with the clause “we also urge you” in [6:1](../06/01.md). It introduces an explanation of how Paul and those with him serve God. In most languages, it is best to begin a new sentence with this verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that clearly links back to “we also urge” from [6:1](../06/01.md). If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to end the previous verse with a period. Alternate translation: “As we urge you to receive the grace God, we give” or “As we serve God, we give” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 6:3 v3wc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μηδεμίαν & διδόντες προσκοπήν 1 Here, the phrase **giving no cause for offense** refers to how a person acts so that others are not offended. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form. Alternate translation: “avoiding provoking others” or “doing nothing that could cause offense” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:3 sv9d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν μηδενὶ 1 Here, the phrase **in anything** could refer to: (1) actions and behavior. Alternate translation: “in whatever we do” (2) people. Alternate translation: “among anybody” or “to any person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From f8c9dfc70e8a92ed1af45cc02387ef02ca081084 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 21:13:43 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 80/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 49273f691d..a272aea952 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -686,7 +686,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 6:3 he3c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μὴ μωμηθῇ ἡ διακονία 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) other people would do it. Alternate translation: “others might not blame our ministry” (2) God. Alternate translation: “God might not blame our ministry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 6:4 p6pl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν παντὶ συνιστάντες ἑαυτοὺς ὡς Θεοῦ διάκονοι 1 Here the word **as** could introduce: (1) who they are (**servants of God**) while they **commend** themselves. Alternate translation: “we who are servants of God commend ourselves in everything” (2) what it is that they must **commend** themselves to be. Alternate translation: “we commend ourselves in everything, proving that we are servants of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:4 p9up rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession Θεοῦ διάκονοι 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to refer **servants** who serve **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “servants for God” or “God’s servants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -6:4 faw1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure Θεοῦ & ἐν ὑπομονῇ πολλῇ, ἐν 1 Here, the phrase **in much endurance** could go with: (1) the list that follows. In this case, the list gives the situation in which they have **much endurance**. Alternate translation: “of God; we have much endurance in” (2) **we commend ourselves**. In this case, the phrase gives an explanation for how they **commend** themselves, and the list gives the situations in which this occurs Alternate translation: “of God by having much endurance; we show this in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +6:4 faw1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure Θεοῦ & ἐν ὑπομονῇ πολλῇ, ἐν 1 Here, the phrase **in much endurance** could go with: (1) the list that follows. In this case, the list gives the situation in which they have **much endurance**. Alternate translation: “of God; we have much endurance in” (2) **we commend ourselves**. In this case, the phrase gives an explanation for how they **commend** themselves, and the list gives the situations in which this occurs. Alternate translation: “of God by having much endurance; we show this in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 6:4 xyf9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ὑπομονῇ πολλῇ, ἐν θλίψεσιν, ἐν ἀνάγκαις, ἐν στενοχωρίαις 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **endurance,** **tribulations**, **hardships**, and **distresses**, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “enduring at all times while we are persecuted, pressured, and distressed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 6:4 ndmv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἐν θλίψεσιν, ἐν ἀνάγκαις, ἐν στενοχωρίαις 1 Here, the words **tribulations**, **hardships**, and **distresses** function together to refer to many different kinds of persecution and suffering. It is possible that **tribulations** refers to direct persecution, **hardships** refers to being forced to do something difficult, and **distresses** refers to being unable to do what one wants. If you do not have three words for these categories, and if the repetition would be confusing, you could use one or two words or phrases to refer to suffering and persecution. Alternate translation: “in persecutions, in suffering” or “in every tribulation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 6:5 ded3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν πληγαῖς, ἐν φυλακαῖς, ἐν ἀκαταστασίαις, ἐν κόποις, ἐν ἀγρυπνίαις, ἐν νηστείαις 1 If your language does not express some of these ideas with nouns, you could express the ideas by using verbal phrases or in another natural way. Alternate translation: “in being beaten, in being imprisoned, in being mobbed, in working hard, in sleeping little, in being hungry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From f56600e977f7697a269b9779e3ce654589296726 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 21:17:30 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 82/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index a272aea952..cbb6a2688c 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -696,7 +696,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 6:7 cr55 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy λόγῳ 1 Here, the word **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message” or “the communication” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 6:7 dui6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐν λόγῳ ἀληθείας 1 Here Paul could use the possessive to describe: (1) a **word** about the **truth**. Alternate translation: “in the word about the truth” (2) a **word** that is characterized by **truth**. Alternate translation: “the truthful word” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 6:7 p5l5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐν δυνάμει Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **power** that comes from **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in the power that comes from God” or “in power given by God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -6:7 ef5b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διὰ τῶν ὅπλων τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῶν δεξιῶν καὶ ἀριστερῶν 1 Here speaks as if **righteousness** were **weapons** for **the right hand and the left**. He means that the righteous way in which he and those with him live their lives is like armor and swords which they use to protect themselves and fight against enemies. Paul does not state who the enemy is, but he implies that it is anyone and anything that acts against God and the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with simile form or in plain language. Alternate translation: “through righteousness, which is like weapons for the right hand the left” or “through righteousness, which protects us from God’s enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +6:7 ef5b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διὰ τῶν ὅπλων τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῶν δεξιῶν καὶ ἀριστερῶν 1 Here speaks as if **righteousness** were **weapons** for **the right hand and the left**. He means that the righteous way in which he and those with him live their lives is like armor and swords which they use to protect themselves and fight against enemies. Paul does not state who the enemy is, but he implies that it is anyone and anything that acts against God and the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with simile form or in plain language. Alternate translation: “through righteousness, which is like weapons for the right hand and the left” or “through righteousness, which protects us from God’s enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:7 gg43 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῶν ὅπλων τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **weapons** that could: (1) be **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “the weapons, which are righteousness,” (2) come from or because of **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “the weapons that righteous provides” or “the weapons that come from righteousness” (3) defend or fight for **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “the weapons to defend righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 6:7 ozxm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῶν ὅπλων τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “righteous” or an adverb such as “righteously.” Alternate translation: “weapons, that is, how we live righteously,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 6:7 ijr2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῶν δεξιῶν καὶ ἀριστερῶν 1 Here, having **weapons** for **the right hand and the left** could describe how a soldier: (1) has an offensive weapon in one hand and a defensive weapon in the other. Alternate translation: “of righteous, both a sword and a shield” or “of righteousness for attack and defense” (2) is completely equipped for battle and able to defend against attacks from **right** and **left**. Alternate translation: “of righteous for defense on all sides” or “of righteousness with which we are fully equipped” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From af0278beba03f9d621f8f3b7892f2cfb0e428faf Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 21:21:05 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 83/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index cbb6a2688c..859f5c4936 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -697,12 +697,12 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 6:7 dui6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐν λόγῳ ἀληθείας 1 Here Paul could use the possessive to describe: (1) a **word** about the **truth**. Alternate translation: “in the word about the truth” (2) a **word** that is characterized by **truth**. Alternate translation: “the truthful word” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 6:7 p5l5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐν δυνάμει Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **power** that comes from **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in the power that comes from God” or “in power given by God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 6:7 ef5b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διὰ τῶν ὅπλων τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῶν δεξιῶν καὶ ἀριστερῶν 1 Here speaks as if **righteousness** were **weapons** for **the right hand and the left**. He means that the righteous way in which he and those with him live their lives is like armor and swords which they use to protect themselves and fight against enemies. Paul does not state who the enemy is, but he implies that it is anyone and anything that acts against God and the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with simile form or in plain language. Alternate translation: “through righteousness, which is like weapons for the right hand and the left” or “through righteousness, which protects us from God’s enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -6:7 gg43 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῶν ὅπλων τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **weapons** that could: (1) be **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “the weapons, which are righteousness,” (2) come from or because of **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “the weapons that righteous provides” or “the weapons that come from righteousness” (3) defend or fight for **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “the weapons to defend righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +6:7 gg43 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῶν ὅπλων τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **weapons** that could: (1) be **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “the weapons, which are righteousness,” (2) come from or be because of **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “the weapons that righteous provides” or “the weapons that come from righteousness” (3) defend or fight for **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “the weapons to defend righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 6:7 ozxm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῶν ὅπλων τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “righteous” or an adverb such as “righteously.” Alternate translation: “weapons, that is, how we live righteously,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 6:7 ijr2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῶν δεξιῶν καὶ ἀριστερῶν 1 Here, having **weapons** for **the right hand and the left** could describe how a soldier: (1) has an offensive weapon in one hand and a defensive weapon in the other. Alternate translation: “of righteous, both a sword and a shield” or “of righteousness for attack and defense” (2) is completely equipped for battle and able to defend against attacks from **right** and **left**. Alternate translation: “of righteous for defense on all sides” or “of righteousness with which we are fully equipped” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:8 ftu0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ δόξης καὶ ἀτιμίας, διὰ δυσφημίας καὶ εὐφημίας 1 In these two statements, Paul indicates that he and those with him persevere in serving God whether people think and say good or bad things about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly expresses this idea. Alternate translation: “whether we receive honor or dishonor, whether there are bad reports or good reports about us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:8 m51w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δόξης καὶ ἀτιμίας 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **honor** and **dishonor**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “honor” and “dishonor.” Alternate translation: “being honored and dishonored” or “others glorifying us and disgracing us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -6:8 fedq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς πλάνοι καὶ ἀληθεῖς 1 Here and in the following two verses Paul uses **as** to introduce what other people think about him and those with him and then **yet** or “but” to introduce what is really true about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally expresses a contrast between what people think and what is actually true. Alternate translation: “considered to be deceivers, but actually true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +6:8 fedq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς πλάνοι καὶ ἀληθεῖς 1 Here and in the following two verses Paul uses **as** to introduce what other people think about him and those with him and then **yet** to introduce what is really true about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally expresses a contrast between what people think and what is actually true. Alternate translation: “considered to be deceivers, but actually true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:8 e4pf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἀληθεῖς 1 Paul is using the adjective **true** as a noun in order to identify himself and those with him as those who “truly” are who they say they are. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “truthful people” or “telling the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 6:9 niij rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς ἀγνοούμενοι καὶ ἐπιγινωσκόμενοι, ὡς ἀποθνῄσκοντες καὶ ἰδοὺ, ζῶμεν, ὡς παιδευόμενοι καὶ μὴ θανατούμενοι 1 Here and in the following verse Paul uses **as** to introduce what other people think about him and those with him and then **yet** or “but” to introduce what is really true about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally expresses a contrast between what people think and what is actually true. Alternate translation: “considered to be unknown, but actually well known; considered to be dying, but actually—behold!—living; considered to be being disciplined, but actually not being put to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:9 fcb5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὡς ἀγνοούμενοι καὶ ἐπιγινωσκόμενοι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the actions, Paul could be implying that he is: (1) **unknown** to many people but **known** to God. Alternate translation: “many people not knowing us, yet God knowing us well” (2) **unknown** to some people, but **known** to other people. Alternate translation: “some people not knowing us, yet others knowing us well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From a4fc1ccbb1e594d52909ed1832a5379744cdb7b1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 21:36:05 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 84/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 859f5c4936..d6b8c03570 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -703,8 +703,8 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 6:8 ftu0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ δόξης καὶ ἀτιμίας, διὰ δυσφημίας καὶ εὐφημίας 1 In these two statements, Paul indicates that he and those with him persevere in serving God whether people think and say good or bad things about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly expresses this idea. Alternate translation: “whether we receive honor or dishonor, whether there are bad reports or good reports about us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:8 m51w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δόξης καὶ ἀτιμίας 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **honor** and **dishonor**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “honor” and “dishonor.” Alternate translation: “being honored and dishonored” or “others glorifying us and disgracing us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 6:8 fedq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς πλάνοι καὶ ἀληθεῖς 1 Here and in the following two verses Paul uses **as** to introduce what other people think about him and those with him and then **yet** to introduce what is really true about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally expresses a contrast between what people think and what is actually true. Alternate translation: “considered to be deceivers, but actually true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -6:8 e4pf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἀληθεῖς 1 Paul is using the adjective **true** as a noun in order to identify himself and those with him as those who “truly” are who they say they are. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “truthful people” or “telling the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -6:9 niij rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς ἀγνοούμενοι καὶ ἐπιγινωσκόμενοι, ὡς ἀποθνῄσκοντες καὶ ἰδοὺ, ζῶμεν, ὡς παιδευόμενοι καὶ μὴ θανατούμενοι 1 Here and in the following verse Paul uses **as** to introduce what other people think about him and those with him and then **yet** or “but” to introduce what is really true about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally expresses a contrast between what people think and what is actually true. Alternate translation: “considered to be unknown, but actually well known; considered to be dying, but actually—behold!—living; considered to be being disciplined, but actually not being put to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +6:8 e4pf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἀληθεῖς 1 Paul is using the adjective **true** as a noun in order to identify himself and those with him as those who truly are who they say they are. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “truthful people” or “telling the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +6:9 niij rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς ἀγνοούμενοι καὶ ἐπιγινωσκόμενοι, ὡς ἀποθνῄσκοντες καὶ ἰδοὺ, ζῶμεν, ὡς παιδευόμενοι καὶ μὴ θανατούμενοι 1 Here and in the following verse Paul uses **as** to introduce what other people think about him and those with him and then **yet** to introduce what is really true about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally expresses a contrast between what people think and what is actually true. Alternate translation: “considered to be unknown, but actually well known; considered to be dying, but actually—behold!—living; considered to be being disciplined, but actually not being put to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:9 fcb5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὡς ἀγνοούμενοι καὶ ἐπιγινωσκόμενοι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the actions, Paul could be implying that he is: (1) **unknown** to many people but **known** to God. Alternate translation: “many people not knowing us, yet God knowing us well” (2) **unknown** to some people, but **known** to other people. Alternate translation: “some people not knowing us, yet others knowing us well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 6:9 x7bu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations καὶ ἰδοὺ, ζῶμεν 1 Here, the word **behold** draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen, or you could use another form that draws the audience’s attention to the statement that follows. Alternate translation: “yet, and listen to this, living” or “yet most certainly living” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) 6:9 r1d9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὡς παιδευόμενοι καὶ μὴ θανατούμενοι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the actions, Paul could be implying that: (1) God does them. Alternate translation: “God disciplining us yet not putting us to death” (2) other people do them. Alternate translation: “people disciplining us yet not putting us to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From de8bb57e23eeee7082cec444ac688bc99c750a0f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 21:39:59 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 85/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index d6b8c03570..d9f2bc21d1 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -712,9 +712,9 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 6:10 so04 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς λυπούμενοι ἀεὶ δὲ χαίροντες, ὡς πτωχοὶ πολλοὺς δὲ πλουτίζοντες, ὡς μηδὲν ἔχοντες καὶ πάντα κατέχοντες 1 Here, just as in the previous verse, Paul uses **as** to introduce what other people think about him and those with him and then **yet** or **but** to introduce what is really true about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally expresses a contrast between what people think and what is actually true. Alternate translation: “considered to be sorrowful, but actually always rejoicing; considered to be poor, but actually making many rich; considered to have nothing, but actually possessing all things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:10 vydj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πολλοὺς & πλουτίζοντες 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and those with him made other people **rich**. He means that he helps people receive blessings from God, including forgiveness and new life, which makes them spiritually **rich**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “making many spiritually rich” or “enabling many to receive new life, which is like being rich” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:10 pajk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πολλοὺς 1 Paul is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to refer **many** people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “many others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -6:10 fpqg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάντα 1 Here Paul could be stating that they “possess”: (1) **all things** that Christ possesses. In other words, because Christ rules over everything, Paul and those with him also “possess” everything. Alternate translation: “all things in Christ” (2) **all** spiritual blessings, which are the important **things**. Alternate translation: “all spiritual blessings” or “everything that is really important” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +6:10 fpqg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάντα 1 Here Paul could be stating that they possess: (1) **all things** that Christ possesses. In other words, because Christ rules over everything, Paul and those with him also possess everything. Alternate translation: “all things in Christ” (2) **all** spiritual blessings, which are the important **things**. Alternate translation: “all spiritual blessings” or “everything that is really important” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:11 mv85 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν ἀνέῳγεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς, Κορίνθιοι, ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν πεπλάτυνται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the actions, Paul implies that he and those with him did them. Alternate translation: “We have opened our mouth toward you, Corinthians; we have opened our heart wide” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -6:11 v74j τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν & ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν 1 Here, the words **mouth** and **heart** are singular nouns that refer to the “mouths” and “hearts” of Paul and those with him. It may be more natural in your language to use plural forms. Alternate translation: “Each of our mouths … each of our hearts” +6:11 v74j τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν & ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν 1 Here, the words **mouth** and **heart** are singular nouns that refer to the mouths and hearts of Paul and his fellow workers. It may be more natural in your language to use plural forms. Alternate translation: “Each of our mouths … each of our hearts” 6:11 r815 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν & ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **mouth** refers to the action of speaking with the **mouth**, and the word **heart** refers to the act of thinking and feeling with the **heart**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that refer to the actions rather than to where the actions occur. Alternate translation: “Our speaking … our feeling” or “How we speak … how we feel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 6:11 jvak rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν ἀνέῳγεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul speaks as he and those with had **opened** their mouths **toward** the Corinthians. He means that he and those with him have spoken what is true, and they have spoken confidently. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Paul could be specifically referring to: (1) how he and those with him have interacted with the Corinthians in the past. Alternate translation: “We have always spoken confidently and truthfully to you” (2) what he has said in this letter so far. Alternate translation: “We have written confidently and truthfully to you” (3) what he said in [6:3–10](../06/03.md). Alternate translation: “We wrote those things to you confidently and truthfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:11 w42w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν πεπλάτυνται 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and those with him have **opened wide** their “hearts” to the Corinthians. He means that they love and care for the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Alternate translation: “we have made room in our hearts for you” or “we love you very much” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From f5b1178c5ddc62925a59239ba7143e34f5251c79 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 21:41:19 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 86/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index d9f2bc21d1..ccc73c4d5e 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -716,7 +716,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 6:11 mv85 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν ἀνέῳγεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς, Κορίνθιοι, ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν πεπλάτυνται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the actions, Paul implies that he and those with him did them. Alternate translation: “We have opened our mouth toward you, Corinthians; we have opened our heart wide” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 6:11 v74j τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν & ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν 1 Here, the words **mouth** and **heart** are singular nouns that refer to the mouths and hearts of Paul and his fellow workers. It may be more natural in your language to use plural forms. Alternate translation: “Each of our mouths … each of our hearts” 6:11 r815 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν & ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **mouth** refers to the action of speaking with the **mouth**, and the word **heart** refers to the act of thinking and feeling with the **heart**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that refer to the actions rather than to where the actions occur. Alternate translation: “Our speaking … our feeling” or “How we speak … how we feel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -6:11 jvak rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν ἀνέῳγεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul speaks as he and those with had **opened** their mouths **toward** the Corinthians. He means that he and those with him have spoken what is true, and they have spoken confidently. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Paul could be specifically referring to: (1) how he and those with him have interacted with the Corinthians in the past. Alternate translation: “We have always spoken confidently and truthfully to you” (2) what he has said in this letter so far. Alternate translation: “We have written confidently and truthfully to you” (3) what he said in [6:3–10](../06/03.md). Alternate translation: “We wrote those things to you confidently and truthfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +6:11 jvak rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν ἀνέῳγεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers had **opened** their mouths **toward** the Corinthians. He means that he and those with him have spoken what is true, and they have spoken confidently. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Paul could be specifically referring to: (1) how he and his fellow workers have interacted with the Corinthians in the past. Alternate translation: “We have always spoken confidently and truthfully to you” (2) what he has said in this letter so far. Alternate translation: “We have written confidently and truthfully to you” (3) what he said in [6:3–10](../06/03.md). Alternate translation: “We wrote those things to you confidently and truthfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:11 w42w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν πεπλάτυνται 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and those with him have **opened wide** their “hearts” to the Corinthians. He means that they love and care for the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Alternate translation: “we have made room in our hearts for you” or “we love you very much” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:12 m2kq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ στενοχωρεῖσθε ἐν ἡμῖν, στενοχωρεῖσθε δὲ ἐν τοῖς σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν 1 Here Paul speaks about loving others as if it was about having space in one’s insides. When people have space for other people inside them (**not restricted**), they are loving and caring for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “There is space for you in our hearts, but you do not have space for us in your hearts” or “You are being loved by us, but you are not fully loving us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:12 u4fz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ στενοχωρεῖσθε ἐν ἡμῖν, στενοχωρεῖσθε δὲ ἐν τοῖς σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “We are not restricting you, but your affections are restricting you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From 23afa774ba5306d439ed3ce972dfdbc1d0d99509 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 21:44:02 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 87/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index ccc73c4d5e..eb568b78a0 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -718,10 +718,10 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 6:11 r815 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν & ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **mouth** refers to the action of speaking with the **mouth**, and the word **heart** refers to the act of thinking and feeling with the **heart**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that refer to the actions rather than to where the actions occur. Alternate translation: “Our speaking … our feeling” or “How we speak … how we feel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 6:11 jvak rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν ἀνέῳγεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers had **opened** their mouths **toward** the Corinthians. He means that he and those with him have spoken what is true, and they have spoken confidently. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Paul could be specifically referring to: (1) how he and his fellow workers have interacted with the Corinthians in the past. Alternate translation: “We have always spoken confidently and truthfully to you” (2) what he has said in this letter so far. Alternate translation: “We have written confidently and truthfully to you” (3) what he said in [6:3–10](../06/03.md). Alternate translation: “We wrote those things to you confidently and truthfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:11 w42w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν πεπλάτυνται 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and those with him have **opened wide** their “hearts” to the Corinthians. He means that they love and care for the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Alternate translation: “we have made room in our hearts for you” or “we love you very much” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -6:12 m2kq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ στενοχωρεῖσθε ἐν ἡμῖν, στενοχωρεῖσθε δὲ ἐν τοῖς σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν 1 Here Paul speaks about loving others as if it was about having space in one’s insides. When people have space for other people inside them (**not restricted**), they are loving and caring for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “There is space for you in our hearts, but you do not have space for us in your hearts” or “You are being loved by us, but you are not fully loving us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +6:12 m2kq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ στενοχωρεῖσθε ἐν ἡμῖν, στενοχωρεῖσθε δὲ ἐν τοῖς σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν 1 Here Paul speaks about loving others as if it were about having space in one’s insides. When people have space for other people inside them (**not restricted**), they are loving and caring for others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “There is space for you in our hearts, but you do not have space for us in your hearts” or “You are being loved by us, but you are not fully loving us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:12 u4fz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ στενοχωρεῖσθε ἐν ἡμῖν, στενοχωρεῖσθε δὲ ἐν τοῖς σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “We are not restricting you, but your affections are restricting you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 6:12 p88s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τοῖς σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **affections**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “feel.” Alternate translation: “what you feel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -6:13 ypsz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure τὴν δὲ αὐτὴν ἀντιμισθίαν (ὡς τέκνοις λέγω) πλατύνθητε καὶ ὑμεῖς 1 Here, the clause **I speak as to children** is a parenthetical statement that breaks up the sentence to give more information about how Paul is speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could move the clause to wherever it is most natural to put a statement about how one is speaking. Alternate translation: “and—I speak as to children—in the same exchange, open yourselves wide also” or “and in the same exchange, open yourselves wide also—I speak as to children.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +6:13 ypsz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure τὴν δὲ αὐτὴν ἀντιμισθίαν (ὡς τέκνοις λέγω) πλατύνθητε καὶ ὑμεῖς 1 Here, the clause **I speak as to children** is a parenthetical statement that breaks up the sentence to give more information about how Paul is speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could move the clause to wherever it is most natural to put a statement about how one is speaking. Alternate translation: “and—I speak as to children—in the same exchange, open yourselves wide also” or “and in the same exchange, open yourselves wide also—I speak as to children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 6:13 b62y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν & αὐτὴν ἀντιμισθίαν 1 Here, the phrase **same exchange** refers to how Paul and those with him have “opened their hearts” (that is, shown love) to the Corinthians. This is the first part of the **exchange**, and now Paul wants the Corinthians to complete this **exchange** by “opening themselves” to Paul and those with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what is being “exchanged” more explicitly. Alternate translation: “now that we have opened our hearts to you, in exchange” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:13 zdfh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς τέκνοις λέγω 1 Here Paul indicates that he is speaking as if he were addressing **children**. He could mean that: (1) he is using words and ideas that children use, particularly referring to the idea of **exchange**. Alternate translation: “I am using childish language” or “I speak as children speak to each other” (2) he is speaking to the Corinthians as if he was their father and they were his children. Alternate translation: “I speak to you who are like my own children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) 6:13 c6vp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πλατύνθητε καὶ ὑμεῖς 1 Here Paul continues to speak about loving others as if it was about having space in one’s insides. When people have space for other people inside them, they love and care for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar clause at the end of [6:11](../06/11.md). Alternate translation: “make space in your hearts also” or “love us also” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From d7d5f1dec4193d6781f1691303e9c49b6c242a71 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 21:44:57 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 88/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index eb568b78a0..88cb0c4665 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -722,7 +722,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 6:12 u4fz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ στενοχωρεῖσθε ἐν ἡμῖν, στενοχωρεῖσθε δὲ ἐν τοῖς σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “We are not restricting you, but your affections are restricting you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 6:12 p88s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τοῖς σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **affections**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “feel.” Alternate translation: “what you feel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 6:13 ypsz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure τὴν δὲ αὐτὴν ἀντιμισθίαν (ὡς τέκνοις λέγω) πλατύνθητε καὶ ὑμεῖς 1 Here, the clause **I speak as to children** is a parenthetical statement that breaks up the sentence to give more information about how Paul is speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could move the clause to wherever it is most natural to put a statement about how one is speaking. Alternate translation: “and—I speak as to children—in the same exchange, open yourselves wide also” or “and in the same exchange, open yourselves wide also—I speak as to children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) -6:13 b62y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν & αὐτὴν ἀντιμισθίαν 1 Here, the phrase **same exchange** refers to how Paul and those with him have “opened their hearts” (that is, shown love) to the Corinthians. This is the first part of the **exchange**, and now Paul wants the Corinthians to complete this **exchange** by “opening themselves” to Paul and those with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what is being “exchanged” more explicitly. Alternate translation: “now that we have opened our hearts to you, in exchange” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +6:13 b62y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν & αὐτὴν ἀντιμισθίαν 1 Here, the phrase **same exchange** refers to how Paul and his fellow workers have “opened their hearts” (that is, shown love) to the Corinthians. This is the first part of the **exchange**, and now Paul wants the Corinthians to complete this **exchange** by opening themselves to Paul and those with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what is being exchanged more explicitly. Alternate translation: “now that we have opened our hearts to you, in exchange” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:13 zdfh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς τέκνοις λέγω 1 Here Paul indicates that he is speaking as if he were addressing **children**. He could mean that: (1) he is using words and ideas that children use, particularly referring to the idea of **exchange**. Alternate translation: “I am using childish language” or “I speak as children speak to each other” (2) he is speaking to the Corinthians as if he was their father and they were his children. Alternate translation: “I speak to you who are like my own children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) 6:13 c6vp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πλατύνθητε καὶ ὑμεῖς 1 Here Paul continues to speak about loving others as if it was about having space in one’s insides. When people have space for other people inside them, they love and care for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar clause at the end of [6:11](../06/11.md). Alternate translation: “make space in your hearts also” or “love us also” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:14 qd33 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μὴ γίνεσθε ἑτεροζυγοῦντες ἀπίστοις 1 Here Paul refers to a farming practice in which two or more animals were **yoked together** with a piece of wood that was then connected to a plow or cart. In this way, the animals together pulled the plow or cart. Paul applies this farming practice to people to indicate that believers should not accomplish what God wants them to do by working with **unbelievers**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Do not team up with unbelievers” or “Do not have a close relationship with unbelievers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From c7e62da79215bf7d930c41d52a0e7ec94eb8b5be Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 21:46:46 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 89/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 88cb0c4665..325d601c91 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -724,8 +724,8 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 6:13 ypsz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure τὴν δὲ αὐτὴν ἀντιμισθίαν (ὡς τέκνοις λέγω) πλατύνθητε καὶ ὑμεῖς 1 Here, the clause **I speak as to children** is a parenthetical statement that breaks up the sentence to give more information about how Paul is speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could move the clause to wherever it is most natural to put a statement about how one is speaking. Alternate translation: “and—I speak as to children—in the same exchange, open yourselves wide also” or “and in the same exchange, open yourselves wide also—I speak as to children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 6:13 b62y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν & αὐτὴν ἀντιμισθίαν 1 Here, the phrase **same exchange** refers to how Paul and his fellow workers have “opened their hearts” (that is, shown love) to the Corinthians. This is the first part of the **exchange**, and now Paul wants the Corinthians to complete this **exchange** by opening themselves to Paul and those with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what is being exchanged more explicitly. Alternate translation: “now that we have opened our hearts to you, in exchange” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:13 zdfh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς τέκνοις λέγω 1 Here Paul indicates that he is speaking as if he were addressing **children**. He could mean that: (1) he is using words and ideas that children use, particularly referring to the idea of **exchange**. Alternate translation: “I am using childish language” or “I speak as children speak to each other” (2) he is speaking to the Corinthians as if he was their father and they were his children. Alternate translation: “I speak to you who are like my own children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -6:13 c6vp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πλατύνθητε καὶ ὑμεῖς 1 Here Paul continues to speak about loving others as if it was about having space in one’s insides. When people have space for other people inside them, they love and care for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar clause at the end of [6:11](../06/11.md). Alternate translation: “make space in your hearts also” or “love us also” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -6:14 qd33 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μὴ γίνεσθε ἑτεροζυγοῦντες ἀπίστοις 1 Here Paul refers to a farming practice in which two or more animals were **yoked together** with a piece of wood that was then connected to a plow or cart. In this way, the animals together pulled the plow or cart. Paul applies this farming practice to people to indicate that believers should not accomplish what God wants them to do by working with **unbelievers**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Do not team up with unbelievers” or “Do not have a close relationship with unbelievers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +6:13 c6vp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πλατύνθητε καὶ ὑμεῖς 1 Here Paul continues to speak about loving others as if it were about having space in one’s insides. When people have space for other people inside them, they love and care for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar clause at the end of [6:11](../06/11.md). Alternate translation: “make space in your hearts also” or “love us also” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +6:14 qd33 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μὴ γίνεσθε ἑτεροζυγοῦντες ἀπίστοις 1 Here Paul refers to a farming practice in which two or more animals were **yoked together** with a piece of wood that was then connected to a plow or cart. In this way, the animals together pulled the plow or cart. Paul applies this farming practice to people to indicate that believers should not try to accomplish what God wants them to do by working with **unbelievers**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Do not team up with unbelievers” or “Do not have a close relationship with unbelievers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:14 x89j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μὴ γίνεσθε ἑτεροζυγοῦντες 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that people do it to themselves. Alternate translation: “Do not yoke yourselves together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 6:14 v7kk rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a some reasons why the Corinthians should be **yoked** with **unbelievers**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces reasons for a command. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 6:14 v7pw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς & μετοχὴ δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ἀνομίᾳ, ἢ τίς κοινωνία φωτὶ πρὸς σκότος? 1 Here Paul is using the question form to deny that something could be true. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could express the idea by using strong negations. Alternate translation: “righteousness and lawlessness cannot have partnership! Nor can light and darkness have fellowship!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From 51a263289ab6640e0b7ca2f52329dc95bbb1252f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 21:51:02 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 90/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 325d601c91..d3bae7aeb4 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -727,7 +727,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 6:13 c6vp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πλατύνθητε καὶ ὑμεῖς 1 Here Paul continues to speak about loving others as if it were about having space in one’s insides. When people have space for other people inside them, they love and care for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar clause at the end of [6:11](../06/11.md). Alternate translation: “make space in your hearts also” or “love us also” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:14 qd33 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μὴ γίνεσθε ἑτεροζυγοῦντες ἀπίστοις 1 Here Paul refers to a farming practice in which two or more animals were **yoked together** with a piece of wood that was then connected to a plow or cart. In this way, the animals together pulled the plow or cart. Paul applies this farming practice to people to indicate that believers should not try to accomplish what God wants them to do by working with **unbelievers**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Do not team up with unbelievers” or “Do not have a close relationship with unbelievers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:14 x89j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μὴ γίνεσθε ἑτεροζυγοῦντες 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that people do it to themselves. Alternate translation: “Do not yoke yourselves together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -6:14 v7kk rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a some reasons why the Corinthians should be **yoked** with **unbelievers**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces reasons for a command. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +6:14 v7kk rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **for** introduces some reasons why the Corinthians should not be **yoked** with **unbelievers**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces reasons for a command. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 6:14 v7pw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς & μετοχὴ δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ἀνομίᾳ, ἢ τίς κοινωνία φωτὶ πρὸς σκότος? 1 Here Paul is using the question form to deny that something could be true. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could express the idea by using strong negations. Alternate translation: “righteousness and lawlessness cannot have partnership! Nor can light and darkness have fellowship!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 6:14 n5so rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τίς & μετοχὴ δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ἀνομίᾳ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **partnership**, **righteousness**, and **lawlessness**, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “can righteous people and lawless people partner” or “can what is righteous partner with what is lawless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 6:14 xr52 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τίς κοινωνία φωτὶ πρὸς σκότος? 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **fellowship**, **light**, and **darkness**, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “can what is bright go together with what is dark” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From 150b1be89d4c37f0bd0af7283dcf8f83e35502ad Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 21:54:29 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 91/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index d3bae7aeb4..854377ce8c 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -733,9 +733,9 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 6:14 xr52 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τίς κοινωνία φωτὶ πρὸς σκότος? 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **fellowship**, **light**, and **darkness**, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “can what is bright go together with what is dark” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 6:14 h9ks rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τίς κοινωνία φωτὶ πρὸς σκότος? 1 Here Paul speaks about how **light** and **darkness** do not have **fellowship**. He could be speaking about: (1) things and people that are good (**light**) and things and people that are evil (**darkness**). Alternate translation: “what fellowship do good people have with evil people” (2) God’s kingdom and people (**light**) and Satan’s kingdom and people (**darkness**). Alternate translation: “what fellowship does God’s kingdom have with Satan’s kingdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:15 r1vq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς δὲ συμφώνησις Χριστοῦ πρὸς Βελιάρ, ἢ τίς μερὶς πιστῷ μετὰ ἀπίστου 1 Here, just as in [6:14](../06/14.md), Paul is using the question form to deny that something could be true. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could express the idea by using strong negations. Alternate translation: “And Christ has no harmony with Beliar! Nor does a believer have a share with an unbeliever!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -6:15 f832 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τίς δὲ συμφώνησις Χριστοῦ πρὸς Βελιάρ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **harmony**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “agree” or “go together.” Alternate translation: “And does Christ go together with Beliar” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +6:15 f832 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τίς δὲ συμφώνησις Χριστοῦ πρὸς Βελιάρ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **harmony**, you could express the idea by using verbs such as “agree” or “go together.” Alternate translation: “And does Christ go together with Beliar” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 6:15 rm3r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Βελιάρ 1 Here, the word **Beliar** is another name for the devil, who is also called Satan. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include a footnote or short phrase that clarifies that **Beliar** is another name for Satan. Alternate translation: “Beliar, that is, Satan” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -6:15 z9iv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun τίς μερὶς πιστῷ μετὰ ἀπίστου 1 Here Paul is speaking of “believers” and “unbelievers” in general, not of one particular **believer** and one particular **unbeliever**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to “believers” and “unbelievers” in general. Alternate translation: “what share does any believer have with any unbeliever” or “what share do believers have with unbelievers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +6:15 z9iv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun τίς μερὶς πιστῷ μετὰ ἀπίστου 1 Here Paul is speaking of believers and unbelievers in general, not of one particular **believer** and one particular **unbeliever**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to believers and unbelievers in general. Alternate translation: “what share does any believer have with any unbeliever” or “what share do believers have with unbelievers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 6:16 y99x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς δὲ συνκατάθεσις ναῷ Θεοῦ μετὰ εἰδώλων? 1 Here, just as in [6:14–15](../06/14.md), Paul is using the question form to deny that something could be true. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “And the temple of God has no agreement with idols!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 6:16 m658 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τίς & συνκατάθεσις ναῷ Θεοῦ μετὰ εἰδώλων 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **agreement**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “agree.” Alternate translation: “does the temple of God agree with idols” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 6:16 jc79 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of what Paul said about **the temple of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “Now” or “As a matter of fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) From e61dd20f384e939406ff557c137beeff71759a00 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 21:56:36 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 92/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 854377ce8c..4042f68afd 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -740,7 +740,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 6:16 m658 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τίς & συνκατάθεσις ναῷ Θεοῦ μετὰ εἰδώλων 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **agreement**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “agree.” Alternate translation: “does the temple of God agree with idols” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 6:16 jc79 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of what Paul said about **the temple of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “Now” or “As a matter of fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 6:16 s3l8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 Here, the word **we** refers to everyone who believes in Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -6:16 aqql rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡμεῖς & ναὸς Θεοῦ ἐσμεν ζῶντος 1 Here Paul speaks as if **we** were a **temple**. He explains this metaphor with the following quotation, which illustrates how God dwells with his people as their God. Since the **temple** is an important building in Paul’s culture, if possible you should preserve the language. If necessary, you could express the idea by using a simile form. Alternate translation: “we are like the temple of the living God” or “the living God dwells with us as if we were his temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +6:16 aqql rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡμεῖς & ναὸς Θεοῦ ἐσμεν ζῶντος 1 Here Paul speaks as if **we** were a **temple**. He follows this metaphor with a quotation which illustrates how God dwells with his people as their God. Since the **temple** is an important building in Paul’s culture, if possible you should preserve the language. If necessary, you could express the idea by using a simile form. Alternate translation: “we are like the temple of the living God” or “the living God dwells with us as if we were his temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:16 oc16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Θεοῦ & ζῶντος 2 Here, the phrase **the living God** identifies God as the one who “lives” and possibly as the one who gives “life.” The primary point is that God actually “lives,” unlike idols and other things that people call “god.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that emphasizes that God really “lives.” See how you translated the similar phrase in [3:3](../03/03.md). Alternate translation: “of the God who lives” or “of the true God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:16 es7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations καθὼς εἶπεν ὁ Θεὸς 1 Here, the phrase **just as God said** introduces a quotation that supports what Paul has said about how **we are the temple of the living God**. The words Paul quotes could come from [Leviticus 26:12](../lev/26/12.md); [Jeremiah 31:33](../jer/31/33.md); and [Ezekiel 37:27](../ezk/37/27.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the words that God speaks are from the Scriptures. Alternate translation: “just as God spoke through the prophets” or “as God spoke in the Old Testament” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 6:16 u5g3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἐνοικήσω ἐν αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐνπεριπατήσω 1 These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “I will dwell among them; yes, I will walk among them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) From aa3fc5839f5f1092ff47f5f0e126d5c9a1b47718 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 21:59:40 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 93/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 4042f68afd..313ab2e250 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -741,7 +741,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 6:16 jc79 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of what Paul said about **the temple of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “Now” or “As a matter of fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 6:16 s3l8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 Here, the word **we** refers to everyone who believes in Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 6:16 aqql rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡμεῖς & ναὸς Θεοῦ ἐσμεν ζῶντος 1 Here Paul speaks as if **we** were a **temple**. He follows this metaphor with a quotation which illustrates how God dwells with his people as their God. Since the **temple** is an important building in Paul’s culture, if possible you should preserve the language. If necessary, you could express the idea by using a simile form. Alternate translation: “we are like the temple of the living God” or “the living God dwells with us as if we were his temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -6:16 oc16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Θεοῦ & ζῶντος 2 Here, the phrase **the living God** identifies God as the one who “lives” and possibly as the one who gives “life.” The primary point is that God actually “lives,” unlike idols and other things that people call “god.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that emphasizes that God really “lives.” See how you translated the similar phrase in [3:3](../03/03.md). Alternate translation: “of the God who lives” or “of the true God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +6:16 oc16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Θεοῦ & ζῶντος 2 Here, the phrase **the living God** identifies God as the one who lives and possibly as the one who gives life. The primary point is that God is actually alive, unlike idols and other things that people call their gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that emphasizes that God really lives. See how you translated the similar phrase in [3:3](../03/03.md). Alternate translation: “of the God who lives” or “of the true God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:16 es7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations καθὼς εἶπεν ὁ Θεὸς 1 Here, the phrase **just as God said** introduces a quotation that supports what Paul has said about how **we are the temple of the living God**. The words Paul quotes could come from [Leviticus 26:12](../lev/26/12.md); [Jeremiah 31:33](../jer/31/33.md); and [Ezekiel 37:27](../ezk/37/27.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the words that God speaks are from the Scriptures. Alternate translation: “just as God spoke through the prophets” or “as God spoke in the Old Testament” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 6:16 u5g3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἐνοικήσω ἐν αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐνπεριπατήσω 1 These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “I will dwell among them; yes, I will walk among them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 6:16 g0nl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐνπεριπατήσω 1 Here the author of the quotation speaks as if God would **walk** among his people. He means that God will be as close to his people as if he was “walking” around with them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “spend time with them” or “be close to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 1ab0e20341092a0ec9cfc466ebd2242dbee6ebee Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 22:04:54 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 94/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 313ab2e250..7a77c1761f 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -744,12 +744,12 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 6:16 oc16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Θεοῦ & ζῶντος 2 Here, the phrase **the living God** identifies God as the one who lives and possibly as the one who gives life. The primary point is that God is actually alive, unlike idols and other things that people call their gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that emphasizes that God really lives. See how you translated the similar phrase in [3:3](../03/03.md). Alternate translation: “of the God who lives” or “of the true God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:16 es7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations καθὼς εἶπεν ὁ Θεὸς 1 Here, the phrase **just as God said** introduces a quotation that supports what Paul has said about how **we are the temple of the living God**. The words Paul quotes could come from [Leviticus 26:12](../lev/26/12.md); [Jeremiah 31:33](../jer/31/33.md); and [Ezekiel 37:27](../ezk/37/27.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the words that God speaks are from the Scriptures. Alternate translation: “just as God spoke through the prophets” or “as God spoke in the Old Testament” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 6:16 u5g3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἐνοικήσω ἐν αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐνπεριπατήσω 1 These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “I will dwell among them; yes, I will walk among them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -6:16 g0nl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐνπεριπατήσω 1 Here the author of the quotation speaks as if God would **walk** among his people. He means that God will be as close to his people as if he was “walking” around with them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “spend time with them” or “be close to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +6:16 g0nl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐνπεριπατήσω 1 Here the author of the quotation speaks as if God would **walk** among his people. He means that God will be as close to his people as if he was walking around with them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “spend time with them” or “be close to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:16 vy1b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ ἔσονταί 1 Here, the word translated **themselves** switches focus from **God** to **they**. Consider using a natural way to switch the focus to **they** in your language. Alternate translation: “it is they who will be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -6:17 fe1z rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations διὸ & λέγει Κύριος 1 Here Paul uses the words **Therefore** and **says the Lord** to introduce a quotation that provides a result or inference from what Paul said in the previous verse. Most of the quotation is from [Isaiah 52:11](../isa/52/11.md), but the phrase **and I will welcome you** is from a Greek translation of [Ezekiel 20:34](../ezk/20/34.md). The ULT indicates that the quote is from two different passages by using new quotation marks with the last line. However, it is recommended that you treat the whole verse as one quote in your translation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could introduce the quote in a natural way that shows it comes from the Old Testament. It may be more natural to move **says the Lord** to the beginning of the verse, as the UST does. Alternate translation: “Because of that … the Lord says {through the prophets}” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +6:17 fe1z rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations διὸ & λέγει Κύριος 1 Here Paul uses the words **Therefore** and **says the Lord** to introduce a quotation that provides a result or inference from what Paul said in the previous verse. Most of the quotation is from [Isaiah 52:11](../isa/52/11.md), but the phrase **and I will welcome you** is from a Greek translation of [Ezekiel 20:34](../ezk/20/34.md). The ULT indicates that the quote is from two different passages by using new quotation marks with the last line. However, it is recommended that you treat the whole verse as one quote in your translation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could introduce the quote in a natural way which shows that it comes from the Old Testament. It may be more natural to move **says the Lord** to the beginning of the verse, as the UST does. Alternate translation: “Because of that … the Lord says {through the prophets}” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 6:17 peek rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἐξέλθατε ἐκ μέσου αὐτῶν καὶ ἀφορίσθητε 1 Here, these two clauses mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “Come out from the midst of them; yes, be separate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 6:17 z5ld rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτῶν 1 Here, the word **them** refers to people who do not follow God and who do not trust the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom the pronoun refers. Alternate translation: “of the unbelievers” or “of the people who do not follow God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -6:17 vfie rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀκαθάρτου μὴ ἅπτεσθε 1 Here the author of the quotation uses the word **touch** to refer to interacting with someone in any way, not just by “touching” it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “interact with no unclean thing” or “avoid every unclean thing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +6:17 vfie rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀκαθάρτου μὴ ἅπτεσθε 1 Here the author of the quotation uses the word **touch** to refer to interacting with someone in any way, not just by touching it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “interact with no unclean thing” or “avoid every unclean thing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 6:17 jg48 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result κἀγὼ 1 Here, the word **and** introduces what happens when people do what God commanded in the first part of the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that more clearly introduces a result. Alternate translation: “and then I” or “and when you do those things, I” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 6:18 ft65 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations καὶ 1 Here uses the word **And** to introduce another quote from the Old Testament, specifically from [2 Samuel 7:8](../2sa/07/08.md) and [2 Samuel 7:14](../2sa/07/14.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that clarifies that Paul is quoting from the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “Again, as you can read in the Scriptures,” or “Even more, as it is written,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 6:18 dks6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἔσομαι ὑμῖν εἰς πατέρα, καὶ ὑμεῖς ἔσεσθέ μοι εἰς υἱοὺς καὶ θυγατέρας 1 These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “I will be to you as a Father; yes, you will be to me as sons and daughters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) From ebceda3c3aa306513f6d359926b4c1db5ad64390 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 22:12:00 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 95/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 40 ++++++++++++++++++++-------------------- 1 file changed, 20 insertions(+), 20 deletions(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 7a77c1761f..2473f0ab1b 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 1:24 kv47 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, **for** connects the following statement as a reason for the previous two statements. Use a natural form in your language for connecting this statement to the previous ones as the reason. Alternate translation: “since” or “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1:24 cih8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἑστήκατε 1 Here, **stand firm** means to be steady, resolute, or established. Alternate translation: “you are well established” or “you are strong and steady” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1:24 xf2i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ & πίστει 1 Here, **in the faith** could mean: (1) “in regard to your faith.” In other words, the Corinthian believers are independent of Paul in regard to their faith. They are responsible only to God for what they believe and do. Alternate translation: “concerning your commitment to God” (2) “because of your faith.” In other words, the Corinthian believers continue to belong to God because of their faith, not because of Paul's authority. Alternate translation: “because you trust in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2:intro hy3h 0 # 2 Corinthians 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n3. Interrupted travel plans (1:15–2:13)\n * The interruption and the reason for it (1:15–2:4)\n * The person who caused grief (2:5–11)\n * Travel to Troas and Macedonia (2:12–13)\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * The fragrance of Christ (2:14–17)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The previous letter\n\nIn [2:3–4](../02/03.md), [9](../02/09.md), Paul refers to a letter that he had already written and sent to the Corinthians. While a few scholars think this letter is 1 Corinthians, most likely we do not have this previous letter. Paul acknowledges that this previous letter might have “grieved” them, but he wants them to know that he wrote the letter because of his love for them. In your translation, make sure that these verses refer to a letter that Paul previously wrote, not to 2 Corinthians. \n\n### “Grieving” others\n\nPaul refers to “sorrow,” “grief,” and “grieving” others multiple times in [2:1–8](../02/01.md). These words refer to how people who are close friends can “grieve” or hurt each other by what they say and do. These words do not refer to physically hurting someone. Rather, they refer to hurting someone emotionally. Paul acknowledges that his letter might have “grieved” them, and he also indicates that one of the Corinthians has “grieved” fellow believers. Consider a natural way to refer to one person hurting or injuring another person inside. \n\n### The person who caused grief\n\nIn [2:5–11](../02/05.md), Paul refers to a person who has caused grief. Almost certainly, he has one specific person in mind. Paul is not clear about what this person did to cause the grief. He or she may have committed a sexual sin or stolen money from the church or opposed Paul’s authority. Whatever the person did, Paul chooses not to be specific about the person or what he or she did. Perhaps this is because he wants the Corinthians to forgive and show love to this person now that he or she has been properly disciplined by the church. In your translation, use general words for both the person and what the person did. \n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Aroma and fragrance\n\nIn [2:14–16](../02/14.md), Paul identifies himself and those who serve with him as an “aroma” or “fragrance.” Paul could be thinking in general of smells and odors, or he could be referring to the smell from incense and sacrifices offered during a “triumphal procession” (see [2:14](../02/14.md)), or he could be referring to the smell from sacrifices offered at the temple. Whatever exact smells Paul has in mind, he is clear that he and those with him are a smell that comes from Christ, and people react to it very differently: some think it is the smell of death, while others think it is the smell of life. Paul speaks in this way because smells spread throughout a whole area, and people have to react to them. Just like the spread of smells, he and those with him spread the gospel throughout the world, and people have to respond to it. Further, just as some people like a smell and others hate it, so some people believe the gospel and receive life from God, while others reject the gospel and perish. If possible, preserve the “aroma” and “fragrance” language. If necessary, you could use a simile to express the idea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Paul’s use of pronouns\n\nIn [2:1–13](../02/01.md), Paul consistently uses the first person singular to refer to himself and the second person plural to refer to the Corinthians. The only exception is in [2:11](../02/11.md), where Paul uses “we” to refer to himself and the Corinthians. However, in [2:14–17](../02/14.md), Paul uses “we” to refer to himself and those preaching the gospel with him. In these verses, “we” does not include the Corinthians. It is unclear exactly whom Paul includes in “we”: it could be just he and Titus, or he and the group that works with him, or he and everyone else who preaches the gospel. Consider natural ways to represent these changes in reference throughout the chapter. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### Paul’s travel\n\nIn [2:12–13](../02/12.md), Paul describes some of his travels. Troas is a city on the west coast of what is now Turkey. Since Troas was a port city, most likely Paul sailed from there to Macedonia, which is the northern part of what is now Greece. Since Corinth is in southern Greece, Paul was not too far away from the Corinthians. Paul continues the description of what happened in Macedonia in [7:5–7](../07/05.md). Consider what information your readers need to know to understand Paul’s travels, and include what is necessary in your translation or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/names/troas]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/names/macedonia]]) +2:intro hy3h 0 # 2 Corinthians 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n3. Interrupted travel plans (1:15–2:13)\n * The interruption and the reason for it (1:15–2:4)\n * The person who caused grief (2:5–11)\n * Travel to Troas and Macedonia (2:12–13)\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * The fragrance of Christ (2:14–17)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The previous letter\n\nIn [2:3–4](../02/03.md), [9](../02/09.md), Paul refers to a letter that he had already written and sent to the Corinthians. While a few scholars think this letter is 1 Corinthians, most likely we do not have this previous letter. Paul acknowledges that this previous letter might have “grieved” them, but he wants them to know that he wrote the letter because of his love for them. In your translation, make sure that these verses refer to a letter that Paul previously wrote, not to 2 Corinthians. \n\n### “Grieving” others\n\nPaul refers to “sorrow,” “grief,” and “grieving” others multiple times in [2:1–8](../02/01.md). These words refer to how people who are close friends can “grieve” or hurt each other by what they say and do. These words do not refer to physically hurting someone. Rather, they refer to hurting someone emotionally. Paul acknowledges that his letter might have “grieved” them, and he also indicates that one of the Corinthians has “grieved” fellow believers. Consider a natural way to refer to one person hurting or injuring another person inside. \n\n### The person who caused grief\n\nIn [2:5–11](../02/05.md), Paul refers to a person who has caused grief. Almost certainly, he has one specific person in mind. Paul is not clear about what this person did to cause the grief. He or she may have committed a sexual sin or stolen money from the church or opposed Paul’s authority. Whatever the person did, Paul chooses not to be specific about the person or what he or she did. Perhaps this is because he wants the Corinthians to forgive and show love to this person now that he or she has been properly disciplined by the church. In your translation, use general words for both the person and what the person did. \n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Aroma and fragrance\n\nIn [2:14–16](../02/14.md), Paul identifies himself and those who serve with him as an “aroma” or “fragrance.” Paul could be thinking in general of smells and odors, or he could be referring to the smell from incense and sacrifices offered during a “triumphal procession” (see [2:14](../02/14.md)), or he could be referring to the smell from sacrifices offered at the temple. Whatever exact smells Paul has in mind, he is clear that he and his fellow workers are a smell that comes from Christ, and people react to it very differently: some think it is the smell of death, while others think it is the smell of life. Paul speaks in this way because smells spread throughout a whole area, and people have to react to them. Just like the spread of smells, he and his fellow workers spread the gospel throughout the world, and people have to respond to it. Further, just as some people like a smell and others hate it, so some people believe the gospel and receive life from God, while others reject the gospel and perish. If possible, preserve the “aroma” and “fragrance” language. If necessary, you could use a simile to express the idea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Paul’s use of pronouns\n\nIn [2:1–13](../02/01.md), Paul consistently uses the first person singular to refer to himself and the second person plural to refer to the Corinthians. The only exception is in [2:11](../02/11.md), where Paul uses “we” to refer to himself and the Corinthians. However, in [2:14–17](../02/14.md), Paul uses “we” to refer to himself and those preaching the gospel with him. In these verses, “we” does not include the Corinthians. It is unclear exactly whom Paul includes in “we”: it could be just he and Titus, or he and the group that works with him, or he and everyone else who preaches the gospel. Consider natural ways to represent these changes in reference throughout the chapter. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### Paul’s travel\n\nIn [2:12–13](../02/12.md), Paul describes some of his travels. Troas is a city on the west coast of what is now Turkey. Since Troas was a port city, most likely Paul sailed from there to Macedonia, which is the northern part of what is now Greece. Since Corinth is in southern Greece, Paul was not too far away from the Corinthians. Paul continues the description of what happened in Macedonia in [7:5–7](../07/05.md). Consider what information your readers need to know to understand Paul’s travels, and include what is necessary in your translation or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/names/troas]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/names/macedonia]]) 2:1 wh9c rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of what Paul said in [1:23](../01/23.md) about the reason why he did not visit Corinth, which was to spare them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “Here is why I have not come to Corinth:” or “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 2:1 wpd4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐμαυτῷ τοῦτο τὸ μὴ 1 Here, the word **this** refers ahead to what Paul is about to say: **not to come to you again in sorrow**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **this** refers to explicit, or you could rephrase the sentence so that you do not use **this**. Alternate translation: “for myself what follows: not” or “for myself not” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2:1 yz5q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐμαυτῷ 1 Here the phrase **for myself** indicates that Paul made this choice because of reasons he thought about. In other words, he was not forced to make this choice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that someone made their own choice or decision. Alternate translation: “on my own” or “in my own mind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -209,28 +209,28 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 2:14 s6k3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a new section. Paul will not speak again about Titus and his travel plans until [7:5](../07/05.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section or topic, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “But now,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 2:14 g39s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations τῷ & Θεῷ χάρις 1 Here, the phrase **thanks {be} to God** is an exclamatory phrase that communicates Paul’s thankfulness. Use an exclamation form that is natural in your language for communicating thanks. Alternate translation: “we thank God” or “we give glory to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) 2:14 qgok rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς & ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **us** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “us who preach … us” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “me … me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -2:14 gpd2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῷ πάντοτε θριαμβεύοντι ἡμᾶς 1 Here Paul speaks as if **God** were a leader who had won a victory and set up a parade or **triumphal procession** to celebrate. In this parade, Paul and those with him could be either or both of the following: (1) prisoners who have been conquered and who are put in the parade to illustrate the victory. This is the normal meaning of the word in other places. Alternate translation: “always parading us as his captives” or “always showing that he leads us” (2) soldiers who helped win the victory and who are celebrating. This is not the normal meaning of the word, but it is possible and fits the context well. Alternate translation: “always having us participate in his triumphal parade” or “always helping us to conquer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2:14 gpd2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῷ πάντοτε θριαμβεύοντι ἡμᾶς 1 Here Paul speaks as if **God** were a leader who had won a victory and set up a parade or **triumphal procession** to celebrate. In this parade, Paul and his fellow workers could be either or both of the following: (1) prisoners who have been conquered and who are put in the parade to illustrate the victory. This is the normal meaning of the word in other places. Alternate translation: “always parading us as his captives” or “always showing that he leads us” (2) soldiers who helped win the victory and who are celebrating. This is not the normal meaning of the word, but it is possible and fits the context well. Alternate translation: “always having us participate in his triumphal parade” or “always helping us to conquer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2:14 so2k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ Χριστῷ 1 Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains why or how they are involved in the **triumphal procession**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that union with Christ is the reason or the means for participating in the **procession**. Alternate translation: “because of our union with Christ” or “by means of our union with Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2:14 l1nr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor τὴν ὀσμὴν τῆς γνώσεως αὐτοῦ, φανεροῦντι δι’ ἡμῶν ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ 1 Here Paul speaks as if **the knowledge of him** were an **aroma**, a smell or odor. In this case, the context implies that this is a pleasing or good smell. He speaks in this way to indicate that everyone hears and reacts to the message about Christ, just like everyone smells and reacts to a strong odor. Also, just like a smell fills a whole room, so the good news fills **every place** on earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a simile or plain language. Consider using a form that you can continue to use in the following two verses, in which Paul continues the **aroma** metaphor. Alternate translation: “making known through us and in every place the knowledge of him, which is like an good smell” or “powerfully revealing through us the knowledge of him, which is spreading into every place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) 2:14 tlqe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὴν ὀσμὴν τῆς γνώσεως αὐτοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe an **aroma** that is **knowledge**. In other words, the possessive indicates what the **aroma** stands for. Then, Paul indicates that this **knowledge** is about **him**, meaning Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the aroma, which is knowledge about him” or “the aroma, that is, knowing him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2:14 ihbw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς γνώσεως αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **knowledge**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “know.” Alternate translation: “that is knowing him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2:14 lxlc rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ 1 Here, the word **him** could refer to: (1) God generally. Alternate translation: “of God” (2) Christ specifically. Alternate translation: “of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -2:14 eq21 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ 1 Here Paul speaks as if God used him and those with him to make God known **in every place**. The Corinthians would have understood him to mean that God uses them to make God known in many places, or in every place that they visit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea clearer. Alternate translation: “in every place we go” or “throughout the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +2:14 eq21 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ 1 Here Paul speaks as if God used him and his fellow workers to make God known **in every place**. The Corinthians would have understood him to mean that God uses them to make God known in many places, or in every place that they visit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea clearer. Alternate translation: “in every place we go” or “throughout the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 2:15 cjjj rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ὅτι 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse about “the aroma” ([2:14](../02/14.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “Here is what I mean:” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 2:15 yfx6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἐσμὲν 1 Here, just as in [2:14](../02/14.md), the word **we** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach are” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I am” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -2:15 x6nn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor Χριστοῦ εὐωδία ἐσμὲν τῷ Θεῷ 1 Here Paul continues to speak about **fragrance** and good smells (see [2:14](../02/14.md)). He identifies himself and those with him as a **fragrance** that comes from **Christ** and which goes toward **God**. By speaking in this way, he shows that **we** are those who represent or declare who Christ is in the presence of God. Just like everyone smells a good smell and knows where it comes from, so everyone notices Paul and those with him and realizes that they represent **Christ** before **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea in plain language. Make sure that your translation fits with the previous and the following verses. Alternate translation: “we are like a good odor that spreads from Christ before God” or “we represent Christ before God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +2:15 x6nn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor Χριστοῦ εὐωδία ἐσμὲν τῷ Θεῷ 1 Here Paul continues to speak about **fragrance** and good smells (see [2:14](../02/14.md)). He identifies himself and his fellow workers as a **fragrance** that comes from **Christ** and which goes toward **God**. By speaking in this way, he shows that **we** are those who represent or declare who Christ is in the presence of God. Just like everyone smells a good smell and knows where it comes from, so everyone notices Paul and his fellow workers and realizes that they represent **Christ** before **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea in plain language. Make sure that your translation fits with the previous and the following verses. Alternate translation: “we are like a good odor that spreads from Christ before God” or “we represent Christ before God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) 2:15 b1k1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession Χριστοῦ εὐωδία 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to indicate that the **fragrance** could: (1) come or spread from **Christ**. Alternate translation: “a fragrance from Christ” (2) be presented or offered by **Christ**. Alternate translation: “a fragrance that Christ presents” or “a fragrance that Christ offers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2:15 itc8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοῖς σῳζομένοις 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “the ones whom God is saving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2:15 ze7n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo τοῖς ἀπολλυμένοις 1 Christians disagree over whether God causes people to “perish” or whether people cause themselves to “perish.” The word that Paul uses here intentionally does not include the person who causes the **perishing**. If possible, your translation also should avoid stating who causes the “perishing.” Alternate translation: “the ones on the path to destruction” or “the ones who are not being saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) 2:16 zrae rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast οἷς μὲν & οἷς δὲ 1 Here, the word translated as **indeed** indicates that the author is introducing the first of two parts. The word **but** introduces the second part. The author uses this form to contrast “the ones perishing” and “the ones being saved” (see [2:15](../02/15.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally contrasts two groups of people. Alternate translation: “on one hand, to the ones … but on the other hand, to the others” or “to the ones … but to the others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 2:16 pv6o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οἷς μὲν ὀσμὴ ἐκ θανάτου εἰς θάνατον, οἷς δὲ ὀσμὴ ἐκ ζωῆς εἰς ζωήν 1 Here Paul refers to “the ones perishing” before he refers to “the ones being saved,” which is the opposite of the order he used in [2:15](../02/15.md). This was good style in his culture. If reversing the order from [2:15](../02/15.md) would be confusing for your readers, and if it would not be good style, you could reverse the order here to match that in [2:15](../02/15.md). Alternate translation: “to the ones indeed, an aroma from life to life, but to the others, an aroma from death to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 2:16 t3vw rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἷς -1 Here, the phrase **to the ones** refers to “the ones perishing,” and the phrase **to the {others}** refers to “the ones being saved” (see [2:15](../02/15.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify to whom these phrases refer. Alternate translation: “to the latter … to the former” or “to the ones perishing … to the ones being saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -2:16 dwk6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor ὀσμὴ -1 Here Paul continues to speak about **fragrance** and good smells (see [2:14–15](../02/14.md)). He specifically explains what kind of **aroma** he and those with him are. Those who do not believe think that the **aroma** smells bad, while those who do believe think that the **aroma** smells good. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Make sure that your translation fits with how you translated the “smelling” language in [2:14–15](../02/14.md). Alternate translation: “we smell like an aroma … we smell like an aroma” or “our message is … our message is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +2:16 dwk6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor ὀσμὴ -1 Here Paul continues to speak about **fragrance** and good smells (see [2:14–15](../02/14.md)). He specifically explains what kind of **aroma** he and his fellow workers are. Those who do not believe think that the **aroma** smells bad, while those who do believe think that the **aroma** smells good. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Make sure that your translation fits with how you translated the “smelling” language in [2:14–15](../02/14.md). Alternate translation: “we smell like an aroma … we smell like an aroma” or “our message is … our message is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) 2:16 ud2u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκ θανάτου εἰς θάνατον & ἐκ ζωῆς εἰς ζωήν 1 Here Paul uses the words **from** and **to** with the same word. He could be using this form because: (1) **from** indicates the source of the **aroma**, and **to** indicates the effects of the **aroma**. Alternate translation: “that smells like death and leads to death … that smells like life and leads to life” or “of death causing death … of life causing life” (2) **from** and **to** together emphasize that the **aroma** is characterized completely by either **death** or **life**. Alternate translation: “of death … of life” or “characterized completely by death … characterized completely by life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2:16 yau5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐκ θανάτου εἰς θάνατον & ἐκ ζωῆς εἰς ζωήν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **death** and **life**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “die” and “live” or adjectives such as “dead” and “alive.” Make sure your translation fits with the option you chose in the previous note. Alternate translation: “that comes from something dying and that leads to people dying … that comes from something living and leads to people living” or “that smells like something dead … that smells like something alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2:16 cdr3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns πρὸς ταῦτα 1 Here, the phrase **these things** refers back to what those who proclaim the good news must do, things that Paul has outlined in [2:14–16](../02/14.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to what **these things** refers. Alternate translation: “to do what I have said” or “to preach the gospel like this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -2:16 be6x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πρὸς ταῦτα τίς ἱκανός? 1 Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question could imply that the answer is that: (1) no one is **sufficient**. Alternate translation: “for these things, nobody is sufficient!” (2) Paul and those with him are **sufficient**. Alternate translation: “for these things, we are indeed sufficient” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -2:17 h7y1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γάρ 1 Here, the word **For** could introduce: (1) a basis or proof for why he and those with him are not “sufficient,” as the previous question implied (see [2:16](../02/16.md)). Alternate translation: “You can tell that we are not sufficient because” (2) an answer to the previous question that indicates that Paul and those with him are “sufficient.” Alternate translation: “But we are sufficient, because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +2:16 be6x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πρὸς ταῦτα τίς ἱκανός? 1 Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question could imply that the answer is that: (1) no one is **sufficient**. Alternate translation: “for these things, nobody is sufficient!” (2) Paul and his fellow workers are **sufficient**. Alternate translation: “for these things, we are indeed sufficient” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +2:17 h7y1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γάρ 1 Here, the word **For** could introduce: (1) a basis or proof for why he and his fellow workers are not “sufficient,” as the previous question implied (see [2:16](../02/16.md)). Alternate translation: “You can tell that we are not sufficient because” (2) an answer to the previous question that indicates that Paul and his fellow workers are “sufficient.” Alternate translation: “But we are sufficient, because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2:17 pmpz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἐσμεν & λαλοῦμεν 1 Here, just as in [2:14–15](../02/14.md), the word **we** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach are … we speak” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I am … I speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 2:17 a5sa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Here, the word **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the words” or “the communication” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2:17 u7ui rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj οἱ πολλοὶ 1 Paul is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to refer **many** people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the many people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) @@ -238,20 +238,20 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 2:17 ohh8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the word** that could be: (1) from **God**. Alternate translation: “the word from God” (2) about **God**. Alternate translation: “the word about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2:17 u4iy rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ ὡς -1 Here Paul uses **but as** to introduce a contrast with **the many** who “peddle” God’s word. Paul repeats **but as** to continue and emphasize this contrast, not to contrast **sincerity** and **from God**. If the repetition of **but as** would be confusing, you could use **but as** once and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “but instead as … and even more as” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 2:17 x86y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐξ εἰλικρινείας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sincerity**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “sincere.” Alternate translation: “those who are sincere” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2:17 f9x4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς ἐκ Θεοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **as from God** indicates that God sent Paul and those with him to **speak** the gospel. The word **as** indicates how they **speak**. It does not mean that they are not really **from God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “as those whom God has sent” or “as ones sent by God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2:17 f9x4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς ἐκ Θεοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **as from God** indicates that God sent Paul and his fellow workers to **speak** the gospel. The word **as** indicates how they **speak**. It does not mean that they are not really **from God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “as those whom God has sent” or “as ones sent by God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2:17 aizg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit λαλοῦμεν 1 Here, Paul implies that they are speaking **the word of God** that he already mentioned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what they **speak** more explicit. Alternate translation: “we speak the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2:17 vpdc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατέναντι Θεοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **in the presence of God** could indicate that: (1) they **speak** as they do because they know that **God** sees or knows what they do. So, they speak in a way that pleases **God**. Alternate translation: “as God desires” or “with God watching” (2) they **speak** with **God** as a witness guaranteeing what they say. Alternate translation: “with God as witness” or “with God guaranteeing it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2:17 u2zb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ 1 Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with **Christ**. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains how they **speak**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that they **speak** as those who are united to **Christ**. Alternate translation: “as Christians” or “as those united to Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 3:1 mdwx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἀρχόμεθα & ἑαυτοὺς & μὴ χρῄζομεν 1 Here, just as in [2:14–15](../02/14.md), [17](../02/17.md), the word **we** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “Are we who preach beginning … ourselves … we do not need … do we” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “Am I beginning … myself … I do not need … do I” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -3:intro f7rh 0 # 2 Corinthians 3 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * Qualification for ministry (3:1–6)\n * Ministry of Moses and ministry of Paul (3:7–4:6)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Letters of recommendation\n\nIn [3:1–3](../03/01.md), Paul refers to “letters of recommendation.” These were letters that a person carried with them when they traveled to a new place. Someone that the traveler knew would write that the traveler could be trusted and should be welcomed, and the traveler would give this letter to people that he or she visited. If something like this is not a common practice in your culture, you may need to explain it for your readers in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/letter]])\n\n### Letter and Spirit\n\nIn [3:6–8](../03/06.md), Paul contrasts “letter” and “Spirit.” In these verses, the word “letter” refers to written characters, and the word “Spirit” refers to the Holy Spirit. Paul’s point is that whatever is characterized by the “letter” is something that is only written down and does not have any power. Whatever is characterized by the “Spirit” has power and can change people. Although it also might be written down, the “Spirit” gives it power. Paul uses this contrast to describe one of the differences between the old covenant (“letter”) and the new covenant (“Spirit”). Consider a natural way to express this contrast in your language. \n\n### Glory\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul speaks extensively of “glory.” He indicates that the old covenant and ministry had glory, but the new covenant and ministry have much more glory. The word “glory” refers to how great, powerful, and amazing someone or something is. Consider how to express this idea throughout the chapter. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]])\n\n### Veiling of the glory on Moses’ face\n\nIn [3:7](../03/07.md), [13](../03/13.md), Paul refers to a story about what happened when Moses received the Ten Commandments from God. Because he met God and spoke with him, Moses’ face became bright or shining. Because of that, Moses would cover his face with a veil or cloth when he was with the Israelites after he spoke with God. You can read this story in [Exodus 34:29–35](../exo/34/29.md). Paul also notes that the brightness or “glory” on Moses’ face would fade away. This detail cannot be found directly in the story in Exodus. Paul either inferred it from the story, or it was tradition to say that the “glory” faded away. If your readers would not understand what Paul refers to in these verses, you could include a footnote or explanatory information. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/veil]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### The Corinthians as a letter of recommendation\n\nIn [3:2–3](../03/02.md), Paul describes the Corinthians themselves as a letter of recommendation for him and those with him. He speaks in this way because anyone who knows the Corinthians will know that they believed because of Paul and those who worked with him. In this way, the Corinthians “recommend” Paul as a true apostle of Jesus. If possible, preserve the metaphor of a letter of recommendation or express the idea with a simile. \n\n### The “veil”\n\nAfter he introduces how Moses put an actual “veil” over his face, Paul begins to use the word “veil” and related words in figurative ways (see [3:14–18](../03/14.md)). He claims that people who are not united to Christ cannot understand the Old Testament, and he describes this inability to understand as a “veil” that covers their hearts. In other words, just as the the veil obscured the glory on Moses’ face, so the meaning of the Old Testament is obscured for someone who hears it but does not believe in Jesus. However, \nPaul says that this “veil” is taken away when someone believes in Jesus. Because of that, those who believe have no “veil” and can reflect God’s glory even more than Moses’ did. This is a complex figure of speech that connects directly to the story about Moses and his veil. Because of that, it is important to preserve the “veil” language. If your readers would not understand that Paul is speaking figuratively, you could use a simile to express the idea. \n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “The Lord is the Spirit”\n\nIn [3:17](../03/17.md), Paul states that “the Lord is the Spirit.” Scholars have understood this sentence in three primary ways. First, Paul could be defining who he meant when he referred to “the Lord” in the previous verse ([3:16](../03/16.md)). Second, Paul could be stating that the way that believers experience “the Lord” is as the Holy Spirit. Third, Paul could be stating that “the Lord” is a spirit or is spiritual. It is most likely true that Paul is defining who “the Lord” he has referred to is, so it is recommended that you follow the first option. See the notes on this verse for translation possibilities. +3:intro f7rh 0 # 2 Corinthians 3 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * Qualification for ministry (3:1–6)\n * Ministry of Moses and ministry of Paul (3:7–4:6)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Letters of recommendation\n\nIn [3:1–3](../03/01.md), Paul refers to “letters of recommendation.” These were letters that a person carried with them when they traveled to a new place. Someone that the traveler knew would write that the traveler could be trusted and should be welcomed, and the traveler would give this letter to people that he or she visited. If something like this is not a common practice in your culture, you may need to explain it for your readers in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/letter]])\n\n### Letter and Spirit\n\nIn [3:6–8](../03/06.md), Paul contrasts “letter” and “Spirit.” In these verses, the word “letter” refers to written characters, and the word “Spirit” refers to the Holy Spirit. Paul’s point is that whatever is characterized by the “letter” is something that is only written down and does not have any power. Whatever is characterized by the “Spirit” has power and can change people. Although it also might be written down, the “Spirit” gives it power. Paul uses this contrast to describe one of the differences between the old covenant (“letter”) and the new covenant (“Spirit”). Consider a natural way to express this contrast in your language. \n\n### Glory\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul speaks extensively of “glory.” He indicates that the old covenant and ministry had glory, but the new covenant and ministry have much more glory. The word “glory” refers to how great, powerful, and amazing someone or something is. Consider how to express this idea throughout the chapter. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]])\n\n### Veiling of the glory on Moses’ face\n\nIn [3:7](../03/07.md), [13](../03/13.md), Paul refers to a story about what happened when Moses received the Ten Commandments from God. Because he met God and spoke with him, Moses’ face became bright or shining. Because of that, Moses would cover his face with a veil or cloth when he was with the Israelites after he spoke with God. You can read this story in [Exodus 34:29–35](../exo/34/29.md). Paul also notes that the brightness or “glory” on Moses’ face would fade away. This detail cannot be found directly in the story in Exodus. Paul either inferred it from the story, or it was tradition to say that the “glory” faded away. If your readers would not understand what Paul refers to in these verses, you could include a footnote or explanatory information. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/veil]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### The Corinthians as a letter of recommendation\n\nIn [3:2–3](../03/02.md), Paul describes the Corinthians themselves as a letter of recommendation for him and his fellow workers. He speaks in this way because anyone who knows the Corinthians will know that they believed because of Paul and those who worked with him. In this way, the Corinthians “recommend” Paul as a true apostle of Jesus. If possible, preserve the metaphor of a letter of recommendation or express the idea with a simile. \n\n### The “veil”\n\nAfter he introduces how Moses put an actual “veil” over his face, Paul begins to use the word “veil” and related words in figurative ways (see [3:14–18](../03/14.md)). He claims that people who are not united to Christ cannot understand the Old Testament, and he describes this inability to understand as a “veil” that covers their hearts. In other words, just as the the veil obscured the glory on Moses’ face, so the meaning of the Old Testament is obscured for someone who hears it but does not believe in Jesus. However, \nPaul says that this “veil” is taken away when someone believes in Jesus. Because of that, those who believe have no “veil” and can reflect God’s glory even more than Moses’ did. This is a complex figure of speech that connects directly to the story about Moses and his veil. Because of that, it is important to preserve the “veil” language. If your readers would not understand that Paul is speaking figuratively, you could use a simile to express the idea. \n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “The Lord is the Spirit”\n\nIn [3:17](../03/17.md), Paul states that “the Lord is the Spirit.” Scholars have understood this sentence in three primary ways. First, Paul could be defining who he meant when he referred to “the Lord” in the previous verse ([3:16](../03/16.md)). Second, Paul could be stating that the way that believers experience “the Lord” is as the Holy Spirit. Third, Paul could be stating that “the Lord” is a spirit or is spiritual. It is most likely true that Paul is defining who “the Lord” he has referred to is, so it is recommended that you follow the first option. See the notes on this verse for translation possibilities. 3:1 um8x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἀρχόμεθα πάλιν ἑαυτοὺς συνιστάνειν? 1 Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question implies that the answer is “no, we are not.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “We are certainly not beginning to commend ourselves again!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -3:1 fuds rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάλιν 1 Here, the word **again** implies that Paul and those with him had already “commended themselves” at some point in the past. Most likely, this happened when they first met the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this more explicit. Alternate translation: “once more” or “again, like we did at first” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:1 fuds rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάλιν 1 Here, the word **again** implies that Paul and his fellow workers had already “commended themselves” at some point in the past. Most likely, this happened when they first met the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this more explicit. Alternate translation: “once more” or “again, like we did at first” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:1 noiz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἢ 1 The word **Or** introduces an alternative to what Paul asked in the first question. In that question, he implied that they were not “commending” themselves again. With **Or**, then, Paul poses a question that introduces the incorrect alternative: they might need **letters of recommendation**. He introduces this incorrect alternative to show that the implication of his first question is true: they are not “commending” themselves again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Or** with a word that signifies a contrast or gives an alternative. Alternate translation: “Rather,” or “On the contrary,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 3:1 y8yc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἢ μὴ χρῄζομεν, ὥς τινες, συστατικῶν ἐπιστολῶν πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἢ ἐξ ὑμῶν? 1 Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question implies that the answer is “we do not need them.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “In fact, we certainly do not need, like some, letters of recommendation to you or from you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -3:1 syny rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὥς τινες 1 Here, the word **some** refers generally to people other than Paul and those with him. Paul may more specifically have in mind the people who opposed him in Corinth, but he does not make this explicit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to people other than Paul and those who serve with him. Alternate translation: “like some others” or “like some people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +3:1 syny rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὥς τινες 1 Here, the word **some** refers generally to people other than Paul and his fellow workers. Paul may more specifically have in mind the people who opposed him in Corinth, but he does not make this explicit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to people other than Paul and those who serve with him. Alternate translation: “like some others” or “like some people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 3:1 ad1u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession συστατικῶν ἐπιστολῶν 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to refer to **letters** that gave a **recommendation** for the person who carry the letter. Many people in Paul’s culture would ask friends to write these letters, and then they would show the letters to people they visited to prove that they were trustworthy and could be welcomed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally refers to this kind of letter. Alternate translation: “letters of reference ” or “letters of introduction” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:1 dygq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns συστατικῶν ἐπιστολῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **recommendation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “recommend.” Alternate translation: “letters that recommend us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -3:2 ty59 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἡμῶν ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐνγεγραμμένη ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν, γινωσκομένη καὶ ἀναγινωσκομένη ὑπὸ πάντων ἀνθρώπων 1 Here Paul continues to speak about “letters,” but now he tells the Corinthians that they themselves are the **letter** of recommendation for Paul and those with him. This **letter** is not a physical document, but is **written** in their **hearts**, and **all men** can **read** it. Paul speaks in this way to indicate that the recommendation he relies on is the Corinthian believers. In other words, the fact that they believe and that they are close with Paul (**in our hearts**) shows that Paul is trustworthy and a true apostle. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a simile or in some other natural way. Alternate translation: “You yourselves are like our letter of recommendation, which you wrote on us and that is known and read by all men” or “We do not need a letter of recommendation because you yourselves are the recommendation that is in our hearts and that is known and understood by all men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +3:2 ty59 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἡμῶν ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐνγεγραμμένη ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν, γινωσκομένη καὶ ἀναγινωσκομένη ὑπὸ πάντων ἀνθρώπων 1 Here Paul continues to speak about “letters,” but now he tells the Corinthians that they themselves are the **letter** of recommendation for Paul and his fellow workers. This **letter** is not a physical document, but is **written** in their **hearts**, and **all men** can **read** it. Paul speaks in this way to indicate that the recommendation he relies on is the Corinthian believers. In other words, the fact that they believe and that they are close with Paul (**in our hearts**) shows that Paul is trustworthy and a true apostle. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a simile or in some other natural way. Alternate translation: “You yourselves are like our letter of recommendation, which you wrote on us and that is known and read by all men” or “We do not need a letter of recommendation because you yourselves are the recommendation that is in our hearts and that is known and understood by all men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 3:2 f8s8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ὑμεῖς ἐστε 1 Here, the word translated **yourselves** emphasizes **You**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **You** in your language. Alternate translation: “You indeed are” or “It is you who are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 3:2 a7xl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἡμῶν & ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν 1 Here, just as in [3:1](../03/01.md), the word **our** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “the letter for us who preach the gospel … our hearts” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “my letter … my heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 3:2 ygx8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἡμῶν & ἐνγεγραμμένη 1 With the phrase **our letter**, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **letter** that could: (1) recommend “us.” Alternate translation: “the letter for us written” or “a letter that recommends us written” (2) be written by “us.” Alternate translation: “a letter written by us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:2 pzpz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet γινωσκομένη καὶ ἀναγινωσκομένη 1 Here, the words **known** and **read** express very similar ideas. It is likely that **known** indicates that people are aware that there is a **letter**, while **read** indicates that they know what the **letter** says. If you do not have words that express these distinctions, and if the repetition would be confusing in your language, you could express the idea with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “read” or “noticed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 3:2 dr5k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations πάντων ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the word **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to all people, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that applies to both men and women or you could refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “every person” or “all men and women” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 3:3 s717 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit φανερούμενοι 1 Here, the phrase **making known** could: (1) indicate that something is well-known or obvious to people. Alternate translation: “being clear” or “so it is evident” (2) state that the Corinthians show or reveal something to others. Alternate translation: “you making it clear” or “you revealing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -3:3 aylw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐστὲ ἐπιστολὴ Χριστοῦ, διακονηθεῖσα ὑφ’ ἡμῶν, ἐνγεγραμμένη οὐ μέλανι, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ζῶντος, οὐκ ἐν πλαξὶν λιθίναις, ἀλλ’ ἐν πλαξὶν καρδίαις σαρκίναις 1 Here Paul continues to speak as if the Corinthians were a **letter**. Here, he states that this **letter** was written by **Christ** and **administered** by Paul and those with him. He means that **Christ** is the one who enabled the Corinthians to believe, and **Christ** worked through Paul and those with him to do that. Paul then contrasts a **letter** written with **ink** and on **tablets of stone** with a **letter** written by the power of the **Spirit** and on **hearts of flesh**. What he means by this is that the letter is the Corinthians, not some written document, and that the message is communicated by the **Spirit**, not by letters written with **ink**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a simile or in some other natural way. Alternate translation: “you are like a letter of Christ having been administered by us, not written with ink but as if with the Spirit of the living God, not on tablets of stone but as if on tablets of hearts of flesh” or “you are a message from Christ having been administered by us, not communicated by ink but by the Spirit of the living God, not presented on tablets of stone but on tablets of hearts of flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +3:3 aylw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐστὲ ἐπιστολὴ Χριστοῦ, διακονηθεῖσα ὑφ’ ἡμῶν, ἐνγεγραμμένη οὐ μέλανι, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ζῶντος, οὐκ ἐν πλαξὶν λιθίναις, ἀλλ’ ἐν πλαξὶν καρδίαις σαρκίναις 1 Here Paul continues to speak as if the Corinthians were a **letter**. Here, he states that this **letter** was written by **Christ** and **administered** by Paul and his fellow workers. He means that **Christ** is the one who enabled the Corinthians to believe, and **Christ** worked through Paul and his fellow workers to do that. Paul then contrasts a **letter** written with **ink** and on **tablets of stone** with a **letter** written by the power of the **Spirit** and on **hearts of flesh**. What he means by this is that the letter is the Corinthians, not some written document, and that the message is communicated by the **Spirit**, not by letters written with **ink**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a simile or in some other natural way. Alternate translation: “you are like a letter of Christ having been administered by us, not written with ink but as if with the Spirit of the living God, not on tablets of stone but as if on tablets of hearts of flesh” or “you are a message from Christ having been administered by us, not communicated by ink but by the Spirit of the living God, not presented on tablets of stone but on tablets of hearts of flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 3:3 hlap rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐπιστολὴ Χριστοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to indicate that the **letter** is from or written by **Christ**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a letter from Christ” or “a letter written by Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:3 wrk4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive διακονηθεῖσα ὑφ’ ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that we have administered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 3:3 dsxa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διακονηθεῖσα ὑφ’ ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **having been administered by us** could indicate that: (1) “we” delivered the **letter**. Alternate translation: “having been delivered by us” or “having been sent by us” (2) “we” helped **Christ** compose the **letter**. Alternate translation: “having been composed with our help” or “that we wrote down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:4 wy6e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἔχομεν 1 Here, just as in [3:1–3](../03/01.md), the word **we** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach the gospel have” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 3:4 z7qx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πεποίθησιν & τοιαύτην ἔχομεν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **confidence**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “confident.” Alternate translation: “we are confident in this way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:4 q0kr rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns πεποίθησιν & τοιαύτην 1 Here, the word **such** indicates that the **confidence** is the kind that Paul showed in the previous verses, especially in [3:1–3](../03/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clearer that **such** refers back to what Paul has said in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “that kind of confidence” or “confidence in those ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -3:4 y72k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πρὸς τὸν Θεόν 1 Here, the phrase **toward God** could indicate that the **confidence** is: (1) before or in the presence of **God**. In other words, Paul has **confidence** that God approves of him and those with him. Alternate translation: “with regard to God” (2) in **God**. In other words, Paul has **confidence** that God will do what he has promised. Alternate translation: “in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:4 y72k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πρὸς τὸν Θεόν 1 Here, the phrase **toward God** could indicate that the **confidence** is: (1) before or in the presence of **God**. In other words, Paul has **confidence** that God approves of him and his fellow workers. Alternate translation: “with regard to God” (2) in **God**. In other words, Paul has **confidence** that God will do what he has promised. Alternate translation: “in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:5 knf2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast οὐχ 1 Here, the word **Not** introduces a contrast with what Paul said in the previous verse about **confidence** (see [3:4](../03/04.md)). He wishes to clarify that the **confidence** is not based on human abilities but on **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “But it is not” or “However, it is not” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 3:5 i7nt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἑαυτῶν & ἐσμεν & ἑαυτῶν & ἡμῶν 1 Here, just as in [3:1–4](../03/01.md), the words **we**, **ourselves**, and **our** do not include the Corinthians. They could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach the gospel are … ourselves … ourselves … our” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I am … myself … myself … my” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 3:5 qye9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀφ’ ἑαυτῶν ἱκανοί & ἡ ἱκανότης ἡμῶν 1 Here Paul does not state what they are not **sufficient** to do. He implies that it is serving God by preaching the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “sufficient from ourselves to preach the gospel … our sufficiency for this task” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -287,7 +287,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:5 tws9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τι 1 Here, the word **anything** refers to whatever they do to serve God well. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “anything we do preach the gospel” or “whatever we do well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:5 wi1t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἱκανότης ἡμῶν ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sufficiency**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “sufficient.” Alternate translation: “God makes us sufficient” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:6 t785 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς διακόνους 1 Here, just as in [3:1–5](../03/01.md), the word **us** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “us, who preach the gospel, … as servants” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “me … as a servant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -3:6 r5ea rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession διακόνους καινῆς διαθήκης 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify himself and those with him as **servants** who “serve” for the benefit of **a new covenant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “as those who serve a new covenant” or “as servants who administer a new covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +3:6 r5ea rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession διακόνους καινῆς διαθήκης 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify himself and his fellow workers as **servants** who “serve” for the benefit of **a new covenant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “as those who serve a new covenant” or “as servants who administer a new covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:6 j8rd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οὐ γράμματος, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματος 1 If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two clauses here. Alternate translation: “of the Spirit, not of the letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 3:6 poyq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ γράμματος, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματος 1 When Paul contrasts **letter** and **Spirit**, he implies that **letter** describes the old covenant and **Spirit** describes the new covenant. What he means is that the old covenant was only written down and could not change people on the inside. On the other hand, the new covenant is empowered by the Holy **Spirit**, who can change people on the inside. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this contrast more explicit. Alternate translation: “not a covenant of the letter that is powerless but a covenant of the powerful Spirit” or “not one that is only written down but one that the Spirit puts inside people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:6 dp6i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy γράμματος & τὸ & γράμμα 1 Here, the word **letter** refers generally to a message written using sound-symbols called letters. More specifically, Paul uses the word **letter** to refer to the old covenant, a written document. It could not change people like the **Spirit** can. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a message written in “letters”. Alternate translation: “in written form … what was written” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:8 xxn6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πῶς οὐχὶ μᾶλλον ἡ διακονία τοῦ Πνεύματος ἔσται ἐν δόξῃ? 1 Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question implies that the answer is “yes, it has much more glory.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “then the ministry of the Spirit will certainly be with much more glory.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 3:8 wkvl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture οὐχὶ & ἔσται 1 Here Paul could use the future tense because: (1) he is stating an inference from something in the past, so the inference is future. Paul does not mean that the **ministry** will only have **glory** in the future. Alternate translation: “then is … not” (2) he is stating that the **ministry** will have **glory** in the future. He could mean that it only has **glory** in the future, or he could mean that it has **glory** in the present and will also have **glory** in the future. Alternate translation: “will … in the future not be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) 3:8 wq1v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡ διακονία τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the ministry** that could: (1) lead to people receiving the **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the ministry that provides the Spirit” or “the ministry that leads to the Spirit” (2) be accomplished by the **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the ministry worked by the Spirit” or “the ministry accomplished by the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -3:8 dhs5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ διακονία τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Here, the word **ministry** could refer primarily to: (1) the action of “ministering.” In this case, the word refers to how Paul and those with him “administered” the new covenant. Alternate translation: “the service of the Spirit” or “the act of ministering that leads to the Spirit” (2) the system of **ministry**. In this case, the word refers to the new covenant or its principles. Alternate translation: “the system of the Spirit” or “the principles that lead to the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:8 dhs5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ διακονία τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Here, the word **ministry** could refer primarily to: (1) the action of “ministering.” In this case, the word refers to how Paul and his fellow workers administered the new covenant. Alternate translation: “the service of the Spirit” or “the act of ministering that leads to the Spirit” (2) the system of **ministry**. In this case, the word refers to the new covenant or its principles. Alternate translation: “the system of the Spirit” or “the principles that lead to the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:8 bmme rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Here, the word **Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “of God’s Spirit” (2) the “spirit” of a person, or their mind or heart. Alternate translation: “of the spirit” or “of the heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:8 tcp5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μᾶλλον & ἐν δόξῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “much more great” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:9 m2ci rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces further explanation of what Paul has said about the two “ministries” in [3:7–8](../03/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “Even more,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) @@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:9 egmy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **ministry** that leads to **righteousness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that caused this righteousness” or “the ministry that ended in this righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:9 e5zz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πολλῷ μᾶλλον περισσεύει ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης δόξῃ. 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **righteousness** and **glory**, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that makes people righteous is even more great” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:10 q8bg rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ γὰρ 1 Here, the phrase **For indeed** indicates that Paul is adding more information that supports what he said about **glory** in [3:7–9](../03/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce added information that supports a previous statement. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “And in fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -3:10 n4pe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ δεδοξασμένον & τῆς ὑπερβαλλούσης δόξης 1 Here, the phrase **{what} had been glorified** refers to the old covenant that God gave through Moses. The phrase **surpassing glory** refers to the new covenant that Paul and those with him serve. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what these phrases refer to more explicit. Alternate translation: “the old covenant that was glorified … the surpassing glory of the new covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:10 n4pe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ δεδοξασμένον & τῆς ὑπερβαλλούσης δόξης 1 Here, the phrase **{what} had been glorified** refers to the old covenant that God gave through Moses. The phrase **surpassing glory** refers to the new covenant that Paul and his fellow workers serve. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what these phrases refer to more explicit. Alternate translation: “the old covenant that was glorified … the surpassing glory of the new covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:10 t2dq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ δεδόξασται, τὸ δεδοξασμένον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If possible, avoid stating who does the “glorifying,” since Paul is focusing on the fact of “glory” rather than on the action of becoming “glorious.” Alternate translation: “what had glory does not have glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 3:10 hmcu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οὐ δεδόξασται, τὸ δεδοξασμένον ἐν τούτῳ τῷ μέρει 1 Here, the phrase **in this part** could modify: (1) in what way the old covenant is **not glorified**. In other words, **in this part** introduces the way in which something that has **been glorified** can actually be **not glorified**. Alternate translation: “what had been glorified is not glorified, and here is why:” or “what had been glorified is not glorified in this way” (2) **{what} had been glorified**. In other words, the old covenant was **glorified** only “partially.” Alternate translation: “what had been glorified in part is not glorified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 3:10 es4c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν τούτῳ τῷ μέρει 1 Here, the phrase **in this part** indicates that a statement is only true in **part** or in some specific way. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the qualification that some statement or action is partially true or accurate. Alternate translation: “in a sense” or “in this way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -338,13 +338,13 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:11 wtht rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διὰ δόξης & ἐν δόξῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great” or an adverb such as “gloriously.” Alternate translation: “was great … is great” or “came gloriously … will come gloriously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:11 wrf4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations πολλῷ μᾶλλον τὸ μένον ἐν δόξῃ 1 Here, the phrase **much more** marks this clause as an exclamation, not a question. Paul uses this exclamation to emphatically contrast the two covenants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a way that naturally contrasts the two covenants. Alternate translation: “then certainly much more what remains will come with glory.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) 3:12 tnc1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an inference from what Paul has already said, especially what he has said about the ministry of “glory” in [3:4–11](../03/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference from a previous section. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “Because of this ministry of glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -3:12 ib35 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἔχοντες 1 Here, the word **having** introduces a reason why Paul and those with him **act with much boldness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “because we have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +3:12 ib35 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἔχοντες 1 Here, the word **having** introduces a reason why Paul and his fellow workers **act with much boldness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “because we have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 3:12 j76k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔχοντες & τοιαύτην ἐλπίδα 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hope**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “hope” or an adjective such as “hopeful.” Alternate translation: “being hopeful in such a way” or “hoping in that way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:12 u5qa rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τοιαύτην ἐλπίδα 1 Here, the word **such** refers to back to what Paul has said about the “glory” of the ministry in [3:7–11](../03/07.md). In other words, the **hope** is based on the glorious ministry and covenant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what **such** refers to. Alternate translation: “that kind of hope” or “hope in such a covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 3:12 rf9h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive χρώμεθα 1 Here, just as in [3:1–6](../03/01.md), the word **we** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach the gospel” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I act” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 3:12 zbff rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit χρώμεθα 1 Here Paul does not say exactly what it is that **we** do. He implies that it is the “ministry” that he has referred to in [3:7–11](../03/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **we** do more explicit. Alternate translation: “we perform the ministry” or “we proclaim the good news” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:12 b5ql rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πολλῇ παρρησίᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **boldness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “bold” or an adverb such as “boldly.” Alternate translation: “as very bold people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -3:13 fb59 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ οὐ καθάπερ Μωϋσῆς 1 Here Paul contrasts the **boldness** that he and those with him show with how **Moses** could not show God’s glory openly. In other words, Paul and those with him can reveal God’s glory openly, in contrast to Moses, who could not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this contrast more explicit. Alternate translation: “and without hiding the glory, like Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:13 fb59 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ οὐ καθάπερ Μωϋσῆς 1 Here Paul contrasts the **boldness** that he and his fellow workers show with how **Moses** could not show God’s glory openly. In other words, Paul and his fellow workers can reveal God’s glory openly, in contrast to Moses, who could not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this contrast more explicit. Alternate translation: “and without hiding the glory, like Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:13 p1y3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Μωϋσῆς ἐτίθει κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ, πρὸς τὸ μὴ ἀτενίσαι τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ, εἰς τὸ τέλος τοῦ καταργουμένου 1 Here Paul refers to a story in [Exodus 34:29–35](../exo/34/29.md) that describes how Moses’ face shone with God’s glory after Moses spoke with him. Moses would hide his face with a **veil** when **his face** shone like this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what Paul is writing about more explicit. See how you translated the similar phrases in [3:7](../03/07.md), where Paul has already referred to this story. Alternate translation: “Moses wearing a veil to hide his face so that the sons of Israel would not look directly at it when the glory on his face, which came from talking with God, was disappearing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:13 boui rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τοὺς υἱοὺς 1 Although the word **sons** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any children or descendants, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that applies to both men and women or you could refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “the sons and daughters” or “the children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 3:13 pdnk rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ 1 Here the author uses the word **sons** to refer in general to all the descendants of **Israel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to descendants in general. Alternate translation: “the descendants of Israel” or “those descended from Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) @@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:18 mw3v καθάπερ ἀπὸ 1 Here, the phrase **just as from** indicates the source of the transformation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “and this is from” or “even as it is accomplished by” 3:18 wlp1 Κυρίου, Πνεύματος 1 Here, Paul could be using this phrase to: (1) identify the **Lord** as the **Spirit**, as he did in [3:17](../03/17.md). Just as in that verse, he could mean that the **Lord** is the **Spirit**, or he could mean that the **Lord** is experienced as the **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the Lord, that is, the Spirit” or “the Lord, whom we experience as the Spirit” (2) name the Holy Spirit as “the Spirit of the Lord,” as he did in [3:17](../03/17.md). Alternate translation: “the Spirit of the Lord” (3) refer to the **Lord** to whom the **Spirit** belongs or who sends the **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the Lord of the Spirit” 3:18 mmdd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Πνεύματος 1 Here, the word **Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “God’s Spirit” (2) what is “spiritual” as opposed to what is written or fleshly. Alternate translation: “who is spiritual” or “who is a spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -4:intro rx1c 0 # 2 Corinthians 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * Ministry of Moses and ministry of Paul (3:7–4:6)\n * Suffering and ministry (4:7–18)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Life and death\n\nIn [4:7–14](../04/07.md), Paul refers to life, death, and resurrection. When he refers to how he and those with him experience “death” or “dying,” he is referring to how they suffer and experience things related to death. When he refers to how he and those with him experience “life” or being “raised,” he is most likely referring to how God will resurrect them. He could also be referring to how God delivers them from “death” when they suffer or are persecuted. Consider what forms you could use to refer to experiences related to death and resurrection. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/life]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/death]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Light and darkness\n\nIn [4:3–6](../04/03.md), Paul describes a lack of understanding and belief in the gospel as “veiling,” “blinding,” and “darkness.” He describes understanding and belief in the gospel as “shining” and “light.” These figures of speech compare believing and understanding to seeing. If possible, preserve these figures of speech, but you could express the ideas in plain language if necessary. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/light]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/darkness]])\n\n### “Outer” and “inner” man\n\nIn [4:16](../04/16.md), Paul refers to two different parts of himself and those with him: their “inner man” and their “outer man.” The “inner” and the “outer” are probably not directly related to the spiritual and physical parts of people. Rather, the “inner” is connected to what is “not seen,” and the “outer” is connected to what is “seen” (see [4:18](../04/18.md)). Consider what form you can use to refer to the parts of a person that people can observe and the parts of a person that they cannot observe. Make sure that your translation does not simply distinguish between the skin and what is under the skin. It is more important to use words that suggest that what people observe is not always what is really true about a person. \n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. When he uses these words, he does not include the Corinthians unless a note specifies otherwise. He could be referring to: (1) himself and those who preach the gospel with him. (2) just himself. It is recommended that you follow the first option, but both are possible. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### The contrasts in [4:8–12](../04/08.md).\n\nIn these verses, Paul contrasts bad things that happen to him and those with him with good things that happen to them. Paul wrote these verses as one long sentence with short clauses because this was a powerful form in his culture. Consider using a form that is powerful in your culture. The UST expresses the idea with many short sentences because this is one kind of powerful form in English. +4:intro rx1c 0 # 2 Corinthians 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * Ministry of Moses and ministry of Paul (3:7–4:6)\n * Suffering and ministry (4:7–18)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Life and death\n\nIn [4:7–14](../04/07.md), Paul refers to life, death, and resurrection. When he refers to how he and his fellow workers experience “death” or “dying,” he is referring to how they suffer and experience things related to death. When he refers to how he and his fellow workers experience life or being raised, he is most likely referring to how God will resurrect them. He could also be referring to how God delivers them from death when they suffer or are persecuted. Consider what forms you could use to refer to experiences related to death and resurrection. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/life]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/death]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Light and darkness\n\nIn [4:3–6](../04/03.md), Paul describes a lack of understanding and belief in the gospel as veiling, blinding, and darkness. He describes understanding and belief in the gospel as shining and light. These figures of speech compare believing and understanding to seeing. If possible, preserve these figures of speech, but you could express the ideas in plain language if necessary. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/light]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/darkness]])\n\n### “Outer” and “inner” man\n\nIn [4:16](../04/16.md), Paul refers to two different parts of himself and his fellow workers: their inner man and their outer man. The “inner” and the “outer” are probably not directly related to the spiritual and physical parts of people. Rather, the inner is connected to what is not seen, and the outer is connected to what is seen (see [4:18](../04/18.md)). Consider what form you can use to refer to the parts of a person that people can observe and the parts of a person that they cannot observe. Make sure that your translation does not simply distinguish between the skin and what is under the skin. It is more important to use words that suggest that what people observe is not always what is really true about a person. \n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. When he uses these words, he does not include the Corinthians unless a note specifies otherwise. He could be referring to: (1) himself and those who preach the gospel with him. (2) just himself. It is recommended that you follow the first option, but both are possible. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### The contrasts in [4:8–12](../04/08.md).\n\nIn these verses, Paul contrasts bad things that happen to him and those with him with good things that happen to them. Paul wrote these verses as one long sentence with short clauses because this was a powerful form in his culture. Consider using a form that is powerful in your culture. The UST expresses the idea with many short sentences because this is one kind of powerful form in English. 4:1 lyi4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὰ τοῦτο 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces a conclusion based on what Paul has said, particularly what he said in [3:4–18](../03/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion based on what has been said. Alternate translation: “So then” or “Because of that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 4:1 ln4n rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἔχοντες 1 Here, the word **having** introduces a reason why Paul and those with him **do not become discouraged**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “because we have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 4:1 h1ud rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθὼς ἠλεήθημεν 1 Here, this phrase could indicate: (1) the way that Paul and those with him received the **ministry**. Alternate translation: “which we received by God’s mercy” (2) what led to Paul and those with him receiving the ministry, which was their conversions. Alternate translation: “which we received after God had mercy on us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From aac86239bf983ed024b45c3f8921a10af5d02167 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 22:17:47 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 96/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 34 +++++++++++++++++----------------- 1 file changed, 17 insertions(+), 17 deletions(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 2473f0ab1b..b6892beb07 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -400,8 +400,8 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:18 mmdd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Πνεύματος 1 Here, the word **Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “God’s Spirit” (2) what is “spiritual” as opposed to what is written or fleshly. Alternate translation: “who is spiritual” or “who is a spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:intro rx1c 0 # 2 Corinthians 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * Ministry of Moses and ministry of Paul (3:7–4:6)\n * Suffering and ministry (4:7–18)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Life and death\n\nIn [4:7–14](../04/07.md), Paul refers to life, death, and resurrection. When he refers to how he and his fellow workers experience “death” or “dying,” he is referring to how they suffer and experience things related to death. When he refers to how he and his fellow workers experience life or being raised, he is most likely referring to how God will resurrect them. He could also be referring to how God delivers them from death when they suffer or are persecuted. Consider what forms you could use to refer to experiences related to death and resurrection. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/life]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/death]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Light and darkness\n\nIn [4:3–6](../04/03.md), Paul describes a lack of understanding and belief in the gospel as veiling, blinding, and darkness. He describes understanding and belief in the gospel as shining and light. These figures of speech compare believing and understanding to seeing. If possible, preserve these figures of speech, but you could express the ideas in plain language if necessary. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/light]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/darkness]])\n\n### “Outer” and “inner” man\n\nIn [4:16](../04/16.md), Paul refers to two different parts of himself and his fellow workers: their inner man and their outer man. The “inner” and the “outer” are probably not directly related to the spiritual and physical parts of people. Rather, the inner is connected to what is not seen, and the outer is connected to what is seen (see [4:18](../04/18.md)). Consider what form you can use to refer to the parts of a person that people can observe and the parts of a person that they cannot observe. Make sure that your translation does not simply distinguish between the skin and what is under the skin. It is more important to use words that suggest that what people observe is not always what is really true about a person. \n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. When he uses these words, he does not include the Corinthians unless a note specifies otherwise. He could be referring to: (1) himself and those who preach the gospel with him. (2) just himself. It is recommended that you follow the first option, but both are possible. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### The contrasts in [4:8–12](../04/08.md).\n\nIn these verses, Paul contrasts bad things that happen to him and those with him with good things that happen to them. Paul wrote these verses as one long sentence with short clauses because this was a powerful form in his culture. Consider using a form that is powerful in your culture. The UST expresses the idea with many short sentences because this is one kind of powerful form in English. 4:1 lyi4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὰ τοῦτο 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces a conclusion based on what Paul has said, particularly what he said in [3:4–18](../03/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion based on what has been said. Alternate translation: “So then” or “Because of that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -4:1 ln4n rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἔχοντες 1 Here, the word **having** introduces a reason why Paul and those with him **do not become discouraged**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “because we have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -4:1 h1ud rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθὼς ἠλεήθημεν 1 Here, this phrase could indicate: (1) the way that Paul and those with him received the **ministry**. Alternate translation: “which we received by God’s mercy” (2) what led to Paul and those with him receiving the ministry, which was their conversions. Alternate translation: “which we received after God had mercy on us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +4:1 ln4n rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἔχοντες 1 Here, the word **having** introduces a reason why Paul and his fellow workers **do not become discouraged**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “because we have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +4:1 h1ud rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθὼς ἠλεήθημεν 1 Here, this phrase could indicate: (1) the way that Paul and his fellow workers received the **ministry**. Alternate translation: “which we received by God’s mercy” (2) what led to Paul and his fellow workers receiving the ministry, which was their conversions. Alternate translation: “which we received after God had mercy on us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:1 que0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἠλεήθημεν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **mercy**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “merciful” or an adverb such as “mercifully.” Alternate translation: “God acted mercifully toward us” or “God was merciful to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:1 ix7n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐκ ἐνκακοῦμεν 1 Here, the word **discouraged** could refer to: (1) losing motivation and confidence. Alternate translation: “we do not lose hope” (2) becoming tired or exhausted. Alternate translation: “we do not become tired” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:2 yp4g rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Here, the word **Instead** introduces a contrast with “becoming discouraged” in the previous verse ([4:1](../04/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “Instead of that” or “On the other hand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) @@ -413,7 +413,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 4:2 mrri rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῇ φανερώσει τῆς ἀληθείας 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **manifestation** that reveals **the truth**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by revealing the truth” or “by making the truth known” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 4:2 e7y7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ φανερώσει τῆς ἀληθείας 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **manifestation** and **truth**, you could express the ideas by using a verb such as “reveal” and an adjective such as “true.” Alternate translation: “by revealing what is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:2 aj24 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the word **man’s** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any person, either man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that applies to both men and women or you could refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “person’s” or “to man’s and woman’s” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -4:2 f6n1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul refers to being **before God** to indicate a close connection to God. The phrase could indicate that: (1) God testifies or bears witness to Paul and those with him. Alternate translation: “with God testifying about us” (2) people can recognize that Paul preaches the gospel only when they are **before God** or in God’s presence. Alternate translation: “that is in God’s presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +4:2 f6n1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul refers to being **before God** to indicate a close connection to God. The phrase could indicate that: (1) God testifies or bears witness to Paul and his fellow workers. Alternate translation: “with God testifying about us” (2) people can recognize that Paul preaches the gospel only when they are **before God** or in God’s presence. Alternate translation: “that is in God’s presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:3 lu2h rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a development from what Paul said in the previous verse ([4:2](../04/02.md)). In this verse, he explains that, although they reveal “the truth,” it may be **veiled** to some people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of development. Alternate translation: “Now” or “However,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 4:3 m82q rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ & καὶ 1 Here Paul could be using **even if** to introduce: (1) something that he thinks really is true. Alternate translation: “even though” (2) something that he thinks might be true. Alternate translation: “supposing that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 4:3 mti5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔστιν κεκαλυμμένον τὸ εὐαγγέλιον ἡμῶν, ἐν τοῖς ἀπολλυμένοις ἐστὶν κεκαλυμμένον 1 Here Paul again uses the language of “veiling,” just as he did in [3:12–18](../03/12.md). A **gospel** that **is veiled** is one that people do not understand or believe in. If possible, express the idea the same way you did in [3:12–18](../03/12.md). Alternate translation: “it is as though a veil hides our gospel, this happens to the ones perishing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -430,18 +430,18 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 4:5 nvg2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said about “the gospel of the glory of Christ” in [4:4](../04/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “As you can see,” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 4:5 ddw1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν Κύριον, ἑαυτοὺς δὲ δούλους ὑμῶν 1 These two clauses leave out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “but we proclaim the Lord Christ Jesus, and we proclaim ourselves as your servants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 4:5 xvs8 Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν Κύριον 1 Here, the phrase **Lord Christ Jesus** could: (1) give a title or name for Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Lord, who is Christ Jesus” (2) state that **Christ Jesus** is the **Lord**. Alternate translation: “Christ Jesus as Lord” -4:5 t8du rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ Ἰησοῦν 1 Here Paul could be indicating that he and those with him are **servants** because of: (1) who Jesus is. Alternate translation: “because of who Jesus is” (2) what Jesus has done. Alternate translation: “because of what Jesus has done” (3) what Jesus wants Paul and those with him to do. Alternate translation: “because that is what Jesus wants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -4:6 nbpt rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Here, the word **For** introduces the reason why Paul and those with him “do not proclaim” themselves but rather, Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis. Alternate translation: “That is because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +4:5 t8du rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ Ἰησοῦν 1 Here Paul could be indicating that he and his fellow workers are **servants** because of: (1) who Jesus is. Alternate translation: “because of who Jesus is” (2) what Jesus has done. Alternate translation: “because of what Jesus has done” (3) what Jesus wants Paul and his fellow workers to do. Alternate translation: “because that is what Jesus wants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +4:6 nbpt rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Here, the word **For** introduces the reason why Paul and his fellow workers do not proclaim themselves but rather, Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis. Alternate translation: “That is because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 4:6 fy6h rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations ὁ Θεὸς ὁ εἰπών 1 Here Paul introduces something that God **said**. The quotation is not directly from the Old Testament. Rather Paul is probably paraphrasing [Genesis 1:3](../gen/01/03.md), and he may also be referring to [Isaiah 9:2](../isa/09/02.md). Introduce the quotation as something that God said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include a footnote that refers to the passages that Paul may be paraphrasing. Alternate translation: “God is the one who declared” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 4:6 rw5z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations εἰπών, ἐκ σκότους φῶς λάμψει 1 It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to remove the quotation marks. Alternate translation: “who said that from darkness a light will shine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) 4:6 mukf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐκ σκότους 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **darkness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “dark.” Alternate translation: “In a dark place” or “From what is dark” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:6 d5x7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔλαμψεν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν, πρὸς φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως 1 Here Paul continues the light metaphor from [4:4](../04/04.md). When God **shined** in their **hearts**, that means that he caused them to understand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “who caused us to understand, just as if he had illuminated our hearts, the knowledge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:6 bj1j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν 1 In the Paul’s culture, **hearts** are considered to be the places where humans think and plan. What Paul means is that God has **shined** on their thoughts or on what they think. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in our minds” or “in our thoughts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -4:6 m6rf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **our** could refer to: (1) just Paul and those with him. Paul is focusing on himself and those with him, but he does not mean to exclude the Corinthians entirely. Alternate translation: “the hearts of us who preach the gospel” (2) Paul and everyone who believes, including the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “the hearts of us, who believe,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +4:6 m6rf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **our** could refer to: (1) just Paul and his fellow workers. Paul is focusing on himself and those with him, but he does not mean to exclude the Corinthians entirely. Alternate translation: “the hearts of us who preach the gospel” (2) Paul and everyone who believes, including the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “the hearts of us, who believe,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 4:6 fkq3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form multiple times. What he means is that the **illumination** either is or comes from the **knowledge**, and the **knowledge** is about the **glory of God**. In this last phrase, **glory** describes what **God** is like. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural form. See how you translated the similar construction in [4:4](../04/04.md). Alternate translation: “the illumination, which is the knowledge about the glorious God” or “the illumination that comes from the knowledge concerning how glorious God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 4:6 mpg9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πρὸς φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **illumination**, **knowledge**, and **glory**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “illumine” and “know” and an adjective such as “great” or “glorious.” Alternate translation: “to illumine us so that we can know the great God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:6 p736 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν προσώπῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, the **glory** that is **in {face} of Jesus Christ** contrasts with the glory that faded on Moses’ face (see [3:7](../03/07.md)). What Paul means is that Jesus reveals or shows what God is like, particularly how glorious he is. If possible, use words that remind your readers of what Paul said about Moses in [3:7](../03/07.md). If it is necessary, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “that Jesus Christ reveals as if it shined on his face” or “that Jesus Christ shows to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -4:7 xe5i rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** contrasts the “glory of God” from the previous verse with how Paul and those with him are **clay jars**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +4:7 xe5i rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** contrasts the “glory of God” from the previous verse with how Paul and his fellow workers are **clay jars**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 4:7 xx2c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔχομεν & τὸν θησαυρὸν τοῦτον ἐν ὀστρακίνοις σκεύεσιν 1 Here Paul speaks of the knowledge about God’s glory as if it were a **treasure**, that is, something that is very valuable. He speaks of himself and those who proclaim the gospel as if they were **clay jars**, which are not valuable and can break easily. He speaks in this way to contrast how valuable and long-lasting the gospel is (**the treasure**) with how worthless and weak he and those who preach the gospel with him are in comparison (**clay jars**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain the figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we have these riches in disposable containers” or “we have this valuable gospel as weak and worthless people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:7 yzd7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τὸν θησαυρὸν τοῦτον 1 Here, the word **this** identifies the **treasure** as “the knowledge of the glory of God in the face of Jesus Christ” (see [4:6](../04/06.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what **this** refers to. Alternate translation: “the treasure of the knowledge of the glory of God” or “that treasure” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 4:7 nz0r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ὀστρακίνοις σκεύεσιν 1 Here, the word **jars** refers to any type of container that is meant to hold something else. The word **clay** refers to dirt or mud, which was used to make inexpensive and fragile containers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that refer to containers made out of cheap and weak material. Alternate translation: “inexpensive containers” or “fragile and cheap vessels” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -450,11 +450,11 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 4:8 ga9z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐν παντὶ θλιβόμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐ στενοχωρούμενοι; ἀπορούμενοι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the actions, you could use indefinite subjects. Alternate translation: “in every side someone pressing us in, but not crushing us; feeling perplexed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 4:8 wqg9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ἐν παντὶ θλιβόμενοι 1 Here, the phrase **in every {side}** could go with: (1) all the statements in this verse and the following verse. Alternate translation: “in every situation experiencing these things: being pressed in” (2) just the first statement about **being pressed in, but not being crushed**. Alternate translation: “being pressed in on every side” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 4:8 vhjn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν παντὶ 1 Here, the word **every** indicates that what Paul is about to describe happens often or in many situations. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in every situation” or “at many times” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -4:8 fi9c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor θλιβόμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐ στενοχωρούμενοι 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and those with him were physically being **pressed in** by other people but not **being crushed** by them. He speaks in this way to indicate that other people are making his life difficult or trying to hurt him, but they are not fully succeeding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “being pushed, but not being knocked over” or “being mistreated, but not being harmed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +4:8 fi9c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor θλιβόμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐ στενοχωρούμενοι 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers were physically being **pressed in** by other people but not **being crushed** by them. He speaks in this way to indicate that other people are making his life difficult or trying to hurt him, but they are not fully succeeding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “being pushed, but not being knocked over” or “being mistreated, but not being harmed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:9 bz8m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive διωκόμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἐνκαταλειπόμενοι; καταβαλλόμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἀπολλύμενοι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the actions, you could use indefinite subjects for **persecuted** and **thrown down**, or you could indicate that God is the one who does not “forsake.” Alternate translation: “someone persecuting us, but God not forsaking us; someone throwing us down, but we not perishing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -4:9 uvq1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καταβαλλόμενοι 1 Here, Paul speaks as if people physically push him and those with him so that they fall down. By speaking in this way, he is referring to any time people act against or bully him and those with him, which may or may not be physical. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “being bullied” or “being attacked” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -4:10 zt4b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν νέκρωσιν τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι περιφέροντες 1 Here Paul speaks as if **the dying of Jesus** were an object that he and those with him could “carry around.” He could speak in this way to indicate that: (1) he experiences suffering and pain that are like the **dying of Jesus**. Alternate translation: “experiencing in the body dying that is like the dying of Jesus” (2) he and those with him proclaim the **dying of Jesus** both by what they say and what they do (**in the body**). Alternate translation: “proclaiming in the body the dying of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -4:10 ethc τῷ σώματι & τῷ σώματι ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **body** is a singular noun that refers to the “bodies” of Paul and those with him. It may be more natural in your language to use a plural form. Alternate translation: “the bodies … our bodies” or “each of our bodies … each of our bodies” +4:9 uvq1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καταβαλλόμενοι 1 Here, Paul speaks as if people physically push him and his fellow workers so that they fall down. By speaking in this way, he is referring to any time people act against or bully him and his fellow workers, which may or may not be physical. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “being bullied” or “being attacked” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +4:10 zt4b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν νέκρωσιν τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι περιφέροντες 1 Here Paul speaks as if **the dying of Jesus** were an object that he and his fellow workers could carry around. He could speak in this way to indicate that: (1) he experiences suffering and pain that are like the **dying of Jesus**. Alternate translation: “experiencing in the body dying that is like the dying of Jesus” (2) he and his fellow workers proclaim the **dying of Jesus** both by what they say and what they do (**in the body**). Alternate translation: “proclaiming in the body the dying of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +4:10 ethc τῷ σώματι & τῷ σώματι ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **body** is a singular noun that refers to the bodies of Paul and his fellow workers. It may be more natural in your language to use a plural form. Alternate translation: “the bodies … our bodies” or “each of our bodies … each of our bodies” 4:10 rnup rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὴν νέκρωσιν τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe the **dying** that **Jesus** experienced. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the death that Jesus experienced” or “how Jesus died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 4:10 l6f6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι ἡμῶν φανερωθῇ 1 Here, the revelation of **the life of Jesus** in **our body** could mean that: (1) the **life** that Jesus has will become the life that they too have. In other words, like Jesus resurrected, they too will resurrect. Alternate translation: “we too might experience in our body the new life that Jesus has” (2) they “reveal” the fact that Jesus is alive. In other words, by **carrying around** Jesus’ death, they also reveal his resurrection. Alternate translation: “we might reveal in our body the resurrection of Jesus” (3) they are delivered from the sufferings that they experience so that they have **life** from **Jesus**. Alternate translation: “we might experience life from Jesus when we are delivered from suffering in our body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:10 w3jc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι ἡμῶν φανερωθῇ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God might reveal in our body the life of Jesus also” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -463,9 +463,9 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 4:11 vivg rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **for** introduces a clarification of what Paul said in [4:10](../04/10.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a clarification. Alternate translation: “in fact,” or “in other words,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 4:11 l1xk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀεὶ & ἡμεῖς, οἱ ζῶντες & παραδιδόμεθα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God is always handing us, being alive, over” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 4:11 ggb5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ἀεὶ & ἡμεῖς, οἱ ζῶντες & παραδιδόμεθα 1 Here, the phrase **being alive** identifies the situation in which the rest of Paul’s statement is true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that makes this relationship clearer. Alternate translation: “we, during the time in which we are alive, are always being handed over” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) -4:11 ht74 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀεὶ & εἰς θάνατον παραδιδόμεθα 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and those with him were objects that someone could “hand over” to **death**. He means that they are under the power of **death** or are experiencing things related to death, like suffering and hardship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “are always experiencing what relates to death” or “are always under death’s power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +4:11 ht74 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀεὶ & εἰς θάνατον παραδιδόμεθα 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers were objects that someone could hand over to **death**. He means that they are under the power of **death** or are experiencing things related to death, like suffering and hardship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “are always experiencing what relates to death” or “are always under death’s power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:11 admc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς θάνατον 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “die.” Alternate translation: “so that we might die” or “to die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -4:11 wt5i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ Ἰησοῦν 1 Here, the phrase **for the sake of Jesus** could indicate that Paul and those with him **are always being handed over to death**: (1) to serve **Jesus**. Alternate translation: “in order to serve Jesus” (2) because of **Jesus**, particularly because they preach about him. Alternate translation: “because of Jesus” or “because we proclaim Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +4:11 wt5i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ Ἰησοῦν 1 Here, the phrase **for the sake of Jesus** could indicate that Paul and his fellow workers **are always being handed over to death**: (1) to serve **Jesus**. Alternate translation: “in order to serve Jesus” (2) because of **Jesus**, particularly because they preach about him. Alternate translation: “because of Jesus” or “because we proclaim Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:11 d1wm ἵνα καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ φανερωθῇ ἐν τῇ θνητῇ σαρκὶ ἡμῶν 1 Here Paul uses words and ideas that are very similar to what he used in the second part of [4:10](../04/10.md). You should express the idea much as you did in that verse. 4:11 ww5r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ φανερωθῇ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that God does it. Alternate translation: “God might reveal also the life of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 4:11 r513 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **life**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “live.” Alternate translation: “how Jesus lives” or “the fact that Jesus lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -484,12 +484,12 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 4:13 qma7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς πίστεως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “that believes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:13 gzf4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸ γεγραμμένον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, you can express it so that the scripture or scripture author writes or speaks the words. Alternate translation: “what the psalmist wrote” or “to what the psalm says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 4:13 il5h rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations κατὰ τὸ γεγραμμένον 1 In Paul’s culture, **according to {what} has been written** was a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book titled “Psalms” (see [Psalm 116:10](../psa/116/10.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from Psalms. Alternate translation: “as it can be read in the Old Testament,” or “as it says in the book of Psalms,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) -4:14 sfxb rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰδότες 1 Here, the word **knowing** introduces a reason for what Paul said that he and those with him do (see [4:13](../04/13.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “since we know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +4:14 sfxb rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰδότες 1 Here, the word **knowing** introduces a reason for what Paul said that he and his fellow workers do (see [4:13](../04/13.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “since we know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 4:14 ruov rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὁ ἐγείρας 1 Here, the word **one** refers to God the Father, who **raised Jesus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what the pronoun refers to. Alternate translation: “God who raised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 4:14 t2i8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὁ ἐγείρας τὸν Ἰησοῦν, καὶ ἡμᾶς & ἐγερεῖ 1 Paul uses the words **raised** and **raise** to refer to someone who had previously died coming back to life. If your language does not use these words to describe coming back to life, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the one having restored Jesus to life will also restore us to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -4:14 zd0j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit σὺν Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **with Jesus** could indicate that the Paul and those with him will: (1) be where **Jesus** is. Alternate translation: “to be where Jesus is” (2) be resurrected as **Jesus** was. Alternate translation: “as he raised Jesus” (3) be joined with **Jesus**. Alternate translation: “together with Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +4:14 zd0j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit σὺν Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **with Jesus** could indicate that the Paul and his fellow workers will: (1) be where **Jesus** is. Alternate translation: “to be where Jesus is” (2) be resurrected as **Jesus** was. Alternate translation: “as he raised Jesus” (3) be joined with **Jesus**. Alternate translation: “together with Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:15 w37z rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of what Paul has said in [4:7–14](../04/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -4:15 v7sj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰ & πάντα δι’ ὑμᾶς 1 Here, the phrase **all these things** refers to everything that Paul and those with him do and experience as they preach the gospel, including their sufferings (see [4:7–12](../04/07.md)) and the message that they preach (see [4:13–14](../04/13.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “everything I have described is for your sake” or “everything I have referred to is for your sake” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +4:15 v7sj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰ & πάντα δι’ ὑμᾶς 1 Here, the phrase **all these things** refers to everything that Paul and his fellow workers do and experience as they preach the gospel, including their sufferings (see [4:7–12](../04/07.md)) and the message that they preach (see [4:13–14](../04/13.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “everything I have described is for your sake” or “everything I have referred to is for your sake” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:15 wl88 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ χάρις 1 Here Paul implies that the **grace** comes from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “grace from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:15 lg1l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ χάρις 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “gracious.” Alternate translation: “how God is gracious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:15 xdxk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ τῶν πλειόνων 1 Here, the phrase **through more and more** could indicate that: (1) the **grace** increases by being received by **more** people. Alternate translation: “among more and more people” (2) the **grace** increases because God uses **more** situations and experiences to spread the gospel. Alternate translation: “by means of more and more service” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -504,7 +504,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 4:16 vliu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διαφθείρεται 1 Here Paul speaks as if the **outer man** were a dead thing that was **decaying**. He speaks in this way to indicate that the **outer man** is in the process of dying or passing away. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is dying” or “is passing away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:16 s9b2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ ἔσω ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **inner {man}** could refer to: (1) the part of the person that others cannot observe and see. Alternate translation: “our hidden part” or “our inward part” (2) the spiritual part of the person. Alternate translation: “our heart” or “our spiritual part” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:16 zct5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ ἔσω ἡμῶν ἀνακαινοῦται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God is renewing our inner man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -4:17 no4a rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Paul and those with him “do not become discouraged” (see [4:16](../04/16.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason for a previous statement. Alternate translation: “We do not become discouraged because” or “We do that because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +4:17 no4a rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Paul and his fellow workers do not become discouraged (see [4:16](../04/16.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason for a previous statement. Alternate translation: “We do not become discouraged because” or “We do that because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 4:17 e4s0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ & παραυτίκα ἐλαφρὸν τῆς θλίψεως ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **affliction**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “afflict” or “suffer.” Alternate translation: “how we are afflicted in light and momentary ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:17 pd63 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐλαφρὸν τῆς θλίψεως & αἰώνιον βάρος δόξης 1 Here Paul describes **affliction** and **glory** as if they were objects that could be **light** or have **weight**. He speaks in this way to indicate how unimportant or insignificant the **affliction** is compared with how important or significant the **glory** is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “small affliction … an eternal, great glory” or “insignificant affliction … an eternal, significant glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:17 jzhi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κατεργάζεται ἡμῖν 1 Here Paul speaks as if the **affliction** were a process that was **producing** the **glory**. He means that the **affliction** leads to **glory** for **us**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is leading us to” or “is enabling us to gain” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 7cfcb01745731a9aa895d61d23e425feef809949 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 22:31:02 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 97/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 78 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++--------------------------- 1 file changed, 39 insertions(+), 39 deletions(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index b6892beb07..6bda4b1c88 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -517,9 +517,9 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 4:18 f97x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ τὰ μὴ βλεπόμενα 1 This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the sentence. Alternate translation: “but we are watching the things not being seen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 4:18 hbrg rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why **We** are **watching** the things that are not seen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “We do that because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 4:18 kx7m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὰ γὰρ βλεπόμενα & τὰ δὲ μὴ βλεπόμενα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could refer to “we” or to people in general. Alternate translation: “For the things that people see … but the things that people do not see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -5:intro s14p 0 # 2 Corinthians 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * Confidence in the resurrection (5:1–10)\n * The gospel (5:11–6:2)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Resurrection bodies\n\nIn [5:1–5](../05/01.md), Paul speaks about new bodies that believers will receive when Jesus comes back. Right now, he and those with him “groan” while they have their current bodies. That is because these bodies are weak and will eventually die. However, Paul and those with him do not want to just get rid of their bodies. Rather, they are looking forward expectantly to receiving new bodies that will not die. Paul expresses these ideas by using building and clothing language. See the sections below that address how this language functions. Make sure that your translation clearly contrasts old bodies with new bodies and does not suggest that Paul just wants to get rid of his body. \n\n### The intermediate state?\n\nIn [5:6–9](../05/06.md), Paul speaks about being “away from the body” and “with the Lord.” As the previous section has illustrated, Paul’s goal is to have a new body, not to be “away from the body.” So, what is he referring to here? There are three primary options. First, many Christians believe that Paul is talking about the time period between when a believer dies and when Jesus comes back. During this time period, the believer does not have a body but is with Jesus in heaven. Then, when Jesus comes back, the believer receives a new body. Second, some Christians believe that Paul is talking about how believers receive new bodies immediately after they die. In other words, the next thing that a believer experiences after he or she dies is Jesus’ return. In this case, there is no time period between death and resurrection. Third, some Christians believe that Paul is speaking about how believers receive a temporary body for the time they are in heaven with Jesus before he comes back. If possible, your translation should allow for all three of these interpretations. Make sure that you include at least option one, since this is the option that most Christians believe. \n\n### New creation\n\nIn [5:17](../05/17.md), Paul speaks about how being “in Christ” leads to “new creation,” with “old things” passing away and “new things” coming. Paul uses very general language, and the “new creation” could identify the person who is “in Christ” or everything that God is making “new.” If it is about people primarily, Paul’s point is that they are made “new” when they are in Christ. If it is about the world in general, Paul’s point is that God makes the world “new” in Christ, and people experience this “new creation” when they too are in Christ. Since Paul’s language is so general, it is best to express the idea in such a way that both of these interpretations are possible. If you must choose one, most interpreters think that Paul is focusing on people here. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/creation]])\n\n### Reconciliation\n\nIn [5:18–20](../05/18.md), Paul speaks about how God “reconciles” people to himself and gives the “ministry of reconciliation” to Paul and those with him. The word “reconcile” refers to how someone restores a relationship with someone else so that they can be together again. In other words, when someone does something that breaks or hurts a relationship, “reconciliation” heals the broken relationship. Consider how you might naturally express this idea in your language. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Bodies as homes\n\nIn [5:1–9](../05/01.md), Paul speaks about bodies as if they were homes. He identifies current earthly bodies as “tents,” which indicates that they do not last. He identifies resurrection bodies as “buildings” that God makes. Paul uses the language of “home” to indicate that people belong in bodies and not without bodies. However, he does seem to think that people can be without bodies for a period of time, just as people can leave their homes for a period of time (see the above discussion of the “intermediate state”). Further, he contrasts “tent” homes with “building” homes to indicate that the “building” is the home (that is, body) that will last forever and which believers should long for. If possible, preserve the “home” language in your translation, either in metaphor or simile form. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/house]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/tent]])\n\n### Bodies as clothing\n\nIn [5:2–4](../05/02.md), Paul mixes “clothing” language in with his “home” language. The “clothes” are bodies, and Paul again uses this language to indicate that people belong in bodies (“clothed”), not without bodies (“naked” or “unclothed”). He does not use “clothing” language to show that bodies are an unimportant part of who people are. If possible, preserve the “clothing” language in your translation, either in metaphor or simile form. However, if how Paul mixes together “home” and “clothing” language would be confusing, you may need to use only the “home” language and express the “clothing” language plainly or as “home” language. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/clothed]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. When he uses this form, he is focusing on himself and those with him, or just on himself (although this is less likely). However, he does not necessarily mean that what he says is not true of the Corinthians or of believers in general. Consider how you can communicate the focus on Paul and those with him without totally excluding the Corinthians. In every case where Paul may be using the first person plural in a way different than this, a note will explain the options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### Singular nouns in general statements\n\nIn [5:1–10](../05/01.md), Paul consistently refers to “body,” “building,” “tent,” and “home” in singular form. He does this because the singular form was a natural way to refer to these things in general. Throughout this section, the UST models how to express the ideas in plural form, since this is more natural for general statements in English. Consider how your language might naturally express a general statement about “bodies.” \n\n### Translating [5:21](../05/21.md)\n\nPaul speaks in a very compressed way in this verse, and Christians disagree about what exactly he means. What is relatively clear is that Paul has in mind what some people call an “interchange” between Christ and believers. Christ, who is “righteous,” is somehow identified with “sin,” and believers, who are “sinners,” are somehow identified with “righteousness.” The “in him” at the end of the verse indicates that this interchange occurs in union with Christ. For details about what it could mean for Christ to be “made sin” and for believers to “become the righteousness of God,” see the notes on this verse. If possible, however, your translation should be as general as Paul’s sentence. This means that you should express the general idea of interchange and allow for many of the possible interpretations listed in the notes. +5:intro s14p 0 # 2 Corinthians 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * Confidence in the resurrection (5:1–10)\n * The gospel (5:11–6:2)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Resurrection bodies\n\nIn [5:1–5](../05/01.md), Paul speaks about new bodies that believers will receive when Jesus comes back. Right now, he and his fellow workers groan while they have their current bodies. That is because these bodies are weak and will eventually die. However, Paul and his fellow workers do not want to just get rid of their bodies. Rather, they are looking forward expectantly to receiving new bodies that will not die. Paul expresses these ideas by using building and clothing language. See the sections below that address how this language functions. Make sure that your translation clearly contrasts old bodies with new bodies and does not suggest that Paul just wants to get rid of his body. \n\n### The intermediate state?\n\nIn [5:6–9](../05/06.md), Paul speaks about being away from the body and with the Lord. As the previous section has illustrated, Paul’s goal is to have a new body, not to be “away from the body.” So, what is he referring to here? There are three primary options. First, many Christians believe that Paul is talking about the time period between when a believer dies and when Jesus comes back. During this time period, the believer does not have a body but is with Jesus in heaven. Then, when Jesus comes back, the believer receives a new body. Second, some Christians believe that Paul is talking about how believers receive new bodies immediately after they die. In other words, the next thing that a believer experiences after he or she dies is Jesus’ return. In this case, there is no time period between death and resurrection. Third, some Christians believe that Paul is speaking about how believers receive a temporary body for the time they are in heaven with Jesus before he comes back. If possible, your translation should allow for all three of these interpretations. Make sure that you include at least option one, since this is the option that most Christians believe. \n\n### New creation\n\nIn [5:17](../05/17.md), Paul speaks about how being “in Christ” leads to “new creation,” with “old things” passing away and “new things” coming. Paul uses very general language, and the “new creation” could identify the person who is “in Christ” or everything that God is making “new.” If it is about people primarily, Paul’s point is that they are made “new” when they are in Christ. If it is about the world in general, Paul’s point is that God makes the world “new” in Christ, and people experience this “new creation” when they too are in Christ. Since Paul’s language is so general, it is best to express the idea in such a way that both of these interpretations are possible. If you must choose one, most interpreters think that Paul is focusing on people here. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/creation]])\n\n### Reconciliation\n\nIn [5:18–20](../05/18.md), Paul speaks about how God reconciles people to himself and gives the ministry of reconciliation to Paul and his fellow workers. The word “reconcile” refers to how someone restores a relationship with someone else so that they can be together again. In other words, when someone does something that breaks or hurts a relationship, “reconciliation” heals the broken relationship. Consider how you might naturally express this idea in your language. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Bodies as homes\n\nIn [5:1–9](../05/01.md), Paul speaks about bodies as if they were homes. He identifies current earthly bodies as “tents,” which indicates that they do not last. He identifies resurrection bodies as “buildings” that God makes. Paul uses the language of “home” to indicate that people belong in bodies and not without bodies. However, he does seem to think that people can be without bodies for a period of time, just as people can leave their homes for a period of time (see the above discussion of the “intermediate state”). Further, he contrasts “tent” homes with “building” homes to indicate that the “building” is the home (that is, body) that will last forever and which believers should long for. If possible, preserve the “home” language in your translation, either in metaphor or simile form. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/house]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/tent]])\n\n### Bodies as clothing\n\nIn [5:2–4](../05/02.md), Paul mixes clothing language in with his home language. The clothes are bodies, and Paul again uses this language to indicate that people belong in bodies (clothed), not without bodies (naked or unclothed). He does not use clothing language to show that bodies are an unimportant part of who people are. If possible, preserve the clothing language in your translation, either in metaphor or simile form. However, if how Paul mixes together home and clothing language would be confusing, you may need to use only the home language and express the clothing language plainly or as home language. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/clothed]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. When he uses this form, he is focusing on himself and his fellow workers, or just on himself (although this is less likely). However, he does not necessarily mean that what he says is not true of the Corinthians or of believers in general. Consider how you can communicate the focus on Paul and his fellow workers without totally excluding the Corinthians. In every case where Paul may be using the first person plural in a way different than this, a note will explain the options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### Singular nouns in general statements\n\nIn [5:1–10](../05/01.md), Paul consistently refers to “body,” “building,” “tent,” and “home” in singular form. He does this because the singular form was a natural way to refer to these things in general. Throughout this section, the UST models how to express the ideas in plural form, since this is more natural for general statements in English. Consider how your language might naturally express a general statement about “bodies.” \n\n### Translating [5:21](../05/21.md)\n\nPaul speaks in a very compressed way in this verse, and Christians disagree about what exactly he means. What is relatively clear is that Paul has in mind what some people call an “interchange” between Christ and believers. Christ, who is “righteous,” is somehow identified with “sin,” and believers, who are “sinners,” are somehow identified with “righteousness.” The “in him” at the end of the verse indicates that this interchange occurs in union with Christ. For details about what it could mean for Christ to be “made sin” and for believers to “become the righteousness of God,” see the notes on this verse. If possible, however, your translation should be as general as Paul’s sentence. This means that you should express the general idea of interchange and allow for many of the possible interpretations listed in the notes. 5:1 p7b7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** could introduce: (1) an explanation of what Paul said in [4:18](../04/18.md). Alternate translation: “In fact,” (2) an example or illustration of what Paul said in [4:18](../04/18.md). Alternate translation: “For example,” (3) a basis for what Paul said in [4:18](../04/18.md). Alternate translation: “That is because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -5:1 v03z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive οἴδαμεν & ἡμῶν & ἔχομεν 1 Here and throughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. See the chapter introduction for more information on how to translate these words. Here, the words **we** and **our** could refer to: (1) just Paul and those with him. Paul is focusing on himself and those with him, but he does not mean to exclude the Corinthians entirely. Alternate translation: “we who preach the gospel … our … we have” (2) Paul and everyone who believes, including the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “all of us know … our … we have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +5:1 v03z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive οἴδαμεν & ἡμῶν & ἔχομεν 1 Here and throughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. See the chapter introduction for more information on how to translate these words. Here, the words **we** and **our** could refer to: (1) just Paul and his fellow workers. Paul is focusing on himself and his fellow workers, but he does not mean to exclude the Corinthians entirely. Alternate translation: “we who preach the gospel … our … we have” (2) Paul and everyone who believes, including the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “all of us know … our … we have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 5:1 la71 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν 1 Here, the word **if** could introduce: (1) something that Paul thinks will definitely happen, but he is not sure when. Alternate translation: “whenever” (2) something that Paul thinks might happen. Alternate translation: “even if” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 5:1 z4vs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους καταλυθῇ, οἰκοδομὴν ἐκ Θεοῦ ἔχομεν, οἰκίαν ἀχειροποίητον αἰώνιον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 Here Paul speaks as if a person’s body were a **house**, **tent**, or **building** in which that the person lives. This was a common way to refer to a person’s body in Paul’s culture. He identifies the current body as a **tent** that is **torn down** because this body will die. He describes the body that a person will have when God resurrects them as a **building from God** and an **eternal house** that is **not made with hands**. This is an important metaphor in [5:1–9](../05/01.md), so preserve the **house**, **tent**, and **building** language if possible. If it would be helpful, you could use a simile or identify the **house** in another natural way. Alternate translation: “our earthly house of this tent, that is, our mortal body, is torn down, we have a building from God, that is, our resurrection body, an eternal house in the heavens, not made with hands” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) 5:1 zy2k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους καταλυθῇ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone tears down our earthly house of this tent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -538,7 +538,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:3 ap7v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ & εὑρεθησόμεθα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form to focus on the state of being **naked** rather than on who “finds” them, so you should avoid stating a subject for **found**. Alternate translation: “we will not be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 5:4 zvz8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ γὰρ 1 Here, the phrase **For indeed** indicates that Paul is adding more information (**indeed**) that supports what he said in the previous two verses (**For**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce added information that supports a previous statement. Alternate translation: “Further” or “And in fact” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 5:4 bz6k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor οἱ ὄντες ἐν τῷ σκήνει & οὐ θέλομεν ἐκδύσασθαι, ἀλλ’ ἐπενδύσασθαι 1 Here Paul continues to speak of bodies as buildings and clothing. You should express the ideas as you did in [5:1–3](../05/01.md). Alternate translation: “the ones being in this tent, that is, our mortal body … we do not want to be homeless, but to have a home” or “the ones being in this tent, that is, this body … we do not want to have no body, which is like being unclothed, but to have a resurrection body, which is like being fully clothed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) -5:4 e34b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor βαρούμενοι 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and those with him were carrying a heavy burden. He means that something is making their lives difficult. The burden could be: (1) how the **tent**, that is, their current bodies, falls apart and dies. Alternate translation: “being distressed by it” (2) how other people's situations make life hard for them. Alternate translation: “being troubled by many people and things” or “being oppressed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +5:4 e34b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor βαρούμενοι 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers were carrying a heavy burden. He means that something is making their lives difficult. The burden could be: (1) how the **tent**, that is, their current bodies, falls apart and dies. Alternate translation: “being distressed by it” (2) how other people's situations make life hard for them. Alternate translation: “being troubled by many people and things” or “being oppressed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 5:4 g9yu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive βαρούμενοι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that either the **tent** (their mortal bodies) or other people and things did it. Make sure your translation fits with how you chose to express the metaphor in the previous note. Alternate translation: “the tent burdening us” or “many people and things burdening us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 5:4 f8rb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ θέλομεν ἐκδύσασθαι, ἀλλ’ ἐπενδύσασθαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form to focus on the state of being **unclothed** or **clothed** rather than on whoever clothes or unclothes them, so you should avoid stating a subject for **unclothed** and **clothed**. Alternate translation: “we do not want to be naked, but to have clothes on” or “we do not want to have no clothing, but to wear clothing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 5:4 nezo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ ἐπενδύσασθαι 1 This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “but we want to be fully clothed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -663,7 +663,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:21 kmt9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **righteousness** that could: (1) come from **God**. Alternate translation: “righteousness from God” (2) belong to **God**. Alternate translation: “God’s own righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 5:21 ebz2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡμεῖς γενώμεθα δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “righteous.” Make sure your translation fits with how you understand what **righteousness of God** means. Alternate translation: “God might make us righteous” or “we might be righteous because of what God does” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:21 cypg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν αὐτῷ 1 Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in him** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in him**, or united to Christ, explains how people **become the righteousness of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that being united to Christ is the means by which people receive the **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “by being united to him” or “as God unites us to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -6:intro f5qu 0 # 2 Corinthians 6 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * The gospel (5:11–6:2)\n * Proofs of ministry (6:3–10)\n * Join with fellow believers, not unbelievers (6:11–7:4)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the quotations from the Old Testament in [6:2](../06/02.md) and [6:16–18](../06/16.md).\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Commendation of ministry\n\nIn [6:3–4](../06/03.md), Paul tells the Corinthians that he avoids doing anything that would cause offense and lead to people blaming ministry. In fact, he and those with him “commend themselves” in many ways, and he provides a list of those ways in [6:4–10](../06/04.md). Paul commends their ministry in this way because other people in Corinth were claiming that Paul was not a good apostle or minister for Christ. They claimed that they were better ministers for Christ. Paul responds here by listing what he and those with him do and experience as true ministers of Christ. Make sure that you express the list so that it shows that Paul and those with him are true ministers of Christ. \n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### “Weapons of righteousness”\n\nIn [6:7](../06/07.md), Paul states that he and his fellow workers have “weapons of righteousness” for both hands. He could mean that “righteousness”: (1) is the “weapons” (2) is defended by the “weapons” (3) characterizes the “weapons.” Also the idea that the “weapons” are for both hands could indicate that: (1) Paul and those with him have an offensive weapon in one hand and a defensive weapon in the other hand (2) Paul and those with him can defend against enemies coming from any direction. Paul does not state whom he is fighting against with these “weapons,” but it is probably sin, evil powers, and people who oppose his ministry. See the notes on this verse for translation options. \n\n### “Opening” the heart\n\nIn [6:11–13](../06/11.md), Paul speaks about opening the heart and, in contrast, being restricted. He is speaking about loving other people as if it were an open heart and failing to love other people as it were a restriction in one’s insides. If your culture can express the idea of love by referring to where in their bodies people feel love, you could do so in these verses. Otherwise, you could use a comparable metaphor or plain language. See the notes on these verses for translation options. \n\n### The temple of the living God\n\nIn [6:16](../06/16.md), Paul claims that believers are the temple of the living God. In the last part of the verse, he quotes from the Old Testament to prove that this is true. This quotation also shows that the identification of God’s people with the temple indicates that God is with his people and treats them as his people. Since the temple is a very important part of Paul’s culture, you should preserve the temple language. If your readers would not understand the metaphor, you could express it as a simile or explain it in a footnote. See the notes on this verse for translation options. \n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [6:14–16](../06/14.md), Paul asks five questions, and each question assumes that the answer is “none” or “nothing.” Paul asks these questions to include the Corinthians in what he is arguing, not because he is looking for information. If your language does not use questions in this way, you could include answers to the questions, or you could express them as negative statements. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### The long list in [6:4–10](../06/04.md)\n\nThese verses contain one long list of the situations and ways in which Paul and those with him commend their ministry. This list is divided into three parts. Each part uses a repeated form for each item. The first part uses the word “in” ([6:4–7a](../06/04.md)), the second part uses the word “through” ([6:7b–8a](../06/07.md)), and the third part uses the words “as” and “yet” or “but” ([6:8b–10](../06/08.md)). If possible, represent these parts in your language by using repeated words or some other natural form. Consider whether a long list like this would be natural in your language. The UST models one possible way to divide the list up into shorter sentences. \n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. When he uses this form, he is focusing on himself and those with him, or just on himself (although this is less likely). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +6:intro f5qu 0 # 2 Corinthians 6 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * The gospel (5:11–6:2)\n * Proofs of ministry (6:3–10)\n * Join with fellow believers, not unbelievers (6:11–7:4)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the quotations from the Old Testament in [6:2](../06/02.md) and [6:16–18](../06/16.md).\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Commendation of ministry\n\nIn [6:3–4](../06/03.md), Paul tells the Corinthians that he avoids doing anything that would cause offense and lead to people blaming ministry. In fact, he and his fellow workers “commend themselves” in many ways, and he provides a list of those ways in [6:4–10](../06/04.md). Paul commends their ministry in this way because other people in Corinth were claiming that Paul was not a good apostle or minister for Christ. They claimed that they were better ministers for Christ. Paul responds here by listing what he and his fellow workers do and experience as true ministers of Christ. Make sure that you express the list so that it shows that Paul and those with him are true ministers of Christ. \n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### “Weapons of righteousness”\n\nIn [6:7](../06/07.md), Paul states that he and his fellow workers have “weapons of righteousness” for both hands. He could mean that “righteousness”: (1) is the “weapons” (2) is defended by the “weapons” (3) characterizes the “weapons.” Also the idea that the “weapons” are for both hands could indicate that: (1) Paul and his fellow workers have an offensive weapon in one hand and a defensive weapon in the other hand (2) Paul and his fellow workers can defend against enemies coming from any direction. Paul does not state whom he is fighting against with these “weapons,” but it is probably sin, evil powers, and people who oppose his ministry. See the notes on this verse for translation options. \n\n### “Opening” the heart\n\nIn [6:11–13](../06/11.md), Paul speaks about opening the heart and, in contrast, being restricted. He is speaking about loving other people as if it were an open heart and failing to love other people as it were a restriction in one’s insides. If your culture can express the idea of love by referring to where in their bodies people feel love, you could do so in these verses. Otherwise, you could use a comparable metaphor or plain language. See the notes on these verses for translation options. \n\n### The temple of the living God\n\nIn [6:16](../06/16.md), Paul claims that believers are the temple of the living God. In the last part of the verse, he quotes from the Old Testament to prove that this is true. This quotation also shows that the identification of God’s people with the temple indicates that God is with his people and treats them as his people. Since the temple is a very important part of Paul’s culture, you should preserve the temple language. If your readers would not understand the metaphor, you could express it as a simile or explain it in a footnote. See the notes on this verse for translation options. \n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [6:14–16](../06/14.md), Paul asks five questions, and each question assumes that the answer is “none” or “nothing.” Paul asks these questions to include the Corinthians in what he is arguing, not because he is looking for information. If your language does not use questions in this way, you could include answers to the questions, or you could express them as negative statements. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### The long list in [6:4–10](../06/04.md)\n\nThese verses contain one long list of the situations and ways in which Paul and his fellow workers commend their ministry. This list is divided into three parts. Each part uses a repeated form for each item. The first part uses the word “in” ([6:4–7a](../06/04.md)), the second part uses the word “through” ([6:7b–8a](../06/07.md)), and the third part uses the words “as” and “yet” or “but” ([6:8b–10](../06/08.md)). If possible, represent these parts in your language by using repeated words or some other natural form. Consider whether a long list like this would be natural in your language. The UST models one possible way to divide the list up into shorter sentences. \n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. When he uses this form, he is focusing on himself and his fellow workers, or just on himself (although this is less likely). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 6:1 kf1d rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces his development of the ideas from the previous verses, especially from [5:20–21](../05/20.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 6:1 tbr6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit συνεργοῦντες 1 Here Paul does not directly state **with** whom he is **working**. He could be implying that he works **with**: (1) God, since God is the subject of the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “working together with God” (2) the Corinthians, since they are the ones whom is “urging.” Alternate translation: “working together with you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:1 x4hc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive καὶ, παρακαλοῦμεν 1 Here and throughout this chapter, **we** does not include the Corinthians. The first person plural could refer to: (1) Paul and those who work with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach the good news also urge” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I also urge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) @@ -680,7 +680,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 6:2 qrdt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns σωτηρίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “when I saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 6:2 sa94 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations ἰδοὺ, νῦν -1 Here, the words **Behold** and **Look** draw the attention of the audience and ask them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with words or phrases that ask the audience to listen, or you could use another form that draws the audience’s attention to the statements that follow. Alternate translation: “Pay attention! Now … Pay attention! Now” or “Listen, now … Now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) 6:2 j4k4 καιρὸς εὐπρόσδεκτος & ἡμέρα σωτηρίας 1 Here, the phrases **a day of salvation** and **a favorable time** repeat the words from the quotation exactly, except Paul uses a word that emphasizes that the **time** is good (**favorable**) instead of just appropriate (**acceptable**). Use the form that you used in the quotation, although, if possible, use a word for good **time** instead of just **acceptable time**. Alternate translation: “is a time that God considers good … is a time of salvation” or “is a time appropriate for God … is a time when God gives salvation” -6:3 shtt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure διδόντες 1 Here, the word **giving** goes with the clause “we also urge you” in [6:1](../06/01.md). It introduces an explanation of how Paul and those with him serve God. In most languages, it is best to begin a new sentence with this verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that clearly links back to “we also urge” from [6:1](../06/01.md). If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to end the previous verse with a period. Alternate translation: “As we urge you to receive the grace God, we give” or “As we serve God, we give” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +6:3 shtt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure διδόντες 1 Here, the word **giving** goes with the clause “we also urge you” in [6:1](../06/01.md). It introduces an explanation of how Paul and his fellow workers serve God. In most languages, it is best to begin a new sentence with this verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that clearly links back to “we also urge” from [6:1](../06/01.md). If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to end the previous verse with a period. Alternate translation: “As we urge you to receive the grace God, we give” or “As we serve God, we give” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 6:3 v3wc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μηδεμίαν & διδόντες προσκοπήν 1 Here, the phrase **giving no cause for offense** refers to how a person acts so that others are not offended. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form. Alternate translation: “avoiding provoking others” or “doing nothing that could cause offense” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:3 sv9d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν μηδενὶ 1 Here, the phrase **in anything** could refer to: (1) actions and behavior. Alternate translation: “in whatever we do” (2) people. Alternate translation: “among anybody” or “to any person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:3 he3c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μὴ μωμηθῇ ἡ διακονία 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) other people would do it. Alternate translation: “others might not blame our ministry” (2) God. Alternate translation: “God might not blame our ministry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -696,33 +696,33 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 6:7 cr55 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy λόγῳ 1 Here, the word **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message” or “the communication” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 6:7 dui6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐν λόγῳ ἀληθείας 1 Here Paul could use the possessive to describe: (1) a **word** about the **truth**. Alternate translation: “in the word about the truth” (2) a **word** that is characterized by **truth**. Alternate translation: “the truthful word” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 6:7 p5l5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐν δυνάμει Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **power** that comes from **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in the power that comes from God” or “in power given by God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -6:7 ef5b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διὰ τῶν ὅπλων τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῶν δεξιῶν καὶ ἀριστερῶν 1 Here speaks as if **righteousness** were **weapons** for **the right hand and the left**. He means that the righteous way in which he and those with him live their lives is like armor and swords which they use to protect themselves and fight against enemies. Paul does not state who the enemy is, but he implies that it is anyone and anything that acts against God and the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with simile form or in plain language. Alternate translation: “through righteousness, which is like weapons for the right hand and the left” or “through righteousness, which protects us from God’s enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +6:7 ef5b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διὰ τῶν ὅπλων τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῶν δεξιῶν καὶ ἀριστερῶν 1 Here speaks as if **righteousness** were **weapons** for **the right hand and the left**. He means that the righteous way in which he and his fellow workers live their lives is like armor and swords which they use to protect themselves and fight against enemies. Paul does not state who the enemy is, but he implies that it is anyone and anything that acts against God and the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with simile form or in plain language. Alternate translation: “through righteousness, which is like weapons for the right hand and the left” or “through righteousness, which protects us from God’s enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:7 gg43 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῶν ὅπλων τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **weapons** that could: (1) be **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “the weapons, which are righteousness,” (2) come from or be because of **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “the weapons that righteous provides” or “the weapons that come from righteousness” (3) defend or fight for **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “the weapons to defend righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 6:7 ozxm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῶν ὅπλων τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “righteous” or an adverb such as “righteously.” Alternate translation: “weapons, that is, how we live righteously,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 6:7 ijr2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῶν δεξιῶν καὶ ἀριστερῶν 1 Here, having **weapons** for **the right hand and the left** could describe how a soldier: (1) has an offensive weapon in one hand and a defensive weapon in the other. Alternate translation: “of righteous, both a sword and a shield” or “of righteousness for attack and defense” (2) is completely equipped for battle and able to defend against attacks from **right** and **left**. Alternate translation: “of righteous for defense on all sides” or “of righteousness with which we are fully equipped” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -6:8 ftu0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ δόξης καὶ ἀτιμίας, διὰ δυσφημίας καὶ εὐφημίας 1 In these two statements, Paul indicates that he and those with him persevere in serving God whether people think and say good or bad things about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly expresses this idea. Alternate translation: “whether we receive honor or dishonor, whether there are bad reports or good reports about us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +6:8 ftu0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ δόξης καὶ ἀτιμίας, διὰ δυσφημίας καὶ εὐφημίας 1 In these two statements, Paul indicates that he and his fellow workers persevere in serving God whether people think and say good or bad things about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly expresses this idea. Alternate translation: “whether we receive honor or dishonor, whether there are bad reports or good reports about us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:8 m51w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δόξης καὶ ἀτιμίας 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **honor** and **dishonor**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “honor” and “dishonor.” Alternate translation: “being honored and dishonored” or “others glorifying us and disgracing us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -6:8 fedq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς πλάνοι καὶ ἀληθεῖς 1 Here and in the following two verses Paul uses **as** to introduce what other people think about him and those with him and then **yet** to introduce what is really true about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally expresses a contrast between what people think and what is actually true. Alternate translation: “considered to be deceivers, but actually true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -6:8 e4pf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἀληθεῖς 1 Paul is using the adjective **true** as a noun in order to identify himself and those with him as those who truly are who they say they are. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “truthful people” or “telling the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -6:9 niij rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς ἀγνοούμενοι καὶ ἐπιγινωσκόμενοι, ὡς ἀποθνῄσκοντες καὶ ἰδοὺ, ζῶμεν, ὡς παιδευόμενοι καὶ μὴ θανατούμενοι 1 Here and in the following verse Paul uses **as** to introduce what other people think about him and those with him and then **yet** to introduce what is really true about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally expresses a contrast between what people think and what is actually true. Alternate translation: “considered to be unknown, but actually well known; considered to be dying, but actually—behold!—living; considered to be being disciplined, but actually not being put to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +6:8 fedq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς πλάνοι καὶ ἀληθεῖς 1 Here and in the following two verses Paul uses **as** to introduce what other people think about him and his fellow workers and then **yet** to introduce what is really true about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally expresses a contrast between what people think and what is actually true. Alternate translation: “considered to be deceivers, but actually true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +6:8 e4pf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἀληθεῖς 1 Paul is using the adjective **true** as a noun in order to identify himself and his fellow workers as those who truly are who they say they are. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “truthful people” or “telling the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +6:9 niij rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς ἀγνοούμενοι καὶ ἐπιγινωσκόμενοι, ὡς ἀποθνῄσκοντες καὶ ἰδοὺ, ζῶμεν, ὡς παιδευόμενοι καὶ μὴ θανατούμενοι 1 Here and in the following verse Paul uses **as** to introduce what other people think about him and his fellow workers and then **yet** to introduce what is really true about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally expresses a contrast between what people think and what is actually true. Alternate translation: “considered to be unknown, but actually well known; considered to be dying, but actually—behold!—living; considered to be being disciplined, but actually not being put to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:9 fcb5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὡς ἀγνοούμενοι καὶ ἐπιγινωσκόμενοι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the actions, Paul could be implying that he is: (1) **unknown** to many people but **known** to God. Alternate translation: “many people not knowing us, yet God knowing us well” (2) **unknown** to some people, but **known** to other people. Alternate translation: “some people not knowing us, yet others knowing us well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 6:9 x7bu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations καὶ ἰδοὺ, ζῶμεν 1 Here, the word **behold** draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen, or you could use another form that draws the audience’s attention to the statement that follows. Alternate translation: “yet, and listen to this, living” or “yet most certainly living” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) 6:9 r1d9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὡς παιδευόμενοι καὶ μὴ θανατούμενοι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the actions, Paul could be implying that: (1) God does them. Alternate translation: “God disciplining us yet not putting us to death” (2) other people do them. Alternate translation: “people disciplining us yet not putting us to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 6:9 nqcv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μὴ θανατούμενοι 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “die” or “kill.” Alternate translation: “yet not being killed” or “not dying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -6:10 so04 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς λυπούμενοι ἀεὶ δὲ χαίροντες, ὡς πτωχοὶ πολλοὺς δὲ πλουτίζοντες, ὡς μηδὲν ἔχοντες καὶ πάντα κατέχοντες 1 Here, just as in the previous verse, Paul uses **as** to introduce what other people think about him and those with him and then **yet** or **but** to introduce what is really true about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally expresses a contrast between what people think and what is actually true. Alternate translation: “considered to be sorrowful, but actually always rejoicing; considered to be poor, but actually making many rich; considered to have nothing, but actually possessing all things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -6:10 vydj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πολλοὺς & πλουτίζοντες 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and those with him made other people **rich**. He means that he helps people receive blessings from God, including forgiveness and new life, which makes them spiritually **rich**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “making many spiritually rich” or “enabling many to receive new life, which is like being rich” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +6:10 so04 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς λυπούμενοι ἀεὶ δὲ χαίροντες, ὡς πτωχοὶ πολλοὺς δὲ πλουτίζοντες, ὡς μηδὲν ἔχοντες καὶ πάντα κατέχοντες 1 Here, just as in the previous verse, Paul uses **as** to introduce what other people think about him and his fellow workers and then **yet** or **but** to introduce what is really true about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally expresses a contrast between what people think and what is actually true. Alternate translation: “considered to be sorrowful, but actually always rejoicing; considered to be poor, but actually making many rich; considered to have nothing, but actually possessing all things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +6:10 vydj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πολλοὺς & πλουτίζοντες 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers made other people **rich**. He means that he helps people receive blessings from God, including forgiveness and new life, which makes them spiritually **rich**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “making many spiritually rich” or “enabling many to receive new life, which is like being rich” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:10 pajk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πολλοὺς 1 Paul is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to refer **many** people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “many others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -6:10 fpqg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάντα 1 Here Paul could be stating that they possess: (1) **all things** that Christ possesses. In other words, because Christ rules over everything, Paul and those with him also possess everything. Alternate translation: “all things in Christ” (2) **all** spiritual blessings, which are the important **things**. Alternate translation: “all spiritual blessings” or “everything that is really important” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -6:11 mv85 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν ἀνέῳγεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς, Κορίνθιοι, ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν πεπλάτυνται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the actions, Paul implies that he and those with him did them. Alternate translation: “We have opened our mouth toward you, Corinthians; we have opened our heart wide” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +6:10 fpqg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάντα 1 Here Paul could be stating that they possess: (1) **all things** that Christ possesses. In other words, because Christ rules over everything, Paul and his fellow workers also possess everything. Alternate translation: “all things in Christ” (2) **all** spiritual blessings, which are the important **things**. Alternate translation: “all spiritual blessings” or “everything that is really important” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +6:11 mv85 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν ἀνέῳγεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς, Κορίνθιοι, ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν πεπλάτυνται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the actions, Paul implies that he and his fellow workers did them. Alternate translation: “We have opened our mouth toward you, Corinthians; we have opened our heart wide” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 6:11 v74j τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν & ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν 1 Here, the words **mouth** and **heart** are singular nouns that refer to the mouths and hearts of Paul and his fellow workers. It may be more natural in your language to use plural forms. Alternate translation: “Each of our mouths … each of our hearts” 6:11 r815 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν & ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **mouth** refers to the action of speaking with the **mouth**, and the word **heart** refers to the act of thinking and feeling with the **heart**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that refer to the actions rather than to where the actions occur. Alternate translation: “Our speaking … our feeling” or “How we speak … how we feel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -6:11 jvak rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν ἀνέῳγεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers had **opened** their mouths **toward** the Corinthians. He means that he and those with him have spoken what is true, and they have spoken confidently. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Paul could be specifically referring to: (1) how he and his fellow workers have interacted with the Corinthians in the past. Alternate translation: “We have always spoken confidently and truthfully to you” (2) what he has said in this letter so far. Alternate translation: “We have written confidently and truthfully to you” (3) what he said in [6:3–10](../06/03.md). Alternate translation: “We wrote those things to you confidently and truthfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -6:11 w42w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν πεπλάτυνται 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and those with him have **opened wide** their “hearts” to the Corinthians. He means that they love and care for the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Alternate translation: “we have made room in our hearts for you” or “we love you very much” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +6:11 jvak rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν ἀνέῳγεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers had **opened** their mouths **toward** the Corinthians. He means that he and his fellow workers have spoken what is true, and they have spoken confidently. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Paul could be specifically referring to: (1) how he and his fellow workers have interacted with the Corinthians in the past. Alternate translation: “We have always spoken confidently and truthfully to you” (2) what he has said in this letter so far. Alternate translation: “We have written confidently and truthfully to you” (3) what he said in [6:3–10](../06/03.md). Alternate translation: “We wrote those things to you confidently and truthfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +6:11 w42w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν πεπλάτυνται 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers have **opened wide** their “hearts” to the Corinthians. He means that they love and care for the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Alternate translation: “we have made room in our hearts for you” or “we love you very much” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:12 m2kq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ στενοχωρεῖσθε ἐν ἡμῖν, στενοχωρεῖσθε δὲ ἐν τοῖς σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν 1 Here Paul speaks about loving others as if it were about having space in one’s insides. When people have space for other people inside them (**not restricted**), they are loving and caring for others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “There is space for you in our hearts, but you do not have space for us in your hearts” or “You are being loved by us, but you are not fully loving us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:12 u4fz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ στενοχωρεῖσθε ἐν ἡμῖν, στενοχωρεῖσθε δὲ ἐν τοῖς σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “We are not restricting you, but your affections are restricting you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 6:12 p88s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τοῖς σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **affections**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “feel.” Alternate translation: “what you feel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 6:13 ypsz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure τὴν δὲ αὐτὴν ἀντιμισθίαν (ὡς τέκνοις λέγω) πλατύνθητε καὶ ὑμεῖς 1 Here, the clause **I speak as to children** is a parenthetical statement that breaks up the sentence to give more information about how Paul is speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could move the clause to wherever it is most natural to put a statement about how one is speaking. Alternate translation: “and—I speak as to children—in the same exchange, open yourselves wide also” or “and in the same exchange, open yourselves wide also—I speak as to children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) -6:13 b62y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν & αὐτὴν ἀντιμισθίαν 1 Here, the phrase **same exchange** refers to how Paul and his fellow workers have “opened their hearts” (that is, shown love) to the Corinthians. This is the first part of the **exchange**, and now Paul wants the Corinthians to complete this **exchange** by opening themselves to Paul and those with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what is being exchanged more explicitly. Alternate translation: “now that we have opened our hearts to you, in exchange” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +6:13 b62y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν & αὐτὴν ἀντιμισθίαν 1 Here, the phrase **same exchange** refers to how Paul and his fellow workers have “opened their hearts” (that is, shown love) to the Corinthians. This is the first part of the **exchange**, and now Paul wants the Corinthians to complete this **exchange** by opening themselves to Paul and his fellow workers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what is being exchanged more explicitly. Alternate translation: “now that we have opened our hearts to you, in exchange” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:13 zdfh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς τέκνοις λέγω 1 Here Paul indicates that he is speaking as if he were addressing **children**. He could mean that: (1) he is using words and ideas that children use, particularly referring to the idea of **exchange**. Alternate translation: “I am using childish language” or “I speak as children speak to each other” (2) he is speaking to the Corinthians as if he was their father and they were his children. Alternate translation: “I speak to you who are like my own children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) 6:13 c6vp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πλατύνθητε καὶ ὑμεῖς 1 Here Paul continues to speak about loving others as if it were about having space in one’s insides. When people have space for other people inside them, they love and care for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar clause at the end of [6:11](../06/11.md). Alternate translation: “make space in your hearts also” or “love us also” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:14 qd33 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μὴ γίνεσθε ἑτεροζυγοῦντες ἀπίστοις 1 Here Paul refers to a farming practice in which two or more animals were **yoked together** with a piece of wood that was then connected to a plow or cart. In this way, the animals together pulled the plow or cart. Paul applies this farming practice to people to indicate that believers should not try to accomplish what God wants them to do by working with **unbelievers**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Do not team up with unbelievers” or “Do not have a close relationship with unbelievers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -753,26 +753,26 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 6:17 jg48 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result κἀγὼ 1 Here, the word **and** introduces what happens when people do what God commanded in the first part of the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that more clearly introduces a result. Alternate translation: “and then I” or “and when you do those things, I” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 6:18 ft65 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations καὶ 1 Here uses the word **And** to introduce another quote from the Old Testament, specifically from [2 Samuel 7:8](../2sa/07/08.md) and [2 Samuel 7:14](../2sa/07/14.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that clarifies that Paul is quoting from the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “Again, as you can read in the Scriptures,” or “Even more, as it is written,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 6:18 dks6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἔσομαι ὑμῖν εἰς πατέρα, καὶ ὑμεῖς ἔσεσθέ μοι εἰς υἱοὺς καὶ θυγατέρας 1 These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “I will be to you as a Father; yes, you will be to me as sons and daughters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -7:intro hg36 0 # 2 Corinthians 7 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * Join with fellow believers, not unbelievers (6:11–7:4)\n5. Paul rejoices about Titus’ visit to the Corinthians (7:5–16)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Boasting\n\nIn [7:4](../07/04.md), [14](../07/14.md), Paul refers to how he boasts about the Corinthians. What he means is that he tells people about how wonderful and great he thinks they are. It is important to indicate that Paul is not describing the Corinthians as better than they actually are. Rather, Paul indicates in [7:14](../07/14.md) that what he says about them is actually true. Use a word or phrase that refers to saying good things that are true about someone else. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/boast]])\n\n### Encouragement and comfort\n\nThe words for “encouragement” and “comfort” are very closely related. Sometimes it is not clear whether Paul is focusing more on the encouragement (which implies urging someone to act) or more on the comfort (which implies making someone feel better). If you have a word or phrase that can indicate both comfort and encouragement, you could use it in this chapter. Otherwise, consider which emphasis the context implies. Generally, the ULT models one option, and the UST models the other option. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/comfort]])\n\n### The previous letter\n\nIn [7:8–12](../07/08.md), Paul refers to a letter that he had already written and sent to the Corinthians. He has already referred to this letter in chapter 2. While a few scholars think this letter is 1 Corinthians, most likely we do not have this previous letter. Paul acknowledges that this previous letter might have “grieved” them, but he wants them to know that he wrote the letter to help them do what was right. In your translation, make sure that these verses refer to a letter that Paul previously wrote, not to 2 Corinthians.\n\n### Grief and sorrow\n\nThe words for being “grieved” and for “sorrow” are very closely related. Paul uses these words to refer to being hurt or feeling upset about something. Paul distinguishes between two kinds of “sorrow”: one that is with respect to God or godly, the other that is with respect to the world or worldly. If possible use a word or words that are general enough to refer to both kinds of “sorrow.” \n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the words “we,” “us,” and “our” to refer to himself and those who work with him. He does not include the Corinthians except in [7:1](../07/01.md). You should assume that Paul only means himself and those with him unless a note specifies otherwise. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### Switches between first person singular and first person plural\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul switches between singular forms (“I”) and plural forms (“we”) of the first person. These switches are probably not just stylistic. Rather, they indicate when Paul is referring just to himself and when he is referring to himself and those who serve with him. If possible, preserve these switches in your translation. \n\n### What happened in Corinth\n\nIn this chapter, Paul continues to refer to something that happened in Corinth, something he already discussed in chapter 2. However, Paul gives even less details than he did in chapter 2 about what happened. What we know is that a person, probably a man, from the Corinthians’ group did something wrong and hurt some of the Corinthians and possibly also Paul. Paul in response wrote a severe letter, which “grieved” the Corinthians. Paul also sent Titus to Corinth to make sure that everything was resolved. In this chapter, Paul especially focuses on how happy he was to hear what Titus told him about how the Corinthians responded. Avoid providing more details in this chapter than Paul does, but make sure that your translation generally refers to events like these. +7:intro hg36 0 # 2 Corinthians 7 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * Join with fellow believers, not unbelievers (6:11–7:4)\n5. Paul rejoices about Titus’ visit to the Corinthians (7:5–16)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Boasting\n\nIn [7:4](../07/04.md), [14](../07/14.md), Paul refers to how he boasts about the Corinthians. What he means is that he tells people about how wonderful and great he thinks they are. It is important to indicate that Paul is not describing the Corinthians as better than they actually are. Rather, Paul indicates in [7:14](../07/14.md) that what he says about them is actually true. Use a word or phrase that refers to saying good things that are true about someone else. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/boast]])\n\n### Encouragement and comfort\n\nThe words for “encouragement” and “comfort” are very closely related. Sometimes it is not clear whether Paul is focusing more on the encouragement (which implies urging someone to act) or more on the comfort (which implies making someone feel better). If you have a word or phrase that can indicate both comfort and encouragement, you could use it in this chapter. Otherwise, consider which emphasis the context implies. Generally, the ULT models one option, and the UST models the other option. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/comfort]])\n\n### The previous letter\n\nIn [7:8–12](../07/08.md), Paul refers to a letter that he had already written and sent to the Corinthians. He has already referred to this letter in chapter 2. While a few scholars think this letter is 1 Corinthians, most likely we do not have this previous letter. Paul acknowledges that this previous letter might have “grieved” them, but he wants them to know that he wrote the letter to help them do what was right. In your translation, make sure that these verses refer to a letter that Paul previously wrote, not to 2 Corinthians.\n\n### Grief and sorrow\n\nThe words for being “grieved” and for “sorrow” are very closely related. Paul uses these words to refer to being hurt or feeling upset about something. Paul distinguishes between two kinds of “sorrow”: one that is with respect to God or godly, the other that is with respect to the world or worldly. If possible use a word or words that are general enough to refer to both kinds of “sorrow.” \n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the words “we,” “us,” and “our” to refer to himself and those who work with him. He does not include the Corinthians except in [7:1](../07/01.md). You should assume that Paul only means himself and his fellow workers unless a note specifies otherwise. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### Switches between first person singular and first person plural\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul switches between singular forms (“I”) and plural forms (“we”) of the first person. These switches are probably not just stylistic. Rather, they indicate when Paul is referring just to himself and when he is referring to himself and those who serve with him. If possible, preserve these switches in your translation. \n\n### What happened in Corinth\n\nIn this chapter, Paul continues to refer to something that happened in Corinth, something he already discussed in chapter 2. However, Paul gives even less details than he did in chapter 2 about what happened. What we know is that a person, probably a man, from the Corinthians’ group did something wrong and hurt some of the Corinthians and possibly also Paul. Paul in response wrote a severe letter, which “grieved” the Corinthians. Paul also sent Titus to Corinth to make sure that everything was resolved. In this chapter, Paul especially focuses on how happy he was to hear what Titus told him about how the Corinthians responded. Avoid providing more details in this chapter than Paul does, but make sure that your translation generally refers to events like these. 7:1 h5xv rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an inference from what Paul has already said, especially what he said in [6:16–18](../06/16.md) about being God’s temple and family. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference from a previous section. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “On account of those things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 7:1 k46r rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἔχοντες 1 Here, the word **having** introduces a reason why believers should **cleanse** themselves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “since we have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 7:1 tytd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ταύτας & ἔχοντες τὰς ἐπαγγελίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **promises**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “promise” or “pledge.” Alternate translation: “having been promised these things” or “God having pledged these things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 7:1 pw5n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ταύτας & τὰς ἐπαγγελίας 1 Here Paul is referring to the **promises** from the Old Testament that he quoted in [6:16–18](../06/16.md), which indicate that believers are God’s people, that God will welcome them, and that they are God’s sons and daughters. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly refers back to those **promises**. Alternate translation: “the promises that I have quoted” or “those promises” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -7:1 gwjt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive καθαρίσωμεν ἑαυτοὺς 1 By **us** and **ourselves**, Paul means himself, those with him, and the Corinthians, so use the inclusive form of those words in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +7:1 gwjt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive καθαρίσωμεν ἑαυτοὺς 1 By **us** and **ourselves**, Paul means himself, his fellow workers, and the Corinthians, so use the inclusive form of those words in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 7:1 fv49 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns παντὸς μολυσμοῦ σαρκὸς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **defilement**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “defile” or “corrupt.” Alternate translation: “anything that corrupts flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 7:1 f00w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit σαρκὸς καὶ πνεύματος 1 Here Paul uses the word **flesh** to refer to the outward part of people, particularly the body. He uses the word **spirit** to refer to the inward part of people, the part that thinks, feels, and makes decisions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that refer to similar parts of the person. Alternate translation: “of body and soul” or “of the physical and the spiritual” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 7:1 turq ἐπιτελοῦντες 1 Here, the word **perfecting** could introduce: (1) another thing that believers should do while they are “cleansing” themselves. Alternate translation: “and let us perfect” or “as we perfect” (2) the result of the “cleansing.” Alternate translation: “so that we perfect” (3) how they “cleanse” themselves. Alternate translation: “by perfecting” 7:1 c2xf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπιτελοῦντες ἁγιωσύνην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **holiness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “holy.” Alternate translation: “perfecting how holy we are” or “growing to be perfectly holy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 7:1 pt41 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession φόβῳ Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify **fear** that is directed toward **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. See how you translated the similar phrase “fear of the Lord” in [5:11](../05/11.md). Alternate translation: “the fear that is directed to God” or “the fear that we experience for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 7:1 xlet rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν φόβῳ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **fear**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “fear.” Alternate translation: “in how we fear God” or “through fearing God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -7:2 x55b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive χωρήσατε ἡμᾶς; οὐδένα ἠδικήσαμεν, οὐδένα ἐφθείραμεν, οὐδένα ἐπλεονεκτήσαμεν 1 Here and in the rest of the chapter, by **us** and **we**, Paul means himself and those with him but not the Corinthians, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +7:2 x55b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive χωρήσατε ἡμᾶς; οὐδένα ἠδικήσαμεν, οὐδένα ἐφθείραμεν, οὐδένα ἐπλεονεκτήσαμεν 1 Here and in the rest of the chapter, by **us** and **we**, Paul means himself and his fellow workers but not the Corinthians, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 7:2 c2yz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor χωρήσατε ἡμᾶς 1 Here, just as in [6:11–13](../06/11.md), Paul speaks of loving others as if it was about having space in one’s insides. When people have space for other people inside them, they are loving and caring for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Show love for us” or “Make room in your hearts for us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 7:2 v4nu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet οὐδένα ἠδικήσαμεν, οὐδένα ἐφθείραμεν, οὐδένα ἐπλεονεκτήσαμεν 1 Here Paul uses three phrases with similar structure and meaning to strongly deny that he did anything to hurt any of the Corinthians. It is possible that the word **wronged** refers to doing something unjust, the word **ruined** refers to corrupting or perverting someone, and the phrase **took advantage of** refers to gaining money or things from somebody without doing anything in return. If the repetition would not communicate a strong denial in your language, or if you do not have three words for these ideas, you could express the idea with only one or two strong clauses. Alternate translation: “We wronged and took advantage of no one” or “We did not hurt any person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -7:3 pgze rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ λέγω 1 Here Paul refers to what he said in the previous verse about how he and those with him did not hurt anyone ([7:2](../07/02.md)). Here he wishes to clarify that he does not mean that it was the Corinthians who hurt people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “I did not speak what I just spoke” or “I did not write that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +7:3 pgze rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ λέγω 1 Here Paul refers to what he said in the previous verse about how he and his fellow workers did not hurt anyone ([7:2](../07/02.md)). Here he wishes to clarify that he does not mean that it was the Corinthians who hurt people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “I did not speak what I just spoke” or “I did not write that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 7:3 bhb7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πρὸς κατάκρισιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **condemnation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to condemn you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 7:3 ckpm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit προείρηκα 1 Here Paul refers back to what he said in [6:11](../06/11.md): “our heart has been opened wide.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “I told you earlier in this letter” or “I wrote above in this letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -7:3 fay3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν ἐστε 1 Here Paul speaks as if the Corinthians were in the **hearts** of him and those with him. He means that they love the Corinthians very much. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you are in our affections” or “we love you very much” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -7:3 xzg3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism εἰς τὸ συναποθανεῖν καὶ συνζῆν 1 Here Paul refers to two extreme alternates, dying and living, to indicate that nothing that happens will keep him and those with him from loving the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “come what may” or “whatever may happen to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +7:3 fay3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν ἐστε 1 Here Paul speaks as if the Corinthians were in the **hearts** of him and his fellow workers. He means that they love the Corinthians very much. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you are in our affections” or “we love you very much” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +7:3 xzg3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism εἰς τὸ συναποθανεῖν καὶ συνζῆν 1 Here Paul refers to two extreme alternates, dying and living, to indicate that nothing that happens will keep him and his fellow workers from loving the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “come what may” or “whatever may happen to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) 7:4 uamr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πολλή μοι παρρησία πρὸς ὑμᾶς, πολλή μοι καύχησις ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **confidence** and **boasting**, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “I am very confident about you; I boast greatly on your behalf” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 7:4 yp45 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μοι παρρησία πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Here Pal could be saying that he: (1) is confident that they follow Christ and do what is right. Alternate translation: “is my confidence that you follow Christ” or “is my confidence that you are doing well” (2) can speak boldly or confidently to them. Alternate translation: “is my boldness in speaking to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 7:4 mh12 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πεπλήρωμαι τῇ παρακλήσει 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that the Corinthians did it. Alternate translation: “You have filled me with encouragement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -785,7 +785,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 7:5 zwwy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐδεμίαν ἔσχηκεν ἄνεσιν 1 Here Paul continues what he was saying in [2:13](../02/13.md) about how he “had no relief” in his “spirit.” What he means is that traveling to **Macedonia** did not help with his concerns about Titus or his sufferings. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “had no relief from our sufferings and worries at all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 7:5 byp3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οὐδεμίαν ἔσχηκεν ἄνεσιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **relief**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “relieve” or “rest.” Alternate translation: “was not relieved at all” or “could not rest at all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 7:5 h3cv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive θλιβόμενοι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “experiencing afflictions” or “people afflicting us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -7:5 i4wr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔξωθεν μάχαι, ἔσωθεν φόβοι 1 Here, the word **without** identifies the source of the **conflicts** as external to Paul and those with him. The word **within** identifies the source of the **fears** as internal to Paul and those with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that similarly identify internal and external sources. Alternate translation: “conflicts from others, fears from ourselves” or “conflicts on the outside, fears on the inside” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +7:5 i4wr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔξωθεν μάχαι, ἔσωθεν φόβοι 1 Here, the word **without** identifies the source of the **conflicts** as external to Paul and those with him. The word **within** identifies the source of the **fears** as internal to Paul and his fellow workers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that similarly identify internal and external sources. Alternate translation: “conflicts from others, fears from ourselves” or “conflicts on the outside, fears on the inside” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 7:5 zkqr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔξωθεν μάχαι, ἔσωθεν φόβοι 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **conflicts** and **fears**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “quarrel” and “fear.” Alternate translation: “people fought us without, and we feared within” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 7:6 qdto rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast with the “conflicts” and “fears” that Paul described in the previous verse ([7:5](../07/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “In spite of that,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 7:6 p3fw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish ὁ παρακαλῶν τοὺς ταπεινοὺς 1 Here Paul adding more information about **God**. He is not distinguishing between different gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly adds information instead of distinguishing between people. Alternate translation: “who is the one who comforts the humble” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) @@ -842,7 +842,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 7:13 k6gm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ χαρᾷ Τίτου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “joyful.” Alternate translation: “how joyful Titus was” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 7:13 n69e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀναπέπαυται τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ πάντων ὑμῶν 1 Here Paul speaks as if Titus’ **spirit** were a tired body that needed to be **refreshed**. He could mean that Titus: (1) was encouraged or given new energy. Alternate translation: “he was encouraged by all of you” or “he was energized by all of us” (2) was no longer worried about the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “he stopped worrying about all of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 7:13 v2g6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀναπέπαυται τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ πάντων ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all of you had refreshed his spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -7:14 c72a rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Here, the word **For** introduces another reason why Paul and those with him “rejoiced even more abundantly” ([7:13](../07/13.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “Also, we rejoiced since,” or “Further,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +7:14 c72a rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Here, the word **For** introduces another reason why Paul and his fellow workers rejoiced even more abundantly ([7:13](../07/13.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “Also, we rejoiced since,” or “Further,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 7:14 b4uq rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴ τι αὐτῷ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν κεκαύχημαι, οὐ κατῃσχύνθην 1 Paul is speaking as if his boasting about the Corinthians were a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. He uses this form to introduce what he said about the Corinthians that might have caused him to be **ashamed** if it were not true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces something that Paul did that might have led to being **ashamed**. Alternate translation: “I was not ashamed because of what I had boasted to him about you” or “what I boasted to him about you did not cause me to be ashamed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 7:14 m22c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ κατῃσχύνθην 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “I did not feel shame” or “you did not shame me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 7:14 wrxa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάντα & ἐλαλήσαμεν ὑμῖν 1 Here Paul could be referring to: (1) everything he has told the Corinthians, including the gospel. Alternate translation: “we spoke everything we have told you” (2) specifically what he told the Corinthians about his travel plans. Alternate translation: “we spoke to you about our travel plans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -851,12 +851,12 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 7:15 p2ja rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὰ σπλάγχνα αὐτοῦ περισσοτέρως εἰς ὑμᾶς ἐστιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **affections**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he loves you more more abundantly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 7:15 qm18 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit περισσοτέρως 1 Here, the phrase **more abundant** could indicate that: (1) Titus has more **affections** for them than he did before he visited them. Alternate translation: “more abundant than before” (2) Titus simply has a great deal of **affections**. Alternate translation: “very abundant” or “great” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 7:15 ezep rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἀναμιμνῃσκομένου 1 Here, the word **remembering** introduces a reason why Titus’ **affections** are **more abundant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “since he remembers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -7:15 gp09 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν πάντων ὑμῶν ὑπακοήν 1 Here, the Corinthians’ **obedience** could be directed toward: (1) Paul and those with him, including Titus. Alternate translation: “the obedience of all of you to us” (2) just Titus. Alternate translation: “the obedience of all of you to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +7:15 gp09 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν πάντων ὑμῶν ὑπακοήν 1 Here, the Corinthians’ **obedience** could be directed toward: (1) Paul and his fellow workers, including Titus. Alternate translation: “the obedience of all of you to us” (2) just Titus. Alternate translation: “the obedience of all of you to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 7:15 uagc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μετὰ φόβου καὶ τρόμου 1 Here the Corinthians’ **fear** could be directed toward: (1) Titus as Paul’s representative. Alternate translation: “with fear and trembling with respect to him” (2) the consequences of what had happened. Alternate translation: “with fear and trembling because of what had happened” (3) God, whom Titus represented. Alternate translation: “with and trembling with respect to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 7:15 dtni rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μετὰ φόβου καὶ τρόμου 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **fear** and **trembling**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “as you feared and trembled” or “fearfully and nervously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 7:15 g9bz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet φόβου καὶ τρόμου 1 The terms **fear** and **trembling** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “great fear” or “deep respect” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 7:16 hr3w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit θαρρῶ ἐν ὑμῖν 1 The implication is that Paul is **confident** that the Corinthians are doing what is right or proper. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “I am confident that you do what is proper” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -8:intro kl7m 0 # 2 Corinthians 8 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n6. Giving for the gospel (8:1–9:15)\n * Example of the Macedonians (8:1–6)\n * Paul appeals to the Corinthians to give generously (8:7–9:5)\n\nSome translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quotation from [Exodus 16:18](../exo/16/18.md) in [8:15](../08/15.md).\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The collection for the church in Jerusalem\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul encourages the Corinthians to finish collecting the money they were going to contribute to what Paul was gathering to send to the believers in Jerusalem. Paul sometimes calls participating in this collection a “grace.” He often refers to this collection indirectly, which was a polite way to talk about financial matters in his culture. If people in your culture speaks more directly about financial matters, you may need to make some of the ideas more explicit. In order to encourage the Corinthians to give to this collection, Paul tells them that the Macedonian believers have already given generously ([8:1–5](../08/01.md)), states reasons why the Corinthians should give ([8:6–15](../08/06.md)), and assures the Corinthians that the people who are managing the collection are trustworthy ([8:16–24](../08/16.md)). Make sure that your translation includes these elements that encourage the Corinthians to give to the collection.\n\n### The generosity of the Macedonians\n\nIn [8:1–5](../08/01.md), Paul tells the Corinthians about how the Macedonian believers contributed generously to the collection even though they were poor and suffering. He does this to encourage the Corinthians also to give generously. While Paul does not directly compare how much the Corinthians and Macedonians have given, he does use the Macedonians as an example. Your translation should clearly present the Macedonians as an example to imitate.\n\n### Equality\n\nIn [8:13–14](../08/13.md), Paul indicates that one of the reasons for the collection is “equality” among believers. He does not mean that every believer must have exactly the same amount of possessions and money. What he does mean is that believers who have much should share with believers who have little. He wants all believers to be doing “equally” well. So, while this does not mean that everyone has exactly the same amount of possessions and money, it does mean that some believers should not be rich when others are poor. Consider how you might express the idea of general, although not exact, “equality.”\n\n### Titus and two traveling companions\n\nIn [8:16–23](../08/16.md), Paul commends Titus and then introduces and commends the two men who travel with him. Most likely, these three men traveled together and carried Paul’s letter (2 Corinthians) with them. Paul does not name the two men, but he does indicate that they are trustworthy and should be respected. If you have normal ways of introducing and commending people, you could use them here. \n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the words “we,” “us,” and “our” to refer to himself and those who work with him. He does not include the Corinthians. You should assume that Paul only means himself and those with him unless a note specifies otherwise. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +8:intro kl7m 0 # 2 Corinthians 8 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n6. Giving for the gospel (8:1–9:15)\n * Example of the Macedonians (8:1–6)\n * Paul appeals to the Corinthians to give generously (8:7–9:5)\n\nSome translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quotation from [Exodus 16:18](../exo/16/18.md) in [8:15](../08/15.md).\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The collection for the church in Jerusalem\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul encourages the Corinthians to finish collecting the money they were going to contribute to what Paul was gathering to send to the believers in Jerusalem. Paul sometimes calls participating in this collection a “grace.” He often refers to this collection indirectly, which was a polite way to talk about financial matters in his culture. If people in your culture speaks more directly about financial matters, you may need to make some of the ideas more explicit. In order to encourage the Corinthians to give to this collection, Paul tells them that the Macedonian believers have already given generously ([8:1–5](../08/01.md)), states reasons why the Corinthians should give ([8:6–15](../08/06.md)), and assures the Corinthians that the people who are managing the collection are trustworthy ([8:16–24](../08/16.md)). Make sure that your translation includes these elements that encourage the Corinthians to give to the collection.\n\n### The generosity of the Macedonians\n\nIn [8:1–5](../08/01.md), Paul tells the Corinthians about how the Macedonian believers contributed generously to the collection even though they were poor and suffering. He does this to encourage the Corinthians also to give generously. While Paul does not directly compare how much the Corinthians and Macedonians have given, he does use the Macedonians as an example. Your translation should clearly present the Macedonians as an example to imitate.\n\n### Equality\n\nIn [8:13–14](../08/13.md), Paul indicates that one of the reasons for the collection is “equality” among believers. He does not mean that every believer must have exactly the same amount of possessions and money. What he does mean is that believers who have much should share with believers who have little. He wants all believers to be doing “equally” well. So, while this does not mean that everyone has exactly the same amount of possessions and money, it does mean that some believers should not be rich when others are poor. Consider how you might express the idea of general, although not exact, “equality.”\n\n### Titus and two traveling companions\n\nIn [8:16–23](../08/16.md), Paul commends Titus and then introduces and commends the two men who travel with him. Most likely, these three men traveled together and carried Paul’s letter (2 Corinthians) with them. Paul does not name the two men, but he does indicate that they are trustworthy and should be respected. If you have normal ways of introducing and commending people, you could use them here. \n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the words “we,” “us,” and “our” to refer to himself and those who work with him. He does not include the Corinthians. You should assume that Paul only means himself and his fellow workers unless a note specifies otherwise. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 8:1 mm8g rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a new topic. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new topic, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 8:1 d3pn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “fellow Christians” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:1 a73v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, and if it would be helpful in your language, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -878,7 +878,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 8:4 tfsj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δεόμενοι ἡμῶν, τὴν χάριν καὶ τὴν κοινωνίαν τῆς διακονίας τῆς 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **favor** and **fellowship**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “they pleaded with us to favor them and allow them to take part in this ministry that is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:4 jdqw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys τὴν χάριν καὶ τὴν κοινωνίαν 1 The two words **favor** and **fellowship** work together to express a single idea. The word **fellowship** describes what **the favor** is. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning in a different way. Alternate translation: “the favor of the fellowship” or “the gift of fellowship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) 8:4 nmw8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους 1 Here Paul does not give very many details about the **ministry** because he had already told the Corinthians about it in [1 Corinthians 16:1–4](../1co/16/01.md). From that passage and other passages, we know that Paul was collecting money from various churches to send to Jerusalem to help the believers there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it more explicit that this is what Paul is talking about. Alternate translation: “of this ministry that is for the saints in Jerusalem” or “of this ministry of sending money to the Jerusalem saints” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -8:5 y9sj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ καθὼς ἠλπίσαμεν, ἀλλ’ 1 Here Paul is implying that the Macedonians did more than Paul and those with him had **hoped**, not that they did less. If this clause would imply that the Macedonians did less, you could use a form that implies that they did more. Alternate translation: “while we had hoped for something, they did more:” or “doing more than we had hoped,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +8:5 y9sj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ καθὼς ἠλπίσαμεν, ἀλλ’ 1 Here Paul is implying that the Macedonians did more than Paul and his fellow workers had **hoped**, not that they did less. If this clause would imply that the Macedonians did less, you could use a form that implies that they did more. Alternate translation: “while we had hoped for something, they did more:” or “doing more than we had hoped,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:5 t73o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἑαυτοὺς ἔδωκαν, πρῶτον 1 Here Paul speaks as if the Macedonians were gifts that they themselves **gave** to **the Lord** and to **us**. He means that the Macedonians chose to completely serve and honor **the Lord** and **us**. If it would be helpful in your language, you express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “they first devoted themselves” or “they chose first to be servants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:5 w0el πρῶτον & καὶ 1 Here, the words **first** and **then** could indicate what is: (1) more and less important. Alternate translation: “primarily … and secondarily” (2) first and second in sequence. Alternate translation: “first … and second” 8:5 k4pa καὶ ἡμῖν 1 Here, the phrase **and then** could introduce: (1) what comes after what they **first** did. Alternate translation: “and after that to us” (2) the second part of what they **first** did. Paul implies that what comes after what they **first** did is giving money. Alternate translation: “and to us before they gave money” @@ -1092,21 +1092,21 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 10:3 k7h8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor οὐ & στρατευόμεθα 1 Here and in [10:4–6](../10/04.md), Paul speaks as if he and those with him were waging a **war**. He means that they proclaim the good news and defend it and believers against other people and powers that try to corrupt the good news and hurt believers. Paul does not mean that they are actually killing people and fighting with physical weapons. If possible, preserve the metaphor or express the idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “we are like people who wage war, but not” or “we do not fight” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) 10:3 gpd3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατὰ σάρκα 1 You should translate this phrase as you did in [10:2](../10/02.md). Alternate translation: “according to what humans value” or “according to a human perspective” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 10:4 ge87 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse ([10:3](../10/03.md)) about waging war not according to the flesh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -10:4 uf5s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor τὰ & ὅπλα τῆς στρατείας ἡμῶν οὐ σαρκικὰ, ἀλλὰ δυνατὰ τῷ Θεῷ πρὸς καθαίρεσιν ὀχυρωμάτων, λογισμοὺς καθαιροῦντες 1 Here, just as in [10:3](../10/03.md), Paul speaks as if he and those with him were involved in **warfare**. In this verse, he specifically speaks about their **weapons**, which God empowers. He also refers to **strongholds**, which are places that an army can easily defend. He defines the **strongholds** as **strategies** or arguments against him and the gospel. Paul means that God empowers him and those with him to defeat and destroy these arguments. Paul does not mean that they are actually killing people and destroying physical strongholds. If possible, preserve the metaphor or express the idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “what we use to defend ourselves are like weapons of warfare that are not fleshly but are powerful to God for overcoming strategies and arguments, which are like strongholds” or “we do not fight with fleshly weapons but with arguments that are powerful to God for the defeating of powerful enemies and strategies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +10:4 uf5s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor τὰ & ὅπλα τῆς στρατείας ἡμῶν οὐ σαρκικὰ, ἀλλὰ δυνατὰ τῷ Θεῷ πρὸς καθαίρεσιν ὀχυρωμάτων, λογισμοὺς καθαιροῦντες 1 Here, just as in [10:3](../10/03.md), Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers were involved in **warfare**. In this verse, he specifically speaks about their **weapons**, which God empowers. He also refers to **strongholds**, which are places that an army can easily defend. He defines the **strongholds** as **strategies** or arguments against him and the gospel. Paul means that God empowers him and his fellow workers to defeat and destroy these arguments. Paul does not mean that they are actually killing people and destroying physical strongholds. If possible, preserve the metaphor or express the idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “what we use to defend ourselves are like weapons of warfare that are not fleshly but are powerful to God for overcoming strategies and arguments, which are like strongholds” or “we do not fight with fleshly weapons but with arguments that are powerful to God for the defeating of powerful enemies and strategies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) 10:4 d1gj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὰ & ὅπλα τῆς στρατείας ἡμῶν 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **weapons** that are used to fight in **warfare**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different form. Alternate translation: “our weapons for fighting” or “the weapons with which we wage war” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 10:4 ohuj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς στρατείας ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **warfare**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “with which we fight” or “we use to wage war” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])\n 10:4 cluj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δυνατὰ τῷ Θεῷ 1 Here, the phrase **powerful to God** indicates that the weapons are **powerful** because God makes them powerful. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “are made powerful by God” or “have God’s power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -10:5 xuz9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor καὶ πᾶν ὕψωμα ἐπαιρόμενον κατὰ τῆς γνώσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ αἰχμαλωτίζοντες πᾶν νόημα εἰς τὴν ὑπακοὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, just as in [10:3–4](../10/03.md), Paul speaks as if he and those with him were involved in a war. In this verse, he speaks about **every high thing**, which are fortifications or walls. He means that he and those with him defeat or discredit anything that claims to be as great or important as **the knowledge of God**. Paul also speaks about taking thoughts **captive**. Just as the victor in a war takes the conquered people **captive**, so Paul and those with him wish to take peoples’ thoughts **captive** so that these people are obedient to Christ. If possible, preserve the metaphor or express the idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “anything that is like a high fortress that raises itself against the knowledge of God, and we control every thought like we we were taking it captive into the obedience of Christ” or “and anything that proudly claims to be more important than the knowledge of God, and we take control of every thought into the obedience of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +10:5 xuz9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor καὶ πᾶν ὕψωμα ἐπαιρόμενον κατὰ τῆς γνώσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ αἰχμαλωτίζοντες πᾶν νόημα εἰς τὴν ὑπακοὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, just as in [10:3–4](../10/03.md), Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers were involved in a war. In this verse, he speaks about **every high thing**, which are fortifications or walls. He means that he and his fellow workers defeat or discredit anything that claims to be as great or important as **the knowledge of God**. Paul also speaks about taking thoughts **captive**. Just as the victor in a war takes the conquered people **captive**, so Paul and his fellow workers wish to take peoples’ thoughts **captive** so that these people are obedient to Christ. If possible, preserve the metaphor or express the idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “anything that is like a high fortress that raises itself against the knowledge of God, and we control every thought like we we were taking it captive into the obedience of Christ” or “and anything that proudly claims to be more important than the knowledge of God, and we take control of every thought into the obedience of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) 10:5 b74d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῆς γνώσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **knowledge** that is about **God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a more natural form. Alternate translation: “the knowledge about God” or “the knowledge that concerns God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 10:5 vm1a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς γνώσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **knowledge**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “knowing God” or ”what we know about God“ (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 10:5 j6ra rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πᾶν νόημα 1 Here, the phrase **every thought** could refer to: (1) the thoughts that people who oppose the gospel have. Alternate translation: “every thought of people who oppose the gospel” (2) the thoughts that believers have. Alternate translation: “every thought of believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 10:5 z7ji rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὴν ὑπακοὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **obedience** that is directed to **Christ**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a more natural form. Alternate translation: “obedience to Christ” or “obedience directed to Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 10:5 r2yz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς τὴν ὑπακοὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **obedience**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “so that Christ is obeyed” or “so that people are obedient to Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -10:6 g9z4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor καὶ ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔχοντες, ἐκδικῆσαι πᾶσαν παρακοήν, ὅταν πληρωθῇ ὑμῶν ἡ ὑπακοή 1 Here Paul finishes speaking as if he and those with him were involved in a war. Here he says that they are **in readiness** like soldiers ready to attack. When they attack, they will **avenge every act of disobedience**. What he means is that, once people are captive to the “obedience of Christ,” he and those with him will punish them if they go back to being disobedient. If possible, preserve the metaphor or express the idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “and being like soldiers who are ready to avenge every act of disobedience, when your obedience would be complete” or “and being prepared to punish everyone who disobeys, when your obedience would be complete” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +10:6 g9z4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor καὶ ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔχοντες, ἐκδικῆσαι πᾶσαν παρακοήν, ὅταν πληρωθῇ ὑμῶν ἡ ὑπακοή 1 Here Paul finishes speaking as if he and his fellow workers were involved in a war. Here he says that they are **in readiness** like soldiers ready to attack. When they attack, they will **avenge every act of disobedience**. What he means is that, once people are captive to the “obedience of Christ,” he and his fellow workers will punish them if they go back to being disobedient. If possible, preserve the metaphor or express the idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “and being like soldiers who are ready to avenge every act of disobedience, when your obedience would be complete” or “and being prepared to punish everyone who disobeys, when your obedience would be complete” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) 10:6 j0bh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἑτοίμῳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **readiness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “prepared” or “ready” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 10:6 m4ds rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πᾶσαν παρακοήν, ὅταν πληρωθῇ ὑμῶν ἡ ὑπακοή 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **disobedience** and **obedience**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “every disobedient act, when you have completed being obedient” or “all the ways that people disobey, when you have completed obeying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 10:6 bgwq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑμῶν ἡ ὑπακοή 1 Here, the word **obedience** could refer to being obedient: (1) to Christ. This option is supported by the phrase “the obedience of Christ” in [10:5](../10/05.md). Alternate translation: “your obedience to Christ” (2) to Paul. Alternate translation: “your obedience to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -10:6 ipsn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πληρωθῇ ὑμῶν ἡ ὑπακοή 1 Here Paul is referring to how he wants the Corinthians to commit to obeying. When they always work towards **obedience**, then he and those with him will **avenge every act of disobedience**. He does not mean that the Corinthians need to be perfectly obedient or **complete** specific acts of obedience. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “you fully work to obey” or “you completely strive for obedience” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +10:6 ipsn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πληρωθῇ ὑμῶν ἡ ὑπακοή 1 Here Paul is referring to how he wants the Corinthians to commit to obeying. When they always work towards **obedience**, then he and his fellow workers will **avenge every act of disobedience**. He does not mean that the Corinthians need to be perfectly obedient or **complete** specific acts of obedience. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “you fully work to obey” or “you completely strive for obedience” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 10:7 y2yb τὰ κατὰ πρόσωπον βλέπετε 1 This sentence could be: (1) a command to look at what is obvious. Alternate translation: “You should look at the things according to appearance” (2) a rebuke concerning how they only look at how things appear. Alternate translation: “You are looking at the things according to appearance” 10:7 gsvr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κατὰ πρόσωπον 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **appearance**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “as they appear” or “according to how they appear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 10:7 iuqd rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἴ τις πέποιθεν ἑαυτῷ Χριστοῦ εἶναι, τοῦτο λογιζέσθω 1 Here Paul uses the conditional form to indicate what person he is addressing with his command to **consider this again**. If your language does not use this form to introduce a specific person or group of people, you could use a different form. Alternate translation: “Let anyone who is convinced in himself that he is of Christ consider this” or “A person may be convinced in himself that he is of Christ. Let that person consider this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) @@ -1116,7 +1116,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 10:7 z1t5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p λογιζέσθω 1 Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “he should consider” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 10:7 iyxt rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τοῦτο & πάλιν 1 Here, the word **this** refers ahead to the clauses **just as he {is} of Christ, so also {are} we**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to what a person is about to say. Alternate translation: “again what I am about to write” or “again what follows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 10:7 f3i9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “so also we are of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -10:8 mezz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of Paul’s claim that he and those with him are “of Christ” (see [10:7](../10/07.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “I say that because,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +10:8 mezz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of Paul’s claim that he and his fellow workers are of Christ (see [10:7](../10/07.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “I say that because,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 10:8 y3ny rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐάν τε 1 Here Paul could be using even if to introduce: (1) something that he thinks really is true. In other words, Paul really is going to **boast** in a way that he thinks is excessive. Alternate translation: “even when” (2) something that he thinks might be true. In other words, he thinks that the Corinthians might consider his boasting to be excessive. Alternate translation: “even supposing that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 10:8 qm9q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit περισσότερόν τι 1 Here, the phrase **somewhat excessively** could mean that Paul is boasting: (1) more than some people would consider proper. Alternate translation: “somewhat more than what is proper” (2) a great deal. Alternate translation: “very much” (3) more than he already has. Alternate translation: “somewhat more than I have already” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 10:8 pm42 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἐξουσίας ἡμῶν, ἧς ἔδωκεν ὁ Κύριος 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how we have been authorized by the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -1135,22 +1135,22 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 10:11 m6m6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὁ τοιοῦτος 1 Here, the phrase **such {a person}** refers to whoever says that Paul’s letters are powerful but his personal presence is weak (see [10:10](../10/10.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that clearly refers back to this person from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “that person” or “anyone who says those things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 10:11 xvjm rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τοῦτο & ὅτι 1 Here, the word **this** refers to what Paul introduces with the word **that**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different form that introduces what the person should **consider**. Alternate translation: “that” or “the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 10:11 kb55 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῷ λόγῳ 1 Here, the word **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in our words” or “in our communication” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -10:11 hu56 τοιοῦτοι 1 Here Paul could be comparing what he and those with him are like **in our word** with what they: (1) are like **in our deed**. In this case, Paul is simply comparing **word** and **deed**. Alternate translation: “such is what we are” (2) will be like in **deed** when they visit the Corinthians. In this case, Paul is speaking about what they will do in the future. Alternate translation: “such we will be” -10:11 g58z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῷ ἔργῳ 1 Here, the word **deed** refers to what Paul and those with him do and will do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in what we do” or “in how we will act” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +10:11 hu56 τοιοῦτοι 1 Here Paul could be comparing what he and his fellow workers are like **in our word** with what they: (1) are like **in our deed**. In this case, Paul is simply comparing **word** and **deed**. Alternate translation: “such is what we are” (2) will be like in **deed** when they visit the Corinthians. In this case, Paul is speaking about what they will do in the future. Alternate translation: “such we will be” +10:11 g58z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῷ ἔργῳ 1 Here, the word **deed** refers to what Paul and his fellow workers do and will do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in what we do” or “in how we will act” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 10:12 r9cb rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verses ([10:10–11](../10/10.md)) in response to what some people say about him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 10:12 k94z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἐνκρῖναι ἢ συνκρῖναι 1 The terms **classify** and **compare** mean similar things. The word **classify** refers to considering something to be part of a group, and the word **compare** refers to evaluating something to see if it is similar to something else. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “to compare” or “to include” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 10:12 i85y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, ἑαυτοὺς μετροῦντες καὶ συνκρίνοντες ἑαυτοὺς ἑαυτοῖς 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, or you could combine the two phrases. Alternate translation: “measuring themselves by themselves, indeed, comparing themselves with themselves” or “measuring and comparing themselves by themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 10:12 q7i9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, ἑαυτοὺς μετροῦντες καὶ συνκρίνοντες ἑαυτοὺς ἑαυτοῖς 1 Here, the word **themselves** could indicate that each person: (1) measures and compares himself by himself or herself by herself. Alternate translation: “measuring themselves by their own standard, and comparing themselves with their own standard” (2) measures and compares himself or herself by others in a specific group. Alternate translation: “measuring themselves by each other, and comparing themselves with each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 10:12 n8sx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, ἑαυτοὺς μετροῦντες 1 Here Paul speaks as if people were objects that someone would “measure.” He is speaking about how people compare or contrast themselves with people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “evaluating themselves by themselves” or “analyzing themselves by themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 10:12 zwl5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ συνιᾶσιν 1 Here Paul does not state what it is that these people **do not understand**. What he means is that these people are not acting in wise ways. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that expresses the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “are not wise” or “do not act with understanding” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -10:13 x79x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς τὰ ἄμετρα 1 Here, the phrase **to the immeasurable things** could refer to: (1) how Paul and those with him are not boasting beyond what God has “measured” to them. Alternate translation: “about what is not measured to us” (2) how Paul and those with him do not boast without any real standard. Alternate translation: “in unmeasured ways” or “without any standards” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +10:13 x79x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς τὰ ἄμετρα 1 Here, the phrase **to the immeasurable things** could refer to: (1) how Paul and his fellow workers are not boasting beyond what God has “measured” to them. Alternate translation: “about what is not measured to us” (2) how Paul and those with him do not boast without any real standard. Alternate translation: “in unmeasured ways” or “without any standards” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 10:13 a4ud rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ μέτρον τοῦ κανόνος 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **measure** that could: (1) measure things according to a **limit** or standard. Alternate translation: “the measure based on the standard” (2) define a specific **limit** or area. Alternate translation: “the measure that identifies the area” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 10:13 y6ch rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οὗ ἐμέρισεν ἡμῖν ὁ Θεὸς μέτρου 1 Here, the word **measure** could: (1) restate what it is that **God has assigned to us**. Alternate translation: “that God has assigned to us, which is a measure” (2) how God has **assigned** the **measure of the limit**. Alternate translation: “that God has assigned to us as a measure” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 10:13 fx2b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μέτρου, ἐφικέσθαι ἄχρι καὶ ὑμῶν 1 Here Paul speaks as if a **measure** could reach out and touch a person. He means that the **measure** includes the Corinthians in what it measures. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “a measure that included even you” or “a measure that measured even as far as you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -10:13 u84l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐφικέσθαι ἄχρι καὶ ὑμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **that reached even as far as you** indicates that the **measure** includes the Corinthians as something that Paul and those with him can boast about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “that reached even as far as you as something we can boast about” or “that extends what we can boast about to include you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +10:13 u84l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐφικέσθαι ἄχρι καὶ ὑμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **that reached even as far as you** indicates that the **measure** includes the Corinthians as something that Paul and his fellow workers can boast about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “that reached even as far as you as something we can boast about” or “that extends what we can boast about to include you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 10:14 ay6h rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 2 Here, the word **For** introduces Paul’s proof that the “limit” he mentioned in the previous verse does reach as far as the Corinthians (see [10:13](../10/13.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces proof for a previous statement. Alternate translation: “You can tell that is true because” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -10:14 ctjf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ & ὑπερεκτείνομεν ἑαυτούς 2 Here Paul is indicating that he and those with him have not gone beyond the “limit” that he refers to in [10:13](../10/13.md). Express the idea so that the link to the previous verse is clear. Alternate translation: “we are not going beyond our limit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -10:14 lefl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς μὴ ἐφικνούμενοι εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul refers to what would need to be true if he and those with him were actually **overextending** themselves. That would be true only if they did not **reach** or visit the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “which would only be true if we had not come to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +10:14 ctjf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ & ὑπερεκτείνομεν ἑαυτούς 2 Here Paul is indicating that he and his fellow workers have not gone beyond the “limit” that he refers to in [10:13](../10/13.md). Express the idea so that the link to the previous verse is clear. Alternate translation: “we are not going beyond our limit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +10:14 lefl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς μὴ ἐφικνούμενοι εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul refers to what would need to be true if he and his fellow workers were actually **overextending** themselves. That would be true only if they did not **reach** or visit the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “which would only be true if we had not come to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 10:14 lpiu rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **for** introduces further evidence or proof for Paul’s claim that he and those with him were not **overextending** themselves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces evidence or proof. Alternate translation: “since in reality” or “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 10:14 wyzv ἐφθάσαμεν 1 Here, the phrase **we came** could indicate that: (1) Paul and those with him had already visited the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “we went” (2) Paul and those with him visited the Corinthians before Paul’s opponents visited the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “before anyone else did, we came” 10:15 hu9l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς τὰ ἄμετρα 1 See how you translated the similar phrase in [10:13](../10/13.md). Alternate translation: “in unmeasured ways” or “without any standards” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From e82e1f711d5fcebeae791af1fdbc1dedf9f92fdb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 22:33:52 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 98/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 28 ++++++++++++++-------------- 1 file changed, 14 insertions(+), 14 deletions(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index 6bda4b1c88..ab030f809c 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -892,7 +892,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 8:7 mv4w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐν παντὶ 1 Paul says **everything** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in so many things” or “in very many ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 8:7 iu8n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πίστει, καὶ λόγῳ, καὶ γνώσει, καὶ πάσῃ σπουδῇ, καὶ τῇ ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐν ὑμῖν ἀγάπῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, **speech**, **knowledge**, **earnestness**, and **love**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “that is, you are faithful, proper in what you speak, knowledgable about many things, very earnest, and full of how we have loved you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:7 hy1o rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **from us in you**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “from you in us.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -8:7 zhg5 ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Here, the phrase **from us in you** could indicate that: (1) the **love** is how Paul and those with him feel about the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “that we have for you” (2) Paul and those with him enabled or caused the Corinthians to have **love**. Alternate translation: “that came from us and is now in you” +8:7 zhg5 ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Here, the phrase **from us in you** could indicate that: (1) the **love** is how Paul and his fellow workers feel about the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “that we have for you” (2) Paul and those with him enabled or caused the Corinthians to have **love**. Alternate translation: “that came from us and is now in you” 8:7 gqz3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν ταύτῃ τῇ χάριτι 1 Here, the word **grace** refers to what it did in [8:4](../08/04.md), [6](../08/06.md): being able to contribute money to what Paul was collecting for believers in Jerusalem. If possible, translate it as you did in those verses. Alternate translation: “in this gift” or “in this gracious act of giving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:7 fpe1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ταύτῃ τῇ χάριτι 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in what you are graciously contributing” or “in what you are giving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:8 mc1z rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns λέγω 1 The pronoun **this** refers to what Paul said in the previous verse about how the Corinthians “should abound in this act of grace” ([8:7](../08/07.md)). If this is not clear for your readers, you could more clearly refer to that exhortation. Alternate translation: “I say what I just did” or “I say that you should abound in this way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -936,7 +936,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 8:16 w8zo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations χάρις & τῷ Θεῷ 1 Here, **thanks {be} to God** is an exclamatory phrase that communicates Paul’s thankfulness. Use an exclamation form that is natural in your language for communicating thanks. Alternate translation: “we give thanks to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) 8:16 dgpj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish τῷ διδόντι 1 Here Paul adding more information about **God**. He is not distinguishing between different gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly adds information instead of distinguishing between people. Alternate translation: “who has placed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 8:16 duy8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῷ διδόντι τὴν αὐτὴν σπουδὴν ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ Τίτου 1 Here, Paul is speaking as if **earnestness** were an object that **God** could put **into the heart of Titus**. He means that God made **the heart of Titus** earnest. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one making the same earnestness on your behalf characterize the heart of Titus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -8:16 yhr2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν αὐτὴν σπουδὴν 1 Here, the word **same** indicates that the **earnestness** that Titus has is the same **earnestness** that Paul and those with him have. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “the same earnestness that we have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +8:16 yhr2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν αὐτὴν σπουδὴν 1 Here, the word **same** indicates that the **earnestness** that Titus has is the same **earnestness** that Paul and his fellow workers have. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “the same earnestness that we have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:16 vsm3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διδόντι τὴν αὐτὴν σπουδὴν ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ Τίτου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **earnestnest**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “making the heart of Titus earnest on your behalf” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:16 cr18 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῇ καρδίᾳ Τίτου 1 In Paul’s culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by using plain language. Alternate translation: “the mind of Titus” or “what Titus wants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 8:17 d9he rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ὅτι 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of one way in which Titus showed the “earnestness” that Paul referred to in the previous verse ([8:16](../08/16.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation or basis for a previous statement. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “For example,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) @@ -945,7 +945,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 8:17 jlyp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture ἐξῆλθεν 1 Most likely, Titus and those who traveled with him took this letter from Paul to the Corinthians. Use whatever tense is most natural for referring to this action. Alternate translation: “he is going” or “he went” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) 8:17 dlo1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom αὐθαίρετος 1 Here, the phrase **of his own accord** indicates that no one forced or required Titus to act as he did. Rather, they he to do so on their own. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression. See you how translated the similar phrase in [8:3](../08/03.md). Alternate translation: “of his own free will” or “because he wanted to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 8:18 txld rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “Also,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -8:18 crw1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture συνεπέμψαμεν 1 Here Paul refers to how he and those with him sent another believer along with Titus. Use the same tense that you used in the previous verse for Titus’ travel. Alternate translation: “we are sending together” or “we sent together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +8:18 crw1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture συνεπέμψαμεν 1 Here Paul refers to how he and his fellow workers sent another believer along with Titus. Use the same tense that you used in the previous verse for Titus’ travel. Alternate translation: “we are sending together” or “we sent together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) 8:18 rje2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν ἀδελφὸν 1 Paul is using the term **brother** to mean a person who shares the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:18 nd28 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 1 Here, the phrase **in the gospel** describes generally in what area this **brother** is praised. Paul means that this **brother** acts to spread the gospel. This probably includes preaching the good news, but it probably also includes many other acts of service, including visiting believers and collecting money for other believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “for his service to the gospel” or “for spreading the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:19 j9rk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ μόνον & ἀλλὰ 1 Here, the phrase **not only this** refers to how this “brother” received praise from all the churches. Paul uses this phrase to introduce something he thinks is even more important about this “brother.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something even more important. Alternate translation: “even more,” or “more importantly,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -958,7 +958,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 8:19 lvyu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit προθυμίαν ἡμῶν 1 Here Paul implies that they have **readiness** to help fellow believers, particularly the fellow believers in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “our readiness to help others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:19 v22x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns προθυμίαν ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **readiness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how ready we are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:20 tfv0 στελλόμενοι 1 Here, the word **avoiding** introduces Paul’s reason for including this fellow believer in the process of collecting and distributing money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase here that introduces a reason for doing something. Alternate translation: “we included him to avoid” or “our goal was to avoid” -8:20 o27q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo τοῦτο, μή τις 1 Here Paul introduces what he and those with him wish to avoid by using the word **this**, and then he states what it is that they do not want to happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different form that identifies what Paul wishes to avoid. Alternate translation: “how someone” or “any possibility that a person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +8:20 o27q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo τοῦτο, μή τις 1 Here Paul introduces what he and his fellow workers wish to avoid by using the word **this**, and then he states what it is that they do not want to happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different form that identifies what Paul wishes to avoid. Alternate translation: “how someone” or “any possibility that a person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) 8:20 a3ps rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ ἁδρότητι ταύτῃ τῇ διακονουμένῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **generosity**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “concerning what people generously offered that is being administered” or “concerning the generous gift being administered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:20 mbm3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῇ ἁδρότητι ταύτῃ 1 Here, the word **generosity** refers to the large sum of money that Paul has collected and plans to give to the believers in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “this large sum of money” or “this generous sharing with the believers in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:20 a7xv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τῇ διακονουμένῃ ὑφ’ ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that we are administering” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -966,12 +966,12 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 8:21 ey5n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καλὰ, οὐ μόνον ἐνώπιον Κυρίου, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐνώπιον ἀνθρώπων 1 Here Paul speaks as if **{what is} good** were in front of or **before** both **the Lord** and **men**. He means that he cares about both what **men** and **the Lord** think is **good**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “not only what is good in the Lord’s eyes, but also what is good in men’s eyes” or “not only what the Lord considers to be proper, but also what men consider to be proper” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:21 fitv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “humans” or “men and women” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 8:22 mdcs rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a new idea, which is that Paul is sending one more person with Titus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new idea, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -8:22 j5jt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture συνεπέμψαμεν 1 Here Paul refers to how he and those with him sent yet another believer along with Titus. Use the same tense that you used in [8:17](../08/17.md) for Titus’ travel. Alternate translation: “we are sending” or “we have sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +8:22 j5jt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture συνεπέμψαμεν 1 Here Paul refers to how he and his fellow workers sent yet another believer along with Titus. Use the same tense that you used in [8:17](../08/17.md) for Titus’ travel. Alternate translation: “we are sending” or “we have sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) 8:22 ax5x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν ἀδελφὸν ἡμῶν 1 Paul is using the term **brother** to refer to a person who shares the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “another believer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:22 d3yj rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the word **them** refers to Titus and the previously mentioned brother. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom the pronoun refers. Alternate translation: “with these two men” or “with Titus and the other brother” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -8:22 qqcs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὃν ἐδοκιμάσαμεν 1 Here, the phrase **whom we proved** could indicate that Paul and those with him have: (1) tested the **brother**, and he successfully passed the tests. Alternate translation: “whom we proved by testing” or “whom we tested and approved” (2) seen what the **brother** does, and they approve of him. Alternate translation: “whom we are sure about” or “of whom we approve” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +8:22 qqcs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὃν ἐδοκιμάσαμεν 1 Here, the phrase **whom we proved** could indicate that Paul and his fellow workers have: (1) tested the **brother**, and he successfully passed the tests. Alternate translation: “whom we proved by testing” or “whom we tested and approved” (2) seen what the **brother** does, and they approve of him. Alternate translation: “whom we are sure about” or “of whom we approve” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:22 bay7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πολλοῖς, πολλάκις σπουδαῖον ὄντα 1 Here, the phrase **often being eager** identifies what this **brother** was **proved** to be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this connection more explicit. Alternate translation: “many ways to often be eager” or “in many ways that he was often eager” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -8:22 l5yd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πολὺ σπουδαιότερον 1 Here Paul implies that the **brother** is **even more eager** than he was when Paul and those with him **proved** him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “he is even more eager than he was before” or “he is more eager than ever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +8:22 l5yd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πολὺ σπουδαιότερον 1 Here Paul implies that the **brother** is **even more eager** than he was when Paul and his fellow workers **proved** him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “he is even more eager than he was before” or “he is more eager than ever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:22 cusu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πεποιθήσει πολλῇ τῇ εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **confidence**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because of how very confident he is in you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:22 iw9e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πεποιθήσει πολλῇ τῇ εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul implies that the **brother** has **confidence** that the Corinthians will do what is right, particularly that they will give generously to help the believers in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “because of his great confidence that you will give generously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:23 dbgj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet κοινωνὸς ἐμὸς καὶ εἰς ὑμᾶς συνεργός 1 The terms **partner** and **fellow worker** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “he is my partner in working for you” or “he is my fellow worker for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -986,7 +986,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 8:24 lr1f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς πρόσωπον τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν 1 He Paul speaks as if the **proof** was directly in front of the **faces of the churches**. What he means is that the **proof** is something that the **churches** can see and know about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in the sight of the churches” or “with the knowledge of the churches” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:24 oc83 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν & ἔνδειξιν τῆς ἀγάπης ὑμῶν, καὶ ἡμῶν καυχήσεως ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **proof** and **love**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “that you do love others and what we boasted about you is right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 9:intro lt8d 0 # 2 Corinthians 9 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n6. Giving for the gospel (8:1–9:15)\n * Paul appeals to the Corinthians to give generously (8:7–9:5)\n * Blessing and thanksgiving (9:6–15)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse [9:9](../09/09.md), which is quoted from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Plans for the collection\n\nIn [9:1–5](../09/01.md), Paul continues to speak about the collection for the Jerusalem believers, how the Corinthians should contribute to it, and why he is sending Titus and two other believers to the Corinthians. For more information, see the introduction to chapter 8. \n\n### God enables and blesses those who give\n\nIn [9:6–14](../09/06.md), Paul describes how God gives people enough money and possessions so that they can give to others, and he also describes how God blesses people who do this. Finally, he explains how giving and receiving gifts glorifies God. Your translation should not suggest that God makes people who give to others very rich. Instead of that, Paul is saying that God gives some people more than they need so that they can give what they have to fellow believers, which leads to thanksgiving and glory to God. \n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Farming metaphors\n\nIn [9:6](../09/06.md), [10](../09/10.md), Paul speaks of giving to fellow believers as if it were farming. In [9:6](../09/06.md), Paul refers to how farmers who sow much seed will harvest more produce. This applies to believers giving to each other: those who give more will produce more blessings for others and glory to God. In [9:10](../09/10.md), Paul refers to how God is the one who provides the seeds and the produce for farmers. This again applies to believers giving to each other: God is the one who gives some believers more than they need so that they can share it with others, and God also makes those gifts bless others and glorify him. If possible, preserve these metaphors or express the ideas in simile form. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n -9:1 wc5l rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation concerning why Paul and those with him boast about the Corinthians (see [8:24](../08/24.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now,” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +9:1 wc5l rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation concerning why Paul and his fellow workers boast about the Corinthians (see [8:24](../08/24.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now,” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 9:1 fxs3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους 1 Here Paul is referring specifically to the **ministry** of collecting and giving money to the **saints** in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what Paul is referring to more explicit. Alternate translation: “the ministry that is to the saints in Jerusalem” or “the money that we are collecting for the Jerusalem saints” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 9:1 wcuz περισσόν μοί ἐστιν τὸ γράφειν ὑμῖν 1 Alternate translation: “it is really not necessary for me to write to you” 9:2 o55j rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces the reason why it is “excessive” for Paul to write to the Corinthians about the collection. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “It is excessive since” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -1008,7 +1008,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 9:4 dov9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἐὰν ἔλθωσιν σὺν ἐμοὶ Μακεδόνες, καὶ εὕρωσιν ὑμᾶς ἀπαρασκευάστους 1 Here Paul introduces something that could happen when Paul visits them. There are two things that Paul thinks are possibilities. First, **Macedonians** might travel with him. Second, the Corinthians might be **unprepared**. Paul wishes to say that if both these things were to happen, both he and the Corinthians would be **ashamed**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces something that might happen. Alternate translation: “suppose that Macedonians come with and find you unprepared; in that case” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) 9:4 j8ey rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπαρασκευάστους 1 Here Paul implies that they would be **unprepared** to give money to the collection. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate: “unprepared to contribute” or “unprepared to give generously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 9:4 dy3x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καταισχυνθῶμεν ἡμεῖς, ἵνα μὴ λέγωμεν ὑμεῖς, ἐν τῇ ὑποστάσει ταύτῃ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this situation would shame us—not to mention you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -9:4 wyzr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom καταισχυνθῶμεν ἡμεῖς, ἵνα μὴ λέγωμεν ὑμεῖς, ἐν 1 Here, the phrase **not to mention you** indicates that Paul thinks that the Corinthians would obviously be **ashamed**, even more than Paul and those with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that expresses that idea. Alternate translation: “we, and most surely you, would be ashamed by” or “we—to say nothing of you—would be ashamed by” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +9:4 wyzr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom καταισχυνθῶμεν ἡμεῖς, ἵνα μὴ λέγωμεν ὑμεῖς, ἐν 1 Here, the phrase **not to mention you** indicates that Paul thinks that the Corinthians would obviously be **ashamed**, even more than Paul and his fellow workers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that expresses that idea. Alternate translation: “we, and most surely you, would be ashamed by” or “we—to say nothing of you—would be ashamed by” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 9:4 vhme rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῇ ὑποστάσει ταύτῃ 1 Here, the phrase **this situation** could refer to: (1) what would actually happen if the Corinthians were **unprepared** in contrast to what Paul had told the Macedonians would happen. Alternate translation: “what would actually be true” or “what had happened” (2) how sure Paul had been that the Corinthians would be ready. Alternate translation: “how confident we were” or “this confidence” (3) the project that Paul was undertaking, which was the collection of money for the Jerusalem believers. Alternate translation: “our project” or “what we were planning to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 9:4 rz1f rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants τῇ ὑποστάσει ταύτῃ 1 Here most ancient manuscripts read **this situation**. The ULT follows that reading. Some ancient manuscripts read “this situation of boasting.” Most likely, the phrase “of boasting” was added by accident because it appears in the similar phrase in [11:17](../11/17.md). So, it is recommended that you use the reading of the ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 9:5 v9y2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Here, the word **So** introduces an inference or conclusion from what Paul said in the previous verse (see [9:5](../09/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion. Alternate translation: “Therefore,” or “So then,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -1052,7 +1052,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 9:11 fpko rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς πᾶσαν ἁπλότητα 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **generosity**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to be very generous” or “to act generously in every way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 9:11 b3e5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἥτις 1 The pronoun **which** refers to **generosity**. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer more directly to **generosity**. Alternate translation: “which generosity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 9:11 b5n3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κατεργάζεται & εὐχαριστίαν τῷ Θεῷ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **thanksgiving**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “causes thanks to be given to God” or “leads to people thanking God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -9:11 u57h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δι’ ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **through us** shows that Paul and those with him are involved in how the **generosity** leads to **thanksgiving**. More specifically, they are the ones who collect and send the gifts to fellow believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “through our work” or “by what we do with your gifts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +9:11 u57h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δι’ ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **through us** shows that Paul and his fellow workers are involved in how the **generosity** leads to **thanksgiving**. More specifically, they are the ones who collect and send the gifts to fellow believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “through our work” or “by what we do with your gifts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 9:12 vuc2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡ διακονία τῆς λειτουργίας ταύτης 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **ministry** that is accomplished by performing **this service**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “accomplishing this service” or “the ministry of performing this service” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 9:12 l7kq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς λειτουργίας ταύτης 1 Here, the phrase **this service** refers specifically to collecting and sending money to help the believers in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “of this service of helping the Jerusalem believers” or “of this service of collecting money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 9:12 esk7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καὶ περισσεύουσα διὰ πολλῶν εὐχαριστιῶν τῷ Θεῷ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **thanksgivings**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “is also causing God to be thanked many times” or “is also leading to many people often thanking God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -1072,7 +1072,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 9:14 vytr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν ὑπερβάλλουσαν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐφ’ ὑμῖν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how very kind God has been to you” or “what God has graciously enabled you to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 9:15 sxtg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations χάρις τῷ Θεῷ 1 Here, **Thanks {be} to God** is an exclamatory phrase that communicates Paul’s thankfulness. Use an exclamation form that is natural in your language for communicating thanks. See how you translated the similar phrase in [8:16](../08/16.md). Alternate translation: “we give thanks to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) 9:15 es8c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo ἐπὶ τῇ ἀνεκδιηγήτῳ αὐτοῦ δωρεᾷ 1 Here Paul does not clarify exactly what this **gift** is. He could mean the way that the Corinthians give that leads to a close connection between believers and glory to God. He could mean Jesus himself, whom God gave. In this case, use a general expression for a gift, since Paul does not clarify exactly what **gift** he means. Alternate translation: “for what he has given us, which is indescribable” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) -10:intro abcd 0 # 2 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n7. Paul defends his apostolic authority (10:1–13:10)\n * The true standard for boasting (10:1–18)\n\nSome translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words in [10:17](../10/17.md), which are from [Jeremiah 9:24](../jer/09/24.md).\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Paul’s opponents\n\nIn this and the following chapters, Paul defends himself and his authority against people who said that they were better than Paul and that the Corinthians should listen to them instead of to Paul. These people either lived in or were visiting Corinth. Paul does not state who these people are or refer to them directly. However, he does refer indirectly to what people are saying about him. Consider whether your readers would notice and understand Paul’s indirect references to his opponents. If not, you may need to make some of his references more explicit. See the notes for specific issues and translation options. \n\n### Accusations against Paul\n\nIn [10:1](../10/01.md), [10](../10/10.md), Paul states that some people think that he is meek and gentle in person but bold and forceful when he is away. In [10:7](../10/07.md), Paul hints that his opponents might say that they are “of Christ” but that Paul and those with him are not. It is very likely that Paul knew more things that people said about him, but he does not state anything more directly. Make sure that your translation shows that Paul knew that people were saying at least these two things about him.\n\n### Boasting\n\nIn [10:8](../10/08.md), [13](../10/13.md), [15–17](../10/15.md), Paul speaks about boasting. In Paul’s culture, not all boasting was considered bad. Instead, there were good and bad kinds of boasting. In these verses, Paul explains what counts as good boasting, and he explains that he boasts in a good way. He also implies that his opponents boast in a bad way. You should use a word or phrase that refers to saying that someone or something is great, and make sure that this word or phrase could refer to something good or to something bad. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/boast]])\n\n### Measuring, measures, and limits\n\nIn [10:12–16](../10/12.md), Paul speaks about “measures” and “limits.” He is referring to standards with which people compare themselves and rules according to which people act. He argues that he and those with him have compared themselves to a standard that God has provided and work according to rules that God gave. He suggests that his opponents compare themselves to standards they have invented and do not follow the rules that God has given. Further, Paul argues that the rules God gave to him and those with him require them to be the ones who teach the Corinthians. Consider what words and phrases would express these ideas clearly in your language. \n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Ironic speech\n\nIn [10:1](../10/01.md), Paul describes himself as “meek” when he is with the Corinthians but “bold” when he is away. He is speaking ironically, that is, describing himself as his opponents do when he does not really believe it. This is clear from [10:10](../10/10.md), where Paul states that this opinion comes from others, not from himself. Further, it is possible that what Paul says in [10:10](../10/10.md) is also ironic speech: “we do not dare to classify or compare ourselves with some of the ones commending themselves.” It is likely, however, that Paul actually means this and is not speaking from another person’s perspective. Consider a natural way to express the ironic speech in [10:1](../10/01.md) so that your readers know that Paul is speaking from the perspective of his opponents.\n\n### War metaphor\n\nIn verses [10:3–6](../10/03.md), Paul speaks of preaching the gospel and opposing God’s enemies as if he and those with him were fighting a war. While he and those with him do not try to kill their enemies, he does mean that they fight and struggle very hard. If possible, preserve this metaphor or express the idea in simile form. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the words “we,” “us,” and “our” to refer to himself and those who work with him. He does not include the Corinthians. You should assume that Paul only means himself and those with him unless a note specifies otherwise. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### The word for “limit” and “area”\n\nThe word translated “limit” in [10:13](../10/13.md), [15](../10/15.md) and “area” in [10:16](../10/16.md) most generally refers to a straight stick that could be used for measuring things. In these verses, it could refer primarily to the standard by which things are measured or to the things that are measured. If the word refers to the standard by which things are measured, it refers primarily to what God has called Paul and those with him to do. The UST generally follows this interpretation. If the word refers to the things that are measured, it refers primarily to the people or areas in which God has called Paul and those with him to preach the gospel. The ULT generally follows this interpretation. Before you translate these verses, you should read [10:13–16](../10/13.md) and consider which interpretation best fits with what Paul is arguing. +10:intro abcd 0 # 2 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n7. Paul defends his apostolic authority (10:1–13:10)\n * The true standard for boasting (10:1–18)\n\nSome translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words in [10:17](../10/17.md), which are from [Jeremiah 9:24](../jer/09/24.md).\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Paul’s opponents\n\nIn this and the following chapters, Paul defends himself and his authority against people who said that they were better than Paul and that the Corinthians should listen to them instead of to Paul. These people either lived in or were visiting Corinth. Paul does not state who these people are or refer to them directly. However, he does refer indirectly to what people are saying about him. Consider whether your readers would notice and understand Paul’s indirect references to his opponents. If not, you may need to make some of his references more explicit. See the notes for specific issues and translation options. \n\n### Accusations against Paul\n\nIn [10:1](../10/01.md), [10](../10/10.md), Paul states that some people think that he is meek and gentle in person but bold and forceful when he is away. In [10:7](../10/07.md), Paul hints that his opponents might say that they are “of Christ” but that Paul and his fellow workers are not. It is very likely that Paul knew more things that people said about him, but he does not state anything more directly. Make sure that your translation shows that Paul knew that people were saying at least these two things about him.\n\n### Boasting\n\nIn [10:8](../10/08.md), [13](../10/13.md), [15–17](../10/15.md), Paul speaks about boasting. In Paul’s culture, not all boasting was considered bad. Instead, there were good and bad kinds of boasting. In these verses, Paul explains what counts as good boasting, and he explains that he boasts in a good way. He also implies that his opponents boast in a bad way. You should use a word or phrase that refers to saying that someone or something is great, and make sure that this word or phrase could refer to something good or to something bad. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/boast]])\n\n### Measuring, measures, and limits\n\nIn [10:12–16](../10/12.md), Paul speaks about “measures” and “limits.” He is referring to standards with which people compare themselves and rules according to which people act. He argues that he and his fellow workers have compared themselves to a standard that God has provided and work according to rules that God gave. He suggests that his opponents compare themselves to standards they have invented and do not follow the rules that God has given. Further, Paul argues that the rules God gave to him and those with him require them to be the ones who teach the Corinthians. Consider what words and phrases would express these ideas clearly in your language. \n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Ironic speech\n\nIn [10:1](../10/01.md), Paul describes himself as “meek” when he is with the Corinthians but “bold” when he is away. He is speaking ironically, that is, describing himself as his opponents do when he does not really believe it. This is clear from [10:10](../10/10.md), where Paul states that this opinion comes from others, not from himself. Further, it is possible that what Paul says in [10:10](../10/10.md) is also ironic speech: “we do not dare to classify or compare ourselves with some of the ones commending themselves.” It is likely, however, that Paul actually means this and is not speaking from another person’s perspective. Consider a natural way to express the ironic speech in [10:1](../10/01.md) so that your readers know that Paul is speaking from the perspective of his opponents.\n\n### War metaphor\n\nIn verses [10:3–6](../10/03.md), Paul speaks of preaching the gospel and opposing God’s enemies as if he and his fellow workers were fighting a war. While he and those with him do not try to kill their enemies, he does mean that they fight and struggle very hard. If possible, preserve this metaphor or express the idea in simile form. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the words “we,” “us,” and “our” to refer to himself and those who work with him. He does not include the Corinthians. You should assume that Paul only means himself and his fellow workers unless a note specifies otherwise. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### The word for “limit” and “area”\n\nThe word translated “limit” in [10:13](../10/13.md), [15](../10/15.md) and “area” in [10:16](../10/16.md) most generally refers to a straight stick that could be used for measuring things. In these verses, it could refer primarily to the standard by which things are measured or to the things that are measured. If the word refers to the standard by which things are measured, it refers primarily to what God has called Paul and his fellow workers to do. The UST generally follows this interpretation. If the word refers to the things that are measured, it refers primarily to the people or areas in which God has called Paul and his fellow workers to preach the gospel. The ULT generally follows this interpretation. Before you translate these verses, you should read [10:13–16](../10/13.md) and consider which interpretation best fits with what Paul is arguing. 10:1 yc1g rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases αὐτὸς δὲ ἐγὼ, Παῦλος 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a new topic, which Paul introduces with several strong words. This new topic concerns Paul himself and his ministry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces a new topic and focuses on Paul himself. Alternate translation: “As for me, I Paul,” or “Concerning me, Paul, I,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 10:1 rf4f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony ὃς κατὰ πρόσωπον μὲν ταπεινὸς ἐν ὑμῖν, ἀπὼν δὲ θαρρῶ εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul describes himself with words that the Corinthians or his enemies use. He does not mean that he thinks these words are actually true about him, but he brings them up to respond to what others are saying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that these are words that other people have said about Paul. Alternate translation: “who appears to be meek when face to face among you, but being absent, appears to be bold toward you” or “who am ‘meek’ when face to face among you, but being absent, am ‘bold’ toward you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) 10:1 w8g1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατὰ πρόσωπον 1 Here, the phrase **face to face** refers to being with someone physically or in person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression. Alternate translation: “when physically present” or “when bodily” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -1086,10 +1086,10 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 10:2 ik1p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τινας τοὺς λογιζομένους 1 Here Paul refers to people who are often called “the opponents.” It is not clear whether these people are some of the Corinthians or whether they have visited the Corinthians. What is clear is that they are saying bad things about Paul and claiming to have greater authority and a better gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “our opponents who regard” or “any people who regard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 10:2 i6hh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor περιπατοῦντας 1 Paul speaks of behavior in life as if it were **walking**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “acting” or “living our lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 10:2 t6lv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατὰ σάρκα 1 Here Paul uses the phrase **according to the flesh** to refer to human ways of thinking and acting. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a phrase that refers to human values or perspectives. Alternate translation: “according to what humans value” or “according to a human perspective” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -10:3 i2p5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse ([10:2](../10/02.md)) about how some people think that he and those with him walk “according to the flesh.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Indeed, though” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +10:3 i2p5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse ([10:2](../10/02.md)) about how some people think that he and his fellow workers walk according to the flesh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Indeed, though” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 10:3 cvd6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor περιπατοῦντες 1 You should translate **walking** as you did in [10:2](../10/02.md). Alternate translation: “acting” or “living our lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -10:3 zbet rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν σαρκὶ 1 Here, the phrase **in the flesh** indicates that Paul and those with him are humans like everyone else. He is contrasting how he is a human with how he wages war, which is not like how humans wage war. If possible, express this idea so it is clearly connected to how you translate **according to the flesh**. Alternate translation: “in human lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -10:3 k7h8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor οὐ & στρατευόμεθα 1 Here and in [10:4–6](../10/04.md), Paul speaks as if he and those with him were waging a **war**. He means that they proclaim the good news and defend it and believers against other people and powers that try to corrupt the good news and hurt believers. Paul does not mean that they are actually killing people and fighting with physical weapons. If possible, preserve the metaphor or express the idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “we are like people who wage war, but not” or “we do not fight” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +10:3 zbet rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν σαρκὶ 1 Here, the phrase **in the flesh** indicates that Paul and his fellow workers are humans like everyone else. He is contrasting how he is a human with how he wages war, which is not like how humans wage war. If possible, express this idea so it is clearly connected to how you translate **according to the flesh**. Alternate translation: “in human lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +10:3 k7h8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor οὐ & στρατευόμεθα 1 Here and in [10:4–6](../10/04.md), Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers were waging a **war**. He means that they proclaim the good news and defend it and believers against other people and powers that try to corrupt the good news and hurt believers. Paul does not mean that they are actually killing people and fighting with physical weapons. If possible, preserve the metaphor or express the idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “we are like people who wage war, but not” or “we do not fight” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) 10:3 gpd3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατὰ σάρκα 1 You should translate this phrase as you did in [10:2](../10/02.md). Alternate translation: “according to what humans value” or “according to a human perspective” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 10:4 ge87 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse ([10:3](../10/03.md)) about waging war not according to the flesh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 10:4 uf5s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor τὰ & ὅπλα τῆς στρατείας ἡμῶν οὐ σαρκικὰ, ἀλλὰ δυνατὰ τῷ Θεῷ πρὸς καθαίρεσιν ὀχυρωμάτων, λογισμοὺς καθαιροῦντες 1 Here, just as in [10:3](../10/03.md), Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers were involved in **warfare**. In this verse, he specifically speaks about their **weapons**, which God empowers. He also refers to **strongholds**, which are places that an army can easily defend. He defines the **strongholds** as **strategies** or arguments against him and the gospel. Paul means that God empowers him and his fellow workers to defeat and destroy these arguments. Paul does not mean that they are actually killing people and destroying physical strongholds. If possible, preserve the metaphor or express the idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “what we use to defend ourselves are like weapons of warfare that are not fleshly but are powerful to God for overcoming strategies and arguments, which are like strongholds” or “we do not fight with fleshly weapons but with arguments that are powerful to God for the defeating of powerful enemies and strategies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) From e7c539ff3e1c503249ec9e42f7862f54e9fb6b48 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: justplainjane47 Date: Wed, 25 Jan 2023 22:36:57 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 99/99] Edit 'tn_2CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- tn_2CO.tsv | 18 +++++++++--------- 1 file changed, 9 insertions(+), 9 deletions(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index ab030f809c..68dcc7dcfb 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -1151,17 +1151,17 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 10:14 ay6h rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 2 Here, the word **For** introduces Paul’s proof that the “limit” he mentioned in the previous verse does reach as far as the Corinthians (see [10:13](../10/13.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces proof for a previous statement. Alternate translation: “You can tell that is true because” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 10:14 ctjf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ & ὑπερεκτείνομεν ἑαυτούς 2 Here Paul is indicating that he and his fellow workers have not gone beyond the “limit” that he refers to in [10:13](../10/13.md). Express the idea so that the link to the previous verse is clear. Alternate translation: “we are not going beyond our limit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 10:14 lefl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς μὴ ἐφικνούμενοι εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul refers to what would need to be true if he and his fellow workers were actually **overextending** themselves. That would be true only if they did not **reach** or visit the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “which would only be true if we had not come to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -10:14 lpiu rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **for** introduces further evidence or proof for Paul’s claim that he and those with him were not **overextending** themselves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces evidence or proof. Alternate translation: “since in reality” or “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -10:14 wyzv ἐφθάσαμεν 1 Here, the phrase **we came** could indicate that: (1) Paul and those with him had already visited the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “we went” (2) Paul and those with him visited the Corinthians before Paul’s opponents visited the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “before anyone else did, we came” +10:14 lpiu rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **for** introduces further evidence or proof for Paul’s claim that he and his fellow workers were not **overextending** themselves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces evidence or proof. Alternate translation: “since in reality” or “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +10:14 wyzv ἐφθάσαμεν 1 Here, the phrase **we came** could indicate that: (1) Paul and his fellow workers had already visited the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “we went” (2) Paul and his fellow workers visited the Corinthians before Paul’s opponents visited the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “before anyone else did, we came” 10:15 hu9l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς τὰ ἄμετρα 1 See how you translated the similar phrase in [10:13](../10/13.md). Alternate translation: “in unmeasured ways” or “without any standards” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 10:15 l0bp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐλπίδα δὲ ἔχοντες, αὐξανομένης τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **hope** and **faith**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “but hoping, as you increasingly believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])\n 10:15 ax6w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μεγαλυνθῆναι 1 Here Paul does not state directly what is **enlarged**. He could mean that: (1) their ministry or work might **be enlarged**. Alternate translation: “that our ministry might be enlarged” (2) they might **be enlarged** or praised by the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “that we might be enlarged” or “that we might be praised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 10:15 ff38 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μεγαλυνθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “that God will enlarge our ministry” or “that God will enlarge us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -10:15 djvz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατὰ τὸν κανόνα ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **according to our limit** could refer to: (1) a **limit** or standard according to which Paul and those with him serve God. In this case, God increases or enlarges what he wants them to do. Alternate translation: “according to what God has called us to do” or “in what God wants us to do” (2) the area or places in which Paul and those with him serve God. In this case, God increases or enlarges the areas in which they serve. Alternate translation: “according to where we serve” or “in the places in which we serve” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +10:15 djvz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατὰ τὸν κανόνα ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **according to our limit** could refer to: (1) a **limit** or standard according to which Paul and his fellow workers serve God. In this case, God increases or enlarges what he wants them to do. Alternate translation: “according to what God has called us to do” or “in what God wants us to do” (2) the area or places in which Paul and his fellow workers serve God. In this case, God increases or enlarges the areas in which they serve. Alternate translation: “according to where we serve” or “in the places in which we serve” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 10:15 gqiz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς περισσείαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **abundance**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “abundantly” or “in abundant ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 10:16 nx8k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰ ὑπερέκεινα ὑμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **the {places} beyond you** refers to the areas and people who lived to the west of Corinth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that identifies these areas and people more explicitly. Alternate translation: “the places west of you” or “the places I would go if I traveled through your town” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 10:16 xi00 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐν ἀλλοτρίῳ κανόνι & τὰ ἕτοιμα 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things someone has accomplished in his or her area” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -10:16 raq7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν ἀλλοτρίῳ κανόνι 1 Here, just as with the word “limit” in [10:15](../10/15.md), the word **area** could refer to: (1) a measure or standard according to which people serve God. In this case, the **accomplished** things are done according to a measure or standard that fits with someone else besides Paul and those with him. Alternate translation: “according to what God has called other people to do” or “in what God wants others to do” (2) the area or places in which people serve God. In this case, God increases or enlarges the areas in which someone else besides Paul and those with him serve. Alternate translation: “according to where other people serve” or “in the places in which other people serve” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +10:16 raq7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν ἀλλοτρίῳ κανόνι 1 Here, just as with the word “limit” in [10:15](../10/15.md), the word **area** could refer to: (1) a measure or standard according to which people serve God. In this case, the **accomplished** things are done according to a measure or standard that fits with someone else besides Paul and his fellow workers. Alternate translation: “according to what God has called other people to do” or “in what God wants others to do” (2) the area or places in which people serve God. In this case, God increases or enlarges the areas in which someone else besides Paul and his fellow workers serve. Alternate translation: “according to where other people serve” or “in the places in which other people serve” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 10:17 t3bz rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations δὲ 1 Here Paul quotes from the Old Testament scriptures, specifically from [Jeremiah 9:24](../jer/09/24.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could format these words in a different way and include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “But as Jeremiah wrote in the Scriptures,” or “But as you can read in the Scriptures,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 10:17 q8cc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p ὁ & καυχώμενος & καυχάσθω 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you can state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one boasting must boast” or “any person who boasts needs to boast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) 10:18 wfl6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse ([10:17](../10/17.md)) about how people should boast. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “As you can see,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) @@ -1169,7 +1169,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 10:18 h81t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations οὐ & ὁ ἑαυτὸν συνιστάνων, ἐκεῖνός ἐστιν δόκιμος 1 Although the term **himself** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “that one commending himself or herself” or “those commending themselves are not approved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 10:18 n5v6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ & ὁ ἑαυτὸν συνιστάνων, ἐκεῖνός ἐστιν δόκιμος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “the Lord does not approve that one commending himself” or “that one commending himself does not receive approval” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 10:18 sy2r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὃν ὁ Κύριος συνίστησιν 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom the Lord commends is approved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -11:intro abce 0 # 2 Corinthians 11 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n7. Paul defends his apostolic authority (10:1–13:10)\n * Paul defends his speech and conduct (11:1–15)\n * Paul boasts about his suffering (11:16–33)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Fools and foolishness\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul refers to being “foolish” or a “fool.” These words refer to a person who makes bad decisions and who cares about things that are not really valuable. It does not primarily refer to someone who does not know very much. Paul argues that the false teachers are “fools,” which means that they make bad decisions and care about things that are not important. He also describes how he is responding to the false teachers as “foolish.” He means that he speaks in ways that he considers to be “foolish,” but he speaks in these ways because he thinks the Corinthians will understand him if he speaks in these “foolish” ways. Consider how you might express the idea of “foolishness” in your language. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/foolish]])\n\n### False teachers\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul is defending himself against false teachers who were claiming to be better than him and to preach a better gospel than his gospel. Paul never refers to these false teachers by name, but he does call them “false apostles” and “deceitful” (see [11:13](../11/13.md)). He also responds to some of their claims about themselves in [11:22–23](../11/22.md). Paul responds to the false teachers in two primary ways. First, he argues that the things that they boast about and claim for themselves are not important or valuable. Second, he argues that even in these things that are not important, he is better than they are. Make sure that your translation clearly indicates that Paul is responding the false teachers in these ways.\n\n### Financial support for teachers\n\nIn this chapter, Paul describes how he did not ask for or receive money and support from the Corinthians. In Paul’s culture, it was common for traveling teachers to ask for and receive money from the people they were teaching. Paul implies that his opponents, the false teachers, did ask for and receive money. He also implies that the Corinthians thought that the message of the false teachers was more valuable than Paul’s message because they charged for money. Paul argues in response that he cared more for the Corinthians than the false teachers do. In fact, he states that he can boast more than the false teachers because he did not receive money. Make sure that your translation expresses and implies these ideas. \n\n### Boasting\n\nJust as in the previous chapter, in this chapter Paul refers multiple times to “boasting.” In Paul’s culture, not all boasting was considered bad. Instead, there were good and bad kinds of boasting. In these verses, Paul boasts because his opponents, the false teachers, boast. He does not think that this boasting is necessary or good, but he does it to respond to his opponents. Continue to express the idea as you did in the previous chapter. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/boast]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Marriage metaphor\n\nIn [11:2](../11/02.md), Paul speaks as if the Corinthians were a young woman and as if he were the young woman’s father. He intends to marry his daughter to Christ, and he wants to keep his daughter pure and perfect until then. He means that he has helped unite the Corinthians to Christ, and he wants to make sure they stay completely faithful to Christ until Christ comes back. If possible, preserve the marriage metaphor or express it as a simile. See the notes on [11:2](../11/02.md) for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### Irony\n\nMultiple times in this chapter, Paul uses irony. In other words, he speaks words that he does not agree with in order to make a point. He does this in [11:5](../11/05.md), where he refers to “super-apostles”; in [11:8](../11/08.md), where he says that he “robbed other churches”; in [11:19](../11/19.md), where he says that the Corinthians “gladly bear with the foolish, being wise”; and in [11:21](../11/21.md), where he says that he speaks “according to dishonor” that he and those with him ”have been weak.” In each of these verses, he does not actually agree with these words. Rather, he speaks from the perspective of the Corinthians or his opponents. He does this to show that these perspectives are wrong. See the notes on each of these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [11:7](../11/07.md), [11](../11/11.md), [22–23](../11/22.md), [29](../11/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. Paul asks these questions to include the Corinthians in what he is arguing, not because he is looking for information. If your language does not use questions in this way, you could include answers to the questions, or you could express them as statements or exclamations. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### The long list in [11:23–28](../11/23.md)\n\nIn [11:23–28](../11/23.md), Paul gives a long list of hardships and difficulties he has experienced while he preached the good news. The ULT and UST illustrate different ways to break this list up into pieces. Consider how you might naturally express a long list in your language. +11:intro abce 0 # 2 Corinthians 11 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n7. Paul defends his apostolic authority (10:1–13:10)\n * Paul defends his speech and conduct (11:1–15)\n * Paul boasts about his suffering (11:16–33)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Fools and foolishness\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul refers to being “foolish” or a “fool.” These words refer to a person who makes bad decisions and who cares about things that are not really valuable. It does not primarily refer to someone who does not know very much. Paul argues that the false teachers are “fools,” which means that they make bad decisions and care about things that are not important. He also describes how he is responding to the false teachers as “foolish.” He means that he speaks in ways that he considers to be “foolish,” but he speaks in these ways because he thinks the Corinthians will understand him if he speaks in these “foolish” ways. Consider how you might express the idea of “foolishness” in your language. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/foolish]])\n\n### False teachers\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul is defending himself against false teachers who were claiming to be better than him and to preach a better gospel than his gospel. Paul never refers to these false teachers by name, but he does call them “false apostles” and “deceitful” (see [11:13](../11/13.md)). He also responds to some of their claims about themselves in [11:22–23](../11/22.md). Paul responds to the false teachers in two primary ways. First, he argues that the things that they boast about and claim for themselves are not important or valuable. Second, he argues that even in these things that are not important, he is better than they are. Make sure that your translation clearly indicates that Paul is responding the false teachers in these ways.\n\n### Financial support for teachers\n\nIn this chapter, Paul describes how he did not ask for or receive money and support from the Corinthians. In Paul’s culture, it was common for traveling teachers to ask for and receive money from the people they were teaching. Paul implies that his opponents, the false teachers, did ask for and receive money. He also implies that the Corinthians thought that the message of the false teachers was more valuable than Paul’s message because they charged for money. Paul argues in response that he cared more for the Corinthians than the false teachers do. In fact, he states that he can boast more than the false teachers because he did not receive money. Make sure that your translation expresses and implies these ideas. \n\n### Boasting\n\nJust as in the previous chapter, in this chapter Paul refers multiple times to “boasting.” In Paul’s culture, not all boasting was considered bad. Instead, there were good and bad kinds of boasting. In these verses, Paul boasts because his opponents, the false teachers, boast. He does not think that this boasting is necessary or good, but he does it to respond to his opponents. Continue to express the idea as you did in the previous chapter. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/boast]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Marriage metaphor\n\nIn [11:2](../11/02.md), Paul speaks as if the Corinthians were a young woman and as if he were the young woman’s father. He intends to marry his daughter to Christ, and he wants to keep his daughter pure and perfect until then. He means that he has helped unite the Corinthians to Christ, and he wants to make sure they stay completely faithful to Christ until Christ comes back. If possible, preserve the marriage metaphor or express it as a simile. See the notes on [11:2](../11/02.md) for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### Irony\n\nMultiple times in this chapter, Paul uses irony. In other words, he speaks words that he does not agree with in order to make a point. He does this in [11:5](../11/05.md), where he refers to “super-apostles”; in [11:8](../11/08.md), where he says that he “robbed other churches”; in [11:19](../11/19.md), where he says that the Corinthians gladly bear with the foolish, being wise; and in [11:21](../11/21.md), where he says that he speaks according to dishonor that he and his fellow workers have been weak. In each of these verses, he does not actually agree with these words. Rather, he speaks from the perspective of the Corinthians or his opponents. He does this to show that these perspectives are wrong. See the notes on each of these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [11:7](../11/07.md), [11](../11/11.md), [22–23](../11/22.md), [29](../11/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. Paul asks these questions to include the Corinthians in what he is arguing, not because he is looking for information. If your language does not use questions in this way, you could include answers to the questions, or you could express them as statements or exclamations. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### The long list in [11:23–28](../11/23.md)\n\nIn [11:23–28](../11/23.md), Paul gives a long list of hardships and difficulties he has experienced while he preached the good news. The ULT and UST illustrate different ways to break this list up into pieces. Consider how you might naturally express a long list in your language. 11:1 r4q6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μικρόν τι ἀφροσύνης 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **foolishness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “as I act a little foolishly” or “as I now say what is foolish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 11:1 b4dm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μικρόν τι ἀφροσύνης 1 Here, the **foolishness** that Paul refers to is how he is about to boast about his qualifications as an apostle. Paul considers this to be **foolishness**, but he will boast anyways to help the Corinthians realize that he and the gospel that he preaches come from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **foolishness** refers to more explicit. Alternate translation: “as I am about to be a little bit foolish” or “in a little bit of foolishness that I am about to speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 11:1 sou7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀλλὰ καὶ ἀνέχεσθέ μου 1 Here, this clause could be: (1) a statement of what the Corinthians are already doing, either as they listen to this letter or in the past when Paul visited them. Alternate translation: “but in fact you are already bearing with me” (2) a command to act in this way. Alternate translation: “and in fact you need to bear with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1186,7 +1186,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 11:4 wq57 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** could introduce a reason why: (1) Paul is afraid that someone will corrupt the Corinthians (see [11:3](../11/03.md)). Alternate translation: “I am afraid of that because” (2) the Corinthians should “bear with” Paul (see [11:1](../11/01.md)), which is that they “bear with” these false teachers. Alternate translation: “You should bear with me because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 11:4 era4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ μὲν & ὁ ἐρχόμενος 1 Here Paul is speaking as if **one coming** to the Corinthians and proclaiming **another Jesus** were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it had already or will actually happen. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by using a word such as “when.” Alternate translation: “when indeed one coming” or “indeed whenever someone comes and” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 11:4 zj79 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ ἐρχόμενος 1 Here Paul could be referring to: (1) any person or group of people. Alternate translation: “anyone coming” or “any person coming” (2) a specific person whom Paul knows about. Alternate translation: “a person coming” or “that person coming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -11:4 l7m8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πνεῦμα ἕτερον 1 Here, the phrase **a different spirit** could refer to: (1) an evil **spirit** in contrast to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “a spirit different than the Holy Spirit” (2) an attitude in contrast to the attitude that Paul and those with him offered to the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “a different mindset” or “a different attitude” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:4 l7m8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πνεῦμα ἕτερον 1 Here, the phrase **a different spirit** could refer to: (1) an evil **spirit** in contrast to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “a spirit different than the Holy Spirit” (2) an attitude in contrast to the attitude that Paul and his fellow workers offered to the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “a different mindset” or “a different attitude” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 11:4 fs5z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καλῶς ἀνέχεσθε 1 See how you translated the similar phrase in [11:1](../11/01.md). Here Paul means that the Corinthians listen patiently even when false teachers are telling them lies. He does not approve of this behavior, but he uses this clause to link what he is saying here with what he said in [11:1](../11/01.md). Alternate translation: “you willingly put up with it” or “you listen attentively to it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 11:5 l3on rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** could introduce: (1) a reason why what Paul told them about Jesus, the Spirit, and the gospel (see [11:4](../11/04.md)) takes priority over what anyone else tells them. Alternate translation: “So, what I taught you has priority, since” (2) a reason why they should “bear with” Paul (see [11:1](../11/01.md)). Alternate translation: “Further, I want you to bear with me because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 11:5 ptd7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑστερηκέναι τῶν 1 Here Paul speaks as if he is not below or **short of** the **“super-apostles”**. He means that he does not have less power and authority than they do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to be less than the” or “to have less authority than the” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1446,9 +1446,9 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 12:18 oket rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ τοῖς αὐτοῖς ἴχνεσιν? 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and Titus walked on the same path so closely together that the person walking behind stepped in the **footsteps** of the person in front. He means that they did and said very similar things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Did we not act in the same ways” or “Did we not behave in very similar ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 12:19 g1iw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πάλαι δοκεῖτε ὅτι ὑμῖν ἀπολογούμεθα? 1 Paul is using the question form to deny that what he has said is primarily for the purpose of **defending ourselves**. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Do not think that all of this time we have been defending ourselves to you!” or “I want you to realize that all of this time we have not been defending ourselves to you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 12:19 m3vx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάλαι 1 Here, the phrase **all this time** refers to everything that Paul has written so far in this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “throughout this letter” or “while you listened to what we have said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -12:19 ih3e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατέναντι Θεοῦ 1 Here, just as with the phrase “in the presence of God” in [2:17](../02/17.md), the phrase **Before God** could indicate that: (1) Paul and those with him speak as they do because they know that God sees or knows what they do. So, they speak in a way that pleases God. Alternate translation: “As God desires” or “With God watching” (2) Paul and those with him speak with God as a witness guaranteeing what they say. Alternate translation: “With God as witness” or “With God guaranteeing it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -12:19 hcor rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ 1 Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with **Christ**. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains that Paul and those with him speak from their perspective as those united to Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and in union with Christ” or “and because of being united to Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -12:19 y0fs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰ & πάντα 1 Here, the phrase **all these things** refers primarily to what Paul has written in this letter so far. However, it also includes everything that Paul and those with him say and do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “all the things we say and do, including in this letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +12:19 ih3e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατέναντι Θεοῦ 1 Here, just as with the phrase “in the presence of God” in [2:17](../02/17.md), the phrase **Before God** could indicate that: (1) Paul and his fellow workers speak as they do because they know that God sees or knows what they do. So, they speak in a way that pleases God. Alternate translation: “As God desires” or “With God watching” (2) Paul and his fellow workers speak with God as a witness guaranteeing what they say. Alternate translation: “With God as witness” or “With God guaranteeing it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +12:19 hcor rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ 1 Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with **Christ**. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains that Paul and his fellow workers speak from their perspective as those united to Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and in union with Christ” or “and because of being united to Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +12:19 y0fs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰ & πάντα 1 Here, the phrase **all these things** refers primarily to what Paul has written in this letter so far. However, it also includes everything that Paul and his fellow workers say and do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “all the things we say and do, including in this letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 12:19 oqmw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀγαπητοί 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that he himself loves them. Alternate translation: “people whom I love” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 12:19 vg3u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑπὲρ τῆς ὑμῶν οἰκοδομῆς 1 Here, Paul is speaking of the Corinthian believers as if they were a building. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a more natural metaphor for this or you could state the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar phrase in [10:8](../10/08.md). Alternate translation: “are to help you become more faithful to Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 12:20 fqdk rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** could introduce: (1) a reason why Paul has written what he has in this letter. Alternate translation: “I have written these things because” (2) a reason why Paul wants to build them up. Alternate translation: “I want to build you up because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])